SlideShare a Scribd company logo
Oracleâ Enterprise Manager 
Administrator’s Guide 
Release 2.2 
September 2000 
Part No. A85248-01
Oracle® Enterprise Manager Administrator’s Guide, Release 2.2 
Part No. A85248-01 
Copyright © 1996, 2000, Oracle Corporation. All rights reserved. 
The Programs (which include both the software and documentation) contain proprietary information of 
Oracle Corporation; they are provided under a license agreement containing restrictions on use and 
disclosure and are also protected by copyright, patent, and other intellectual and industrial property 
laws. Reverse engineering, disassembly, or decompilation of the Programs is prohibited. 
The information contained in this document is subject to change without notice. If you find any problems 
in the documentation, please report them to us in writing. Oracle Corporation does not warrant that this 
document is error free. Except as may be expressly permitted in your license agreement for these 
Programs, no part of these Programs may be reproduced or transmitted in any form or by any means, 
electronic or mechanical, for any purpose, without the express written permission of Oracle Corporation. 
If the Programs are delivered to the U.S. Government or anyone licensing or using the programs on 
behalf of the U.S. Government, the following notice is applicable: 
Restricted Rights Notice Programs delivered subject to the DOD FAR Supplement are "commercial 
computer software" and use, duplication, and disclosure of the Programs, including documentation, 
shall be subject to the licensing restrictions set forth in the applicable Oracle license agreement. 
Otherwise, Programs delivered subject to the Federal Acquisition Regulations are "restricted computer 
software" and use, duplication, and disclosure of the Programs shall be subject to the restrictions in FAR 
52.227-19, Commercial Computer Software - Restricted Rights (June, 1987). Oracle Corporation, 500 
Oracle Parkway, Redwood City, CA 94065. 
The Programs are not intended for use in any nuclear, aviation, mass transit, medical, or other inherently 
dangerous applications. It shall be the licensee's responsibility to take all appropriate fail-safe, backup, 
redundancy, and other measures to ensure the safe use of such applications if the Programs are used for 
such purposes, and Oracle Corporation disclaims liability for any damages caused by such use of the 
Programs. 
Oracle® is a registered trademark, and Oracle7, Oracle8, Oracle8i, Oracle Expert, Oracle Trace, Net8, 
PL/SQL, SQL*, SQL*Net, and SQL*Plus are trademarks or registered trademarks of Oracle Corporation. 
All other company or product names mentioned are used for identification purposes only and may be 
trademarks of their respective owners. Windows, Windows NT, Visual C++, and OLE are trademarks of 
Microsoft Corporation. Netscape, Netscape Certificater Server, Netscape FastTrack Server, Netscape 
Navigator, Netscape ONE, SuiteSpot, and the Netscape N and Ship’s Wheel logos are registered 
trademarks of Netscape Communications Corporation in the United States and other countries. 
OraTcl - Copyright 1993 Tom Poindexter and US West Advanced Technologies, Inc. Permission to use, 
copy, modify, and distribute the software and its documentation for any purpose and without fee is 
hereby granted, provided that the copyright notice appear in all copies. Tom Poindexter and U S WEST 
make no representations about the suitability of this software for any purpose. It is provided as is 
without express or implied warranty. By use of this software the user agrees to indemnify and hold 
harmless Tom Poindexter and U S WEST from any claims or liability for loss arising out of such use.
Contents 
Send Us Your Comments ................................................................................................................... xi 
Preface........................................................................................................................................................... xiii 
iii 
Part I Oracle Enterprise Manager Framework 
1 Console 
Enterprise Manager Console ............................................................................................................... 1-2 
Components..................................................................................................................................... 1-2 
Navigator .....................................................................................................................................1-2 
Group ...........................................................................................................................................1-2 
Jobs ..............................................................................................................................................1-3 
Events ..........................................................................................................................................1-3 
Console Menus ...................................................................................................................................... 1-4 
Context-Sensitive Menus................................................................................................................. 1-4 
File Menu......................................................................................................................................... 1-5 
View Menu ...................................................................................................................................... 1-5 
System Menu................................................................................................................................... 1-5 
Tools Menu...................................................................................................................................... 1-6 
Database Applications .................................................................................................................1-6 
Service Management ...................................................................................................................1-6 
Help Menu ....................................................................................................................................... 1-7 
Managing Enterprise Manager Administrators ................................................................................ 1-8 
Managing Administrator Accounts ................................................................................................. 1-9
iv 
Creating or Editing an Administrator Account.............................................................................. 1-10 
Reassigning Object Ownership...................................................................................................... 1-11 
Administrator Preferences ............................................................................................................. 1-11 
General........................................................................................................................................... 1-12 
Notification .................................................................................................................................... 1-12 
Filters .........................................................................................................................................1-13 
Email ..........................................................................................................................................1-15 
Paging ........................................................................................................................................1-17 
Paging Status Codes for Numeric Pages ...................................................................................1-18 
Email/Paging Message Body Definition ...................................................................................1-19 
Paging Server .............................................................................................................................1-20 
Schedule......................................................................................................................................... 1-22 
Permissions .................................................................................................................................... 1-23 
Preferred Credentials ..................................................................................................................... 1-25 
Setting Administrator Credentials .............................................................................................1-26 
Saving Logon Information as a Preferred Credential .................................................................... 1-27 
Saving the Contents of a List......................................................................................................... 1-27 
Configuring and Starting the Paging Service................................................................................... 1-28 
Setting Up Paging.......................................................................................................................... 1-29 
Adding a Paging Server ................................................................................................................. 1-30 
Adding Paging Carrier................................................................................................................... 1-31 
Specifying Paging Notification Preferences.................................................................................. 1-32 
Other Paging Server Operations .................................................................................................... 1-33 
Removing a Paging Server ........................................................................................................1-33 
Viewing Information on Paging Server .....................................................................................1-33 
Pinging a Paging Server ............................................................................................................1-33 
Querying Status of the Paging Service ......................................................................................1-34 
Stopping the Paging Service ......................................................................................................1-34 
Removing a Paging Carrier .......................................................................................................1-34 
Editing a Paging Carrier ............................................................................................................1-35 
Viewing Information about a Paging Carrier ............................................................................1-35 
Testing a Paging Carrier ............................................................................................................1-35 
Creating Enterprise Manager Reports ............................................................................................. 1-35 
Enterprise Report versus Database Configuration/Status Reports ................................................ 1-36 
Enterprise Report (General Systems) ........................................................................................1-36
Database Configuration/Status Report ......................................................................................1-36 
Requirements................................................................................................................................. 1-37 
Launching the Report Wizard ....................................................................................................... 1-37 
Creating Enterprise Reports ......................................................................................................1-37 
Creating DBA Studio Reports ...................................................................................................1-38 
v 
2 Navigator 
Navigator Pane...................................................................................................................................... 2-2 
Populating the Navigator Tree......................................................................................................... 2-2 
Expanding Objects in the Navigator................................................................................................ 2-2 
Viewing Specific Tree Objects........................................................................................................ 2-4 
Launching Tools.............................................................................................................................. 2-4 
Navigator Menu .................................................................................................................................... 2-5 
Discovering Services ............................................................................................................................. 2-7 
Adding a Service .........................................................................................................................2-8 
Refreshing a Service ....................................................................................................................2-9 
Removing a Service ....................................................................................................................2-9 
Pinging the Intelligent Agent........................................................................................................... 2-9 
Determining Node Properties ........................................................................................................ 2-10 
Manipulating Objects in the Navigator ............................................................................................ 2-10 
Administering Objects................................................................................................................... 2-10 
Copying Navigator Objects ........................................................................................................... 2-10 
Apache Web Servers........................................................................................................................... 2-11 
Discovering Apache Web Servers................................................................................................. 2-11 
Determining the Status of Apache Web Server............................................................................. 2-11 
Paging/Email Blackout....................................................................................................................... 2-12 
Specifying Total Paging/Email Blackout ...................................................................................... 2-12 
Defining a Paging/Email Blackout ................................................................................................ 2-12 
Making a Copy of an Existing Blackout Schedule........................................................................ 2-14 
Turning Blackout Schedules On and Off ...................................................................................... 2-14 
Deleting Paging/Email Blackout Periods ...................................................................................... 2-14 
Viewing Blackout Periods............................................................................................................. 2-14 
Removing a Node from the Navigator .............................................................................................. 2-15 
Node Removal Failure........................................................................................................................ 2-15
3 Groups 
vi 
Group Pane............................................................................................................................................ 3-2 
Group Menu .......................................................................................................................................... 3-3 
Managing Groups ................................................................................................................................. 3-4 
Creating a Group.............................................................................................................................. 3-4 
Group General Page ....................................................................................................................3-5 
Group Permissions Page ..............................................................................................................3-6 
Manipulating Group Views ............................................................................................................. 3-7 
Monitoring Status ............................................................................................................................ 3-7 
Expanding Objects........................................................................................................................... 3-8 
Groups .........................................................................................................................................3-8 
Databases and Other Discovered Services ..................................................................................3-8 
Launching Tools from a Group ....................................................................................................... 3-8 
Adding Objects to a Group .............................................................................................................. 3-9 
Deleting Objects from the Group Pane............................................................................................ 3-9 
Modifying a Group ........................................................................................................................ 3-10 
Removing Groups.......................................................................................................................... 3-10 
Example: Creating a Group ........................................................................................................... 3-11 
4 Jobs 
Job Process ............................................................................................................................................ 4-2 
Job Tasks ......................................................................................................................................... 4-2 
Writing SQL*Plus Scripts ...........................................................................................................4-3 
Job Credentials................................................................................................................................. 4-4 
Submitting Jobs ............................................................................................................................... 4-5 
Cancelling Jobs................................................................................................................................ 4-5 
Job Pane................................................................................................................................................. 4-6 
Active Job Pane ............................................................................................................................... 4-7 
Context-sensitive Menu options ..................................................................................................4-8 
History Page..................................................................................................................................... 4-9 
Job Menu ............................................................................................................................................. 4-10 
Job Library..................................................................................................................................... 4-11 
Creating, Modifying, or Viewing a Job............................................................................................. 4-12 
Creating a New Job........................................................................................................................ 4-12 
Modifying a Saved Job .................................................................................................................. 4-13
Viewing Job Details ...................................................................................................................... 4-14 
General Page.................................................................................................................................. 4-14 
Job Task Page ................................................................................................................................ 4-15 
Job Parameters Page ...................................................................................................................... 4-17 
Job Schedule Page ......................................................................................................................... 4-17 
Job Permissions Page .................................................................................................................... 4-18 
Job Progress Page .......................................................................................................................... 4-19 
Job Output Dialog Box ..............................................................................................................4-20 
Example: Creating a Job................................................................................................................ 4-21 
Oracle Job Tasks................................................................................................................................. 4-23 
Oracle Database Tasks .................................................................................................................. 4-24 
Enterprise Manager Wizard Database Tasks ............................................................................4-24 
Operating System or Node Tasks .................................................................................................. 4-27 
Tcl Script Examples ..................................................................................................................4-29 
Listener Tasks................................................................................................................................ 4-30 
vii 
5 Events 
What’s New in Events........................................................................................................................... 5-2 
Event System Overview........................................................................................................................ 5-4 
Using Events.................................................................................................................................... 5-4 
Creating Events ...........................................................................................................................5-5 
Registering Events .......................................................................................................................5-6 
Event Occurrences........................................................................................................................... 5-7 
Event Notifications ......................................................................................................................5-7 
Notifying Administrators ............................................................................................................5-8 
Interpreting Events ......................................................................................................................5-8 
Correcting Problems...................................................................................................................... 5-10 
Event Categories and Types............................................................................................................... 5-10 
Fault Management Event Tests ..................................................................................................... 5-11 
Space Management Event Tests.................................................................................................... 5-11 
Resource Management Event Tests............................................................................................... 5-12 
Performance Management Event Tests ......................................................................................... 5-12 
Unsolicited Event Tests................................................................................................................. 5-12 
Registering Interest in an Unsolicited Event .............................................................................5-12 
Setting the Parameters Property Sheet for Unsolicited Events ................................................5-13
viii 
Raising an Unsolicited Event Test ............................................................................................5-14 
Raising Unsolicited Events Via Enterprise Manager Jobs ........................................................5-15 
Unsolicited Event Caveats .........................................................................................................5-21 
Event Pane ........................................................................................................................................... 5-21 
Alerts Page..................................................................................................................................... 5-22 
Viewing Alerts ...........................................................................................................................5-23 
History Page................................................................................................................................... 5-23 
Registered Page ............................................................................................................................. 5-23 
Event Menu ......................................................................................................................................... 5-24 
Context-Sensitive Menus............................................................................................................... 5-25 
Event Library Dialog ..................................................................................................................... 5-26 
Editing an Event ........................................................................................................................5-26 
Oracle Event Tests .....................................................................................................................5-26 
Event Viewer ....................................................................................................................................... 5-27 
General........................................................................................................................................... 5-27 
Log................................................................................................................................................. 5-28 
Notification Details........................................................................................................................ 5-28 
Creating, Modifying, and Registering an Event .............................................................................. 5-29 
Modifying a Registered Event ....................................................................................................... 5-30 
Event General Page........................................................................................................................ 5-31 
Event Tests Page............................................................................................................................ 5-33 
Event Parameters Page .................................................................................................................. 5-34 
Parameters .................................................................................................................................5-35 
Event Permissions Page................................................................................................................. 5-35 
Event Progress Page ...................................................................................................................... 5-37 
Example: Creating and Registering an Event................................................................................ 5-37 
Administrator Event Notification .................................................................................................. 5-40 
Oracle Event Tests .............................................................................................................................. 5-40 
Database Fault Management Event Tests...................................................................................... 5-41 
Node Fault Management Events.................................................................................................... 5-41 
Listener Fault Management Events ............................................................................................... 5-42 
Data Gatherer Fault Management Events...................................................................................... 5-42 
Numeric Pager Job/Event Ids ........................................................................................................ 5-42 
General Event System Troubleshooting Procedures ..................................................................... 5-43 
Obtaining Enterprise Manager Repository Status .....................................................................5-43
Event System Features and Requirements ....................................................................................... 5-43 
ix 
Part II The Database Administration Tools 
6 DBA Management Pack 
DBA Studio ............................................................................................................................................ 7-2 
Common Features of DBA Management Pack Functionality .......................................................... 7-3 
Tree Views and Property Sheets...................................................................................................... 7-3 
Multi-Column Lists ......................................................................................................................... 7-3 
Database Version Awareness .......................................................................................................... 7-3 
Database Reports ............................................................................................................................. 7-3 
Logging of Database Changes......................................................................................................... 7-3 
Showing Object DDL ...................................................................................................................... 7-3 
Show SQL ....................................................................................................................................... 7-4 
Show Dependencies......................................................................................................................... 7-4 
Right-Mouse Commands................................................................................................................. 7-4 
Font Settings.................................................................................................................................... 7-4 
Advanced Mode............................................................................................................................... 7-4 
DBA Management Pack Functionality and Wizards ........................................................................ 7-5 
Instance Management...................................................................................................................... 7-6 
Database Operations ....................................................................................................................7-7 
Stored Configurations .................................................................................................................7-8 
Sessions .......................................................................................................................................7-8 
In-Doubt Transactions .................................................................................................................7-9 
Resource Consumer Groups ........................................................................................................7-9 
Resource Plans ............................................................................................................................7-9 
Resource Plan Schedule ..............................................................................................................7-9 
Schema Management..................................................................................................................... 7-10 
Tree List by Schema ..................................................................................................................7-11 
Editing an Object .......................................................................................................................7-12 
Creating Objects ........................................................................................................................7-12 
Security Management.................................................................................................................... 7-13 
User Operations .........................................................................................................................7-14 
Role Operations .........................................................................................................................7-15 
Profile Operations .....................................................................................................................7-15
x 
Storage Management ............................................................................................................ ........ 7-16 
Controlfile Operations ...............................................................................................................7-17 
Tablespace Operations ...............................................................................................................7-18 
Datafile Operations ....................................................................................................................7-18 
Rollback Segment Operations ...................................................................................................7-18 
Redo Log Group Operations .....................................................................................................7-18 
Archive Log Operations ............................................................................................................7-18 
Replication Management ............................................................................................................... 7-18 
JServer Management ..................................................................................................................... 7-19 
Cache Management ....................................................................................................................... 7-19 
SQL*Plus Worksheet..................................................................................................................... 7-20 
Wizards .......................................................................................................................................... 7-20 
A Enterprise Manager Event Handler 
How the Event Handler Works............................................................................................................ A-2 
How to Set Up the Event Handler ....................................................................................................... A-3 
Defining Event Filters........................................................................................................................... A-4 
Filter Syntax..................................................................................................................................... A-4 
The Event Logger Templates........................................................................................................... A-5 
The Command Executor Templates ................................................................................................ A-8 
Starting up and Running the Event Handler.................................................................................. A-10 
Stopping the Event Handler ......................................................................................................A-12 
Troubleshooting Tips..................................................................................................................... A-12 
Tracing........................................................................................................................................... A-14 
Sample Filters and Templates:....................................................................................................... A-15 
Filters: .......................................................................................................................................A-15 
Templates .................................................................................................................................A-15 
Known Issues....................................................................................................................................... A-16 
Differences between Solaris and Windows NT................................................................................. A-17 
B Keyboard Shortcuts 
Index
Send Us Your Comments 
xi 
Oracle Enterprise Manager Administrator’s Guide, Release 2.2 
Part No. A85248-01 
Oracle Corporation welcomes your comments and suggestions on the quality and usefulness of this 
document. Your input is an important part of the information used for revision. 
n Did you find any errors? 
n Is the information clearly presented? 
n Do you need more information? If so, where? 
n Are the examples correct? Do you need more examples? 
n What features did you like most? 
If you find any errors or have any other suggestions for improvement, please indicate the document 
title and part number, and the chapter, section, and page number (if available). You can send com-ments 
to us in the following ways: 
n FAX: (650) 506-7200 Attn: Oracle System Management Products 
n Postal service: 
Oracle Corporation 
Oracle System Management Products Documentation Manager 
500 Oracle Parkway, 50p5 
Redwood Shores, CA 94065 
USA 
If you would like a reply, please give your name, address, telephone number, and (optionally) elec-tronic 
mail address. 
If you have problems with the software, please contact your local Oracle Support Services.
xii
Preface 
xiii 
This chapter describes the purpose and organization of this guide. The following 
information is discussed: 
n Purpose of this Guide 
n Audience 
n How this Guide Is Organized 
n How to Use This Guide 
n Conventions Used in This Guide 
n Product Documentation 
n Related Publications
Purpose of this Guide 
xiv 
This guide describes Oracle® Enterprise Manager, Release 2.2: Oracle’s system 
management Console, common services, and integrated platform graphical tools. 
Oracle Enterprise Manager is bundled with the DBA Management Pack, which is an 
integrated set of standard database administration applications to help automate 
and simplify the common daily tasks of administrators. These supplemental 
applications focus on specific areas of database administration, helping 
administrators with their daily and routine tasks of managing databases and other 
services and keeping them operational. 
From the client interface, the Oracle Enterprise Manager Console, you can do the 
following: 
n Centrally administer, diagnose, and tune multiple databases 
n Manage non-database Oracle products and services 
n Effectively monitor and respond to the health of your Oracle family of products 
and third-party services 24 hours a day 
n Schedule jobs on multiple nodes at varying time intervals 
n Monitor networked services for events 
n Customize your display by organizing databases and other services into logical 
administrative groups 
While using Enterprise Manager products, you should refer to the online help for 
specific information on the displayed dialog box, menu, or window. You can 
display the online help by pressing F1 or selecting a Help button if present. 
For an overview of the Oracle Enterprise Manager system, see the Oracle Enterprise 
Manager Concepts Guide.
xv 
Audience 
This guide is written for those who wish to use Oracle Enterprise Manager to 
perform system administration tasks. 
This guide assumes you are familiar with the administrative tasks you wish to 
perform. If you are not, refer to the Oracle server documentation set. The Oracle 
server documentation set contains specific and thorough descriptions of the 
database administration tasks you can perform with Enterprise Manager 
applications. In addition, the Oracle server documentation set provides 
recommendations on how to administer your database optimally. If you have not 
yet read the introductory chapters of the Oracle server administrator’s guide, we 
recommend that you do so. These chapters describe the specific responsibilities of a 
database administrator. 
You should also be familiar with the operation of your specific Microsoft Windows 
or UNIX system. See the documentation for your Windows or UNIX system, if 
necessary.
How this Guide Is Organized 
xvi 
This guide is divided into chapters, as described below. 
Part I: Oracle Enterprise Manager Framework 
Chapter 1, "Console" 
This chapter describes the Enterprise Manager Console, its basic configuration and 
functions, as well as system adminstrative functions such as paging, email, and 
managing administrators. 
Chapter 2, "Navigator" 
This chapter explains the Navigator component of the Enterprise Manager Console, 
associated menus, and managing object within the Navigator such as discovering 
services, managing web servers, and generating reports. 
Chapter 3, "Groups" 
This chapter explains the Group component of the Enterprise Manager Console and 
how using Groups can simplify administering a your enterprise. 
Chapter 4, "Jobs" 
This chapter explains how to use the Job Scheduling component of Enterprise 
Manager to automate administrative tasks. 
Chapter 5, "Events" 
This chapter explains how to use the Event Management component of Enterprise 
Manager to monitor managed nodes and services. 
Part II: The Database Administration Tools 
Chapter 6, "DBA Management Pack" 
This chapter introduces the DBA Management Pack, which is an integrated set of 
standard database administration applications to help automate and simplify the 
common daily tasks of administrators. It also describes the user interface elements 
used in the database administration applications. 
How to Use This Guide 
The Oracle Enterprise Manager Administrator’s Guide has been designed to be used 
closely with the Oracle Server documentation set. While this guide describes how to 
use Enterprise Manager to perform database administration tasks, the Oracle Server
documentation set describes the reasons for and the implications of performing 
these tasks. Consequently, you should refer to the Oracle Server documentation set 
while using Enterprise Manager to perform your administrative tasks. 
For an overview of the Enterprise Manager system, see the Oracle Enterprise 
Manager Concepts Guide. After reading this manual, you may choose to proceed 
directly to those chapters that are relevant to the tasks you plan to perform using 
Enterprise Manager. 
Before using the database administration applications, you should read Chapter 6, 
"DBA Management Pack". This chapter provides an overview of the organization 
and user interface elements of the applications. 
While using the Enterprise Manager products, you should refer to the online help 
for specific information on the displayed dialog box, menu, or window. You can 
display the online help by pressing F1 or selecting a Help button if present. 
xvii
Conventions Used in This Guide 
xviii 
The following sections explain the conventions used in this guide. 
Examples 
This guide contains code examples. Note that the text of examples appears in a 
different font than the text of the guide. This is an example of a SELECT statement: 
SELECT * FROM emp 
Examples in this guide follow these case conventions: 
n Keywords, such as CREATE and NUMBER, appear in uppercase. Keywords 
have special meanings. When you specify them, they can be in uppercase or 
lowercase, but they must be used exactly as they appear in the code example. 
n Names of database objects and their parts, such as emp and empno, appear in 
lowercase. However, in the text of this guide, names of database objects and 
their parts appear in uppercase. 
n Parameters act as place holders in examples. They appear in lowercase. 
Parameters are usually names of schema objects, Oracle datatypes, or 
expressions. When you see a parameter in a syntax diagram, you should 
substitute an object or expression of the appropriate type. Note that parameter 
names appear in italics in the text of this guide. 
Command Syntax 
n Italics is used for variables, such as oem_tool 
n | denotes alternative choices 
n {param1 | param2 | ... } signifies that one of the parameters in {} must be used 
n [ ] identifies optional parameters 
Special Text 
Special text is provided to alert you to particular information within the body of this 
guide and within other manuals. 
Note: This indicates important information related to Enterprise Manager. 
Additional Information: Where necessary, this refers you to your operating 
system-specific Oracle documentation for additional information.
xix 
Attention: This highlights information that is important when performing the 
described task. 
Suggestion: This signifies suggestions and practical hints that can be helpful 
when using Enterprise Manager. 
Warning: This indicates information that you should be aware of before you 
perform the action described in the current section. 
Product Documentation 
The Oracle Enterprise Manager product documentation includes the following: 
n The Oracle Enterprise Manager Readme provides important notes regarding the 
updates to the software, documentation, and late-breaking news. 
n The Oracle Enterprise Manager Configuration Guide provides information about 
configuring Oracle Enterprise Manager components. 
n The Oracle Enterprise Manager Concepts Guide provides an overview of the 
Enterprise Manager system. 
n The Oracle Enterprise Manager Administrator’s Guide describes the components 
and features of the Oracle Enterprise Manager system. 
n The Oracle Enterprise Manager Messages Manual describes the Oracle Enterprise 
Manager error messages and methods for diagnosing the messages. 
n The Oracle Intelligent Agent User’s Guide provides information on configuring 
and troubleshooting the Intelligent Agent. 
The guides are available on the CD in HTML and Adobe Acrobat (PDF) formats for 
viewing with a web browser. In addition to the Enterprise Manager documentation, 
extensive online help is provided for Oracle Enterprise Manager components.
Related Publications 
xx 
The Oracle Enterprise Manager Administrator’s Guide refers to important information 
in related publications. Depending on the version of the Oracle database, you 
would refer to the Oracle7 or Oracle8i documentation. The related books referred to 
in this guide are listed below: 
n For general information about the Oracle8i and how it works, see Getting to 
Know Oracle8i and Oracle8i Concepts. 
n For information about administering Oracle8i, see the Oracle8i Administrator’s 
Guide. 
n For information on Oracle’s SQL commands and functions, see the Oracle8i SQL 
Reference. 
n For information about Oracle messages and codes, refer to Oracle8i Error 
Messages. 
n For information about the Oracle networking system, see your network-specific 
documentation. 
n For information about the Oracle8i for other platforms, see your 
platform-specific documentation. 
n For information on Oracle Parallel Server, refer to the Oracle8i Parallel Server 
Setup and Configuration Guide, which provides essential information for 
preparing Oracle8i for use with Oracle Parallel Server and Oracle Enterprise 
Manager. The "Introducing Oracle Parallel Server" chapter provides a 
conceptual and component overview of Oracle Parallel Server. This information 
will help you prepare and plan your Oracle Parallel Server installation and 
configuration in an Oracle8ienvironment. 
Oracle Corporation also publishes several files that are available on your 
distribution media. These files are usually named README, RELNOTE, BUGHST, 
and RESTRICT and have extensions such as .WRI, .DOC, and .TXT. Read these files 
to learn about changes to the software or documentation that has not been 
described in the guides. The exact names and locations of the files mentioned above 
may vary, depending on your operating system.
Part I 
Oracle Enterprise Manager Framework 
n Chapter 1, "Console" 
n Chapter 2, "Navigator" 
n Chapter 3, "Groups" 
n Chapter 4, "Jobs" 
n Chapter 5, "Events"
A85248
1 
Console 
This chapter introduces the Oracle Enterprise Manager Console and provides an 
overview of its components. The following topics are included in this chapter: 
Console 1-1 
n Enterprise Manager Console 
n Console Menus 
n Managing Enterprise Manager Administrators 
n Configuring and Starting the Paging Service 
n Creating Enterprise Manager Reports
Enterprise Manager Console 
Enterprise Manager Console 
The Console is the primary interface used for all Oracle Enterprise Manager 
operations. It provides menus, toolbars, and the framework to access Oracle tools 
and utilities available through other vendors. The graphical configuration of the 
Console and the tools available are determined by the optional products installed 
and user preferences. See Figure 1–1, "Console Window" for an illustration of a 
Console screen. 
Components 
The Console includes viewing panes for the Navigator, Group, Jobs, and Events 
systems. 
Navigator 
The Navigator displays a hierarchical list of all the services in a network, providing 
a direct view of services such as databases, groups, listeners, and nodes, plus the 
objects that they contain. The Navigator shows all the network services with their 
relationships to other objects. 
Through the Navigator, you can also launch administration tools for managing 
objects such as database users and tablespaces. You can also perform many 
administration tasks in the Navigator, such as creating, editing, or dropping 
tablespaces. See Chapter 2, "Navigator" for information. 
Group 
The Group system allows you to organize managed services into logical groups that 
you can then manage collectively with a graphical display. With the Group system, 
you can create, save, modify, and view groups. To create a group of services, drag 
and drop objects from the Navigator into the Group view. See Chapter 3, "Groups" 
for information. 
1-2 Oracle Enterprise Manager Administrator’s Guide
Enterprise Manager Console 
Jobs 
Jobs are standard tasks, such as executing a SQL script or backing up a database, 
that can be automated through Oracle Enterprise Manager. The Job system allows 
you to manage and schedule jobs and remote operations for the services of your 
network. Jobs can be scheduled at various times, such as daily or weekly, and at 
single or multiple destinations. See Chapter 4, "Jobs" for more information. 
Events 
The Event system allows you to monitor and display the status of events—such as a 
loss of service—occurring on the managed services in your network system. See 
Chapter 5, "Events" for more information. 
Console 1-3 
Figure 1–1 Console Window
Console Menus 
Console Menus 
The Console menu bar provides access to the following menus: 
Figure 1–2 Console Menu Bar 
The File, View, System, Tools, and Help menus are described in this section. 
n See "Navigator Menu" on page 2-5 for information about the Navigator menu. 
n See "Group Menu" on page 3-3 for information about the Group menu. 
n See "Job Menu" on page 4-10 for information about the Job menu. 
n See "Event Menu" on page 5-24 for information about the Event menu. 
When using the Console menus, note that: 
n Some menus include other menus. For example, when you select the Database 
Applications from the Tools menu, a sub-menu containing several options 
displays. 
n Menu options vary depending on the objects selected or the active window in 
the Console. The Tools menu items vary depending on the components that 
have been installed. 
Context-Sensitive Menus 
You can click the right mouse button on objects in some windows of the Console to 
display a context-sensitive, or short-cut, menu. This menu usually contains a subset 
of the options that are available through a menu in the main menu bar. For example, 
if you click the right mouse button on a group in the Navigator pane, a menu 
appears with the menu options from the Group menu. 
Note: See "Discovering Services" on page 2-7 for information on 
context-sensitive menu options in the Navigator. 
1-4 Oracle Enterprise Manager Administrator’s Guide
Console Menus 
Console 1-5 
File Menu 
The File menu items allow you to exit the system. 
View Menu 
The View menu customizes the Console layout, allowing you to show or hide 
toolbars or windows. You can also use the window palette located in the upper-left 
corner of the Console to access the View menu options. At least one window must 
be visible in the Console. 
Show/Hide Navigator Pane 
Hides or shows the Navigator pane. 
Show/Hide Job Pane 
Hides or shows the Job Scheduling pane. 
Show/Hide Event Pane 
Hides or shows the Event Management pane. 
Show/Hide Group Pane 
Hides or shows the Group pane. 
Show/Hide Toolbar 
Hides or shows the Oracle Enterprise Manager toolbar. 
System Menu 
The System menu provides options to set up administrator and system 
configurations. 
Preferences... 
Displays the Edit Administrator Preferences property sheet, which allows the 
current administrator to change preferences, including permissions and login 
credentials. See "Administrator Preferences" on page 1-11 for more information. 
Manage Administrators 
Displays the Administrator Manager Accounts property sheet for adding, 
modifying, and removing administrators. This option is only available to Super 
Administrators. See "Managing Enterprise Manager Administrators" on page 1-8 for 
more information.
Console Menus 
Configure SMTP Gateway 
The System menu contains the Configure SMTP Gateway option. Use the Configure 
SMTP Gateway option to specify the SMTP gateway that is used for the SMTP 
E-mail system. E-mail notification will not function correctly until the SMTP 
gateway is set properly. This menu option is only available to super administrators. 
Add Services to tnsnames.ora 
Updates the local network configuration file (tnsnames.ora) with discovered 
services information. You should run this after a Discovery operation so that any 
Value-Added Applications, such as Oracle Parallel Server Manager or Replication 
Manager, can access the discovered services. 
Font Settings 
Changes the font settings for the Console and DBA Studio. 
Font settings in pop-up menus will not change even if you have specified to change 
the font settings. 
Generate Enterprise Report 
Allows you to create an HTML-based Enterprise Report containing information 
such as event alerts, scheduled jobs, groups, and discovered services for all 
managed nodes in your enterprise. For more information, see "Creating Enterprise 
Manager Reports" on page 1-35. 
Tools Menu 
The Tools menu allows you to execute database applications and other utilities that 
have been installed on your system. The menu options in the Tools menu depend 
on your installed Oracle Enterprise Manager configuration. 
Database Applications 
This menu option lists the database administration functions that you can execute 
from the Console. Examples include schema, instance, and security management. 
Service Management 
This menu option lists integrated applications such as the Oracle Application Server 
Manager. 
Other optional applications may also be available from this menu. 
1-6 Oracle Enterprise Manager Administrator’s Guide
Console Menus 
Console 1-7 
Help Menu 
From the Help menu, you can access the Enterprise Manager online help system. 
You can also access Enterprise Manager’s Quick Tours. Enterprise Manager comes 
with a variety of Quick Tours, each providing a comprehensive overview for 
Enterprise Manager and specific integrated applications. Enterprise Manager 
version information is also available.
Managing Enterprise Manager Administrators 
Managing Enterprise Manager Administrators 
Enterprise Manager, Release 2.2 is a multi-administrator system: every person who 
is administering systems using Enterprise Manager has his or her own 
administrator account which he or she uses to log into the Console or stand-alone 
application. 
The installation of Enterprise Manager creates a single super administrator named 
sysman. The super administrator sysman creates administrators using the Manage 
Administrators item in the System menu. In addition to an administrator name and 
password, each account can be tagged as a "Super Administrator" account or an 
account to which the administrator has access to only jobs and/or events. 
Differences between the two types of accounts are as follows: 
n Super Administrators automatically have full privileges for all objects in the 
system. Most Super Administrators also have a separate account for daily 
operations but use their Super Administrator account for special operations 
only available to Super Administrators, such as starting and stopping the 
Management Server, creating new Enterprise Manager Administrators, 
configuring paging servers, or checking other administrator’s schedules. Using 
the sysman account for daily administration work is not recommended. The 
Super Administrator account is similar to root on UNIX or Administrator on 
Windows NT and is a user which cannot be deleted or renamed. It is a user that 
can perform any task and therefore should be used only for setting up the 
environment. After the necessary DBA accounts are created, the Super 
Administrator account ’ SYSMAN’ should not be used anymore. 
n Regular Administrators can have full access to all other Console operations but 
they will only see or be able to modify those jobs, events, or groups to which 
they have access. 
Typically, all administrators share a single Enterprise Manager, Release 2.2 
repository, which allows administrators to share information. Although you can set 
up multiple repositories, administrators using different repositories will not have 
access to each other’s information; there is no sharing of data between repositories. 
Administrative data stored in the repository is filtered based on administrator 
permissions. 
Preferred Credentials must be set up for each administrator account. When an 
administrator connects through the Navigator or stand-alone application, the 
preferred credentials used are those defined explicitly for that administrator. 
1-8 Oracle Enterprise Manager Administrator’s Guide
Managing Enterprise Manager Administrators 
Console 1-9 
Managing Administrator Accounts 
Enterprise Manager administrators are created, edited, and deleted with the 
Manage Administrators option of the Console System menu. The Manage 
Administrators option displays the Manage Administrator Accounts dialog 
(Figure 1–3, "Manage Administrator Accounts"). The Manage Administrators 
option is only available to Super Administrators. Super Administrators have full 
privileges for all objects and can create, edit, and delete other administrators. The 
Super Administrator sets up the administrator name and initial password and 
determines whether an administrator is a Super Administrator or regular 
administrator. The Super Administrator also determines whether the administrator 
has access to the job and event systems. 
In this dialog, you can: 
n Click the Add button in the Manage Administrator Accounts dialog to display 
the Create Administrator Account dialog. The Administrator Account dialog 
allows you to add a new administrator. See "Creating or Editing an 
Administrator Account" below for more information. 
n Select the Delete button to delete an administrator. If the administrator is the 
owner of any objects, you need to reassign object ownership otherwise the 
objects are deleted with the administrator. See "Reassigning Object Ownership" 
on page 1-11 for more information.
Managing Enterprise Manager Administrators 
Figure 1–3 Manage Administrator Accounts 
Creating or Editing an Administrator Account 
In the Manage Administrators dialog, enter a unique administrator name and 
password for the Enterprise Manager administrator. Note that the administrator 
name is not the same as a database username. 
Figure 1–4 Create Administrator Account 
Check the access available to the administrator: 
Super Administrator 
Allows the administrator to add other administrators, as well as access to all created 
objects, e.g., jobs, events, and groups. 
Access to Job System 
Allows the administrator access to the Job system, but does not automatically give 
access privileges for specific jobs. 
1-10 Oracle Enterprise Manager Administrator’s Guide
Managing Enterprise Manager Administrators 
Access to Event System 
Allows the administrator access to the Event system. 
After an administrator has been created, the administrator can log in to the 
Enterprise Manager Console and set up administrator preferences. 
If you select the Edit button, you will get the Preferences window, as described in 
"Administrator Preferences" on page 1-11. You can then edit the preferences for the 
selected administrator. 
Console 1-11 
Reassigning Object Ownership 
If you delete an administrator who owns any object, the Object Ownership 
Management dialog appears. See Figure 1–5, "Object Ownership Management". The 
dialog allows you to reassign the objects to another Enterprise Manager 
administrator. If you do not reassign the objects, the objects are deleted. 
Figure 1–5 Object Ownership Management 
Administrator Preferences 
The Edit Administrator Preferences property sheet is displayed with the Preferences 
option of the System menu. This property sheet allows you to configure the 
preferences for an Enterprise Manager administrator. The pages in the property 
sheet are: 
n General 
n Notification 
n Schedule
Managing Enterprise Manager Administrators 
n Permissions 
n Preferred Credentials 
General 
The General Preferences page allows a Super Administrator to change an 
administrator’s password and access privileges. 
Figure 1–6 Administrator General Preferences 
Notification 
The Notification page allows you to set up paging and email notification methods 
for the administrator. This page consists of a hierarchical tree list and a right-side 
modal area that changes according to the object selected in the navigator. The tree 
list consists of four top-level objects: 
n Filters (Selected by default) 
n Email 
n Paging 
n Paging Servers 
1-12 Oracle Enterprise Manager Administrator’s Guide
Managing Enterprise Manager Administrators 
Note: If you plan to use the Enterprise Manager Paging Server for 
notification, you need to configure the paging and modem settings 
for your system before you set up administrators. To configure the 
modem for the system, access the Modems option in the Control 
Panel. Before using mail, specify the SMTP Gateway for Email with 
the Configure SMTP Gateway option of the Console System menu. 
Console 1-13 
Figure 1–7 Administrator Notification Preferences 
Filters 
Notification filters allow each administrator to specify when to send an email 
notification as opposed to a page notification as a result of a job or event status 
change. 
n Event Notification Filter: The Event Notification Filter allows you to filter 
email/pages sent to an administrator according to the event’s level of severity. 
Filtering is set at the user level by checking or unchecking the Email/Page 
options on this property sheet page. You can select any combination of the 
following levels of event severity. For example, you can set filtering so that an
Managing Enterprise Manager Administrators 
administrator is notified via email if there is a warning and notified via the 
paging system if there is an alert. Selecting all levels of severity provides no 
filtering. 
n Alert 
n Warning 
n Clear 
n Node Down 
n Reassign 
Job Notification Filter The Job Notification Filter allows you to filter email/pages sent 
to an administrator according to job status. As with the Event Notification Filter, 
filtering is set at the user level by checking or unchecking the desired option. 
Selecting all job statuses provides no filtering. 
n Start 
n Complete 
n Fail 
n Delete (Job removed) 
1-14 Oracle Enterprise Manager Administrator’s Guide
Managing Enterprise Manager Administrators 
Console 1-15 
Email 
This page allows you to specify notification parameters for email. 
Figure 1–8 Administrator Notification Preferences: Email 
n Receiver’s Email: Enter the email address of the administrator to whom the 
mail is being sent. 
n Subject Prefix: Enter an optional prefix that is appended to the E-mail subject. 
That allows administrators to quickly identify messages from Enterprise 
Manager in their mail. 
n Limit message length: Allows you to specify the maximum message body 
length of an E-mail notification. By default, this length is unlimited. 
n Current Definition: Displays the current settings for format and content of 
E-mail notifications. To set or change the default parameters, expand the Email 
object in the tree list. You can select format and content options for the Subject 
line and Message Body. You can further expand the Message Body object to 
specify options at the Per Event Test level. 
n Test: Click the Test button to check the validity of E-mail configuration. A 
message displays to inform you of the status of the test email.
Managing Enterprise Manager Administrators 
Email Subject This page allows you to select the content and format of the email 
subject line. By default, Type, Name, and Status are selected. You use the left/right 
arrows to move items back and forth between the Available and Selected lists. 
Once an item has been selected, you can control the order in which the item appears 
by selecting it in the list and using the up/down arrows (located to the immediate 
right of the Selected list) to reposition the item within the list. 
Note: The following information also applies to inserting content 
into the Email/Paging message body. 
n Available: Lists available content. 
n Selected: Lists currently selected content and the order in which the content 
should be displayed. 
n Use Abbreviated Format: For Type (Job or Event), Status, and Target Type, you 
can select the Use Abbreviated Format option. When selected abbreviations are 
used in the Subject line. The following abbreviations are used by the system: 
Service Type 
n DB for Database 
n LSR for Listener 
n N for Node 
Status 
n ST for Started 
n CO for Completed 
n F for Failed 
n D for Deleted 
n W for Warning 
n A for Alert 
n C for Cleared 
n NU for Node Unreachable 
n R for Reassign 
1-16 Oracle Enterprise Manager Administrator’s Guide
Managing Enterprise Manager Administrators 
Timestamp Format 
This option is available if Timestamp is chosen from the Selected list. You use the 
pull-down menu to select one of the pre-defined formats. 
Do not include titles 
When selected, classification titles such as Status, Service Name, and Timestamp are 
omitted from the message. 
Console 1-17 
Paging 
This page allows you to specify notification parameters for paging. 
Figure 1–9 Administrator Notification Preferences: Paging 
n Carrier: After a paging server is specified by a super administrator and the 
name of the paging carrier service and the corresponding paging carriers have 
been configured, select the name of the paging carrier service from the 
pull-down list. 
n PIN: Enter the PIN for your paging carrier. This entry is only required for 
alphanumeric pagers.
Managing Enterprise Manager Administrators 
n Limit message length: Allows you to specify the maximum message length of 
paging notifications. By default, this length is set to 256 characters. 
n Current Definition: Displays the current settings for format and content of 
paging notifications. To set or change these parameters, expand the Paging 
object in the tree list. You can select format and content options for the Message 
Body. You can further expand the Message Body object to specify options at the 
Per Event Test level. 
n Test: Click the Test button to check the validity of the paging configuration. For 
alphanumeric pagers, enter the PIN number. For numeric pagers 700, is sent. 
Click on the Send button to send a test page to the specified pager. A message 
informs you of the status of the test page. 
If the test fails, check the log file. If tracing is enabled for paging, you can also 
view the paging trace log file in the ORACLE_HOMEsysmanlog directory on 
the machine which has the paging server. 
Paging Status Codes for Numeric Pages 
Numeric pages need to be interpreted as follows: 
For job notifications, you will receive a 3 digit number which indicates the job 
status. 
For event notifications you will receive the status code. 
The event status and job status codes are listed as follows: 
100 = Job Started 
200 = Job Completed 
300 = Job Failed 
400 = Job Deleted 
500 = Event Cleared 
600 = Event Warning 
700 = Event Alert 
800 = Event Node Down 
900 = Event Unknown 
1000 = Event Assignee Changed 
1-18 Oracle Enterprise Manager Administrator’s Guide
Managing Enterprise Manager Administrators 
Email/Paging Message Body Definition 
This page allows you to select the content and format for the body of the email or 
page message. By default, Name, and Status are selected. You use the left/right 
arrows to move items back and forth between the Available and Selected lists. 
Figure 1–10 Administrator Notification Preferences: Email/Paging Body 
Expanding the Message Body object in the navigator and selecting per Test allows 
you to use a subset of the following option settings on a per test basis. See "Email 
Subject" on page 1-16 for more information on manipulating message content. 
Console 1-19 
n Available: Lists available content. 
n Selected: Lists currently selected content. 
n Use Abbreviated Format: For Type (Job or Event), Status, and Service Type, you 
can select the Use Abbreviated Format option. When selected abbreviations are 
used in the Subject line. The following abbreviations are used by the system: 
Service Type 
n DB for Database 
n LSR for Listener 
n N for Node
Managing Enterprise Manager Administrators 
Status 
n ST for Started 
n CO for Completed 
n F for Failed 
n D for Deleted 
n W for Warning 
n A for Alert 
n C for Cleared 
n NU for Node Unreachable 
n R for Reassign 
Timestamp Format 
This option is available if Timestamp is chosen from the Selected list. You use the 
pull-down menu to select one of the pre-defined formats. 
Do not include titles 
When selected, classification titles such as Status, Service Name, and Timestamp are 
omitted from the message. 
Append job output 
When selected job output is appended to the end of the notification. For instances 
where job output is large, you may want to specify a limit to the message length. If 
the job output pushes the notification length past the specified limit, then the job 
output will be truncated, not the message itself. 
Paging Server 
This page lists all available paging servers currently recognized by Enterprise 
Manager. 
1-20 Oracle Enterprise Manager Administrator’s Guide
Managing Enterprise Manager Administrators 
Console 1-21 
Figure 1–11 Administrator Notification Preferences: Paging Server 
The multi-column list consists of two columns: The name of the paging server and 
whether the paging server is currently being used. Below the list are three icons that 
allow you to perform the following operations: 
n Ping a paging server to see if it can be contacted. 
n Add a new paging server to the list. 
n Remove a server from the list. 
Except for the Add Paging Server icon, the icons are grayed out unless a specific 
paging server is selected from the list. For information on how to add a paging 
server, see "Setting Up Paging" on page 1-29 and "Adding a Paging Server" on page 
1-30.
Managing Enterprise Manager Administrators 
Schedule 
Use this property sheet page to indicate when you want to be paged and/or 
e-mailed. Determine the day, hour, and the method of notification. You will receive 
notifications only on the objects you have permission to access. 
Figure 1–12 Administrator Notification Schedule 
An administrator can be notified by email, paging, or both email and paging. 
Paging is recommended for urgent jobs, events, or critical systems. 
To determine notifications: 
1. Select None, Pager, Email, or Email and Pager at the bottom of the dialog. 
2. Click in the appropriate day/hour to set the notification method for that time 
period. 
3. Repeat steps 1 and 2 for each notification method. 
If you want to set the same notification an entire day or an hour of the day, click on 
the heading for that row or column. For example, if you want to set up paging 
notification for Saturday, click on the Sat heading after you have selected Pager at 
the bottom of the screen. You can also drag the cursor to "paint" across multiple 
cells. 
1-22 Oracle Enterprise Manager Administrator’s Guide
Managing Enterprise Manager Administrators 
Console 1-23 
Permissions 
Use this property sheet page to determine the default permissions you want to 
assign to other administrators for the objects you create. This allows other 
Enterprise Manager administrators to share objects, such as events and jobs, that 
you have created. If you work on a team, this page lets you assign access privileges 
to all the members of the team at one time. When an object is created by an 
administrator, that administrator is the owner and automatically has full 
permissions. The owner’s permissions cannot be modified. 
Figure 1–13 Administrator Default Permissions 
Access-control permissions apply to event, group, and job objects. When these 
objects are created, the default permissions are assigned to other Enterprise 
Manager administrators according to the selections in this page. These initial 
permissions can be overridden with the Permissions page of the object’s property 
sheet. 
For more information, see the following sections: 
n "Group Permissions Page" on page 3-6 
n "Job Permissions Page" on page 4-18 
n "Event Permissions Page" on page 5-35
Managing Enterprise Manager Administrators 
Note: Changing your default permissions does not retroactively change 
permissions on existing objects. 
The levels of permission that you can assign to an Enterprise Manager 
administrator are: 
None 
This permission does not allow the administrator to view this object anywhere. 
View 
This permission allows the administrator to view the object, inspect object 
properties, view job/event status and outputs, and receive notifications if the object 
is an event. 
Modify 
This permission allows the administrator to edit the object’s properties except those 
reserved for Full permission. 
Full 
This permission allows the administrator to delete the object, modify permissions 
for other administrators, and change the ownership of the object. 
Notify 
This permission allows the administrator to receive enhanced notifications on the 
objects. Notify permission cannot be assigned if the administrator’s permission level 
is set to None. 
1-24 Oracle Enterprise Manager Administrator’s Guide
Managing Enterprise Manager Administrators 
Note: Individual instances of an Oracle Parallel Server are listed. Oracle 
recommends that all instances of a Parallel server use the same preferred 
credentials as the Oracle Parallel Server. 
Important: Changes to the Preferred Credentials will not be 
automatically propagated to previously registered jobs and events. 
In order to update these jobs and events with the new preferred 
credentials, you must de-register and subsequently re-register the 
jobs and events. 
Console 1-25 
Preferred Credentials 
The Administrator Preferred Credentials property sheet page displays a list of 
services in the network, along with the service type and the administrator name for 
accessing the service. The property sheet page is accessed with the Administrator 
Preferences option of the System menu. Each row in the list of the property sheet 
includes: 
n Service Name 
n Service Type (such as database, listener, or node) 
n Credentials (Check mark indicating you have already specified connection 
information. The check mark is either grey (credential set in a previous session) 
or green (credential set in the current session). 
You can click on a column heading to sort on that column. See Figure 1–14, 
"Administrator Preferred Credentials"for an illustration of the property sheet. 
Also, the Intelligent Agent authenticates the user name and password for all jobs 
and many events that it runs. These credentials are used when you access a network 
service in the Navigator or Group, and when running jobs and registering events. If 
you do not set the preferred credentials correctly, jobs and events may fail. See "Job 
Credentials" on page 4-4 and "Registering Events" on page 5-6 for more information. 
Oracle recommends that if some services of a particular type require the same 
credentials, use the <DEFAULT> credentials selection for that service type to have 
those credentials used by all services of that type.
Managing Enterprise Manager Administrators 
For example, if Administrator_1 has a username and password of foo/bar on all the 
databases that he manages, the administrator needs to enter foo/bar as his 
credentials in the <DEFAULT> database entry. All database administration tasks 
will use these <DEFAULT> credentials. 
Furthermore, if the administrator has just one database which requires different 
credentials from foo/bar, he can enter different credentials for that database by 
selecting that specific database. 
For NT users, you must set the preferred credentials for the node (where the NT 
Intelligent Agent resides) to be the same as the user that is set up to "Logon as a 
batch job." 
Figure 1–14 Administrator Preferred Credentials 
Setting Administrator Credentials 
Select any row to update the credential fields for the object identified in the row. 
Username 
Enter the username. This field is required if a password needs to be entered. 
Password 
Enter the password associated with the username. 
1-26 Oracle Enterprise Manager Administrator’s Guide
Managing Enterprise Manager Administrators 
Confirm Password 
Confirm the password. 
Role (Database only) 
Select the role from the pull-down list. You need to login with the SYSDBA or 
SYSOPER role to start up or shut down a database. 
Changes to the credentials are recorded when you move to another line. When you 
are finished, save all your updates by clicking the OK button at the bottom of the 
property sheet. 
Console 1-27 
Saving Logon Information as a Preferred Credential 
Another convenient way to specify Preferred Credentials for discovered services is 
to select the Save as Preferred Credential option when manually connecting to a 
service from the Console or integrated application. For example, you attempt to 
access a newly discovered database from the Console Navigator. Enterprise 
Manager displays the Connect Information dialog so that you can log in to the 
database. You type in the requisite information and check the Save as Preferred 
Credential option. Click OK to log on to the database and save the logon 
information as a Preferred Credential for this service. 
Saving the Contents of a List 
Save list allows you to extract information from a multi-column list (such as the Job 
or Event History panes) and save it in a variety of formats (text, HTML, or 
Comma-Separated-Values). For example, you can select one or more entries in the 
Event History pane. By selecting the Report Event History from the Events Menu, 
you can save the list information (Event, Target, Target Type, Severity, Date/Time, 
Assigned To, Owner) to an HTML file. The dialog consists of the following 
elements: 
File Name 
The name and directory to which you want to save the file information. 
Browse 
Displays the File Save to dialog. Choose the desire location and file name. 
Format 
Select HTML (table), Text row, or comma-separated-values (used by spreadsheets or 
other applications).
Configuring and Starting the Paging Service 
View 
Active only when HTML is selected as the file format, allows you to view the 
generated HTML table through the default browser for your system. 
Rows 
n All (total number) rows – Export all rows in the multi-column list. 
n Selected (number of rows selected) rows – Export only selected rows in the 
multi-column list. 
Configuring and Starting the Paging Service 
If you want to be notified via paging in Oracle Enterprise Manager, you must 
explicitly install the Oracle Enterprise Manager Paging Server. This paging service 
is not installed as part of the base Oracle Enterprise Manager installation; it is 
installed through a Custom installation type. Refer to the installation guide 
provided with the database release for more details. 
Note: The Paging Server is only available on Windows NT or Windows 
2000, but the ability to configure it is available on both Unix and 
Windows platforms. 
Only one paging service installation is required if you wish to utilize paging for 
notification purposes within Oracle Enterprise Manager. 
The paging service supports either numeric or alphanumeric pagers and utilizes the 
following paging service protocols (for alphanumeric pagers only). 
n TAP (Telocator Alphanumeric Protocol) 
n GSM (Global System for Mobile Communications) 
n FLEXTD 
To use alphanumeric paging, you need a phone number to call for the modem at the 
paging service provider and the pin number for your pager. Contact your paging 
service provider for the phone number to call. It is the number for the modem for 
sending pages. 
Your paging provider may also have a feature for sending email to your pager. If 
you have that feature, you can configure an administrator's preferences for 
1-28 Oracle Enterprise Manager Administrator’s Guide
Configuring and Starting the Paging Service 
notification to use email, and specify your pager as the email receiver. This method 
will also work with many providers for sending notification to a cell phone. 
Configuration of the paging service is not automatic. Follow the steps below to 
configure paging. 
Note: You must have a modem installed on the Windows NT or 
Windows 2000 machine that you are running the paging service. 
Console 1-29 
Setting Up Paging 
On the machine from which you want to run the paging service, follow these 
instructions: 
1. Install a modem. 
2. Specify modem settings. 
a. Go to Start > Settings > Control Panel > Modems. 
b. Specify how your calls are dialed by clicking Dialing Properties from the 
Modems Properties page and then setting the following parameters: 
* From what area code you are dialing 
* From what country you are dialing 
* How you access an outside line. If you are not required to dial a 
number to access an outside line, leave this field blank. 
c. Set the Maximum Speed parameter by clicking Properties from the Modems 
Properties page. Oracle recommends setting this parameter to 9600K Baud; 
however, you should find the baud rate setting optimal for your system. 
Note: A baud rate higher than 9600 may result in the loss of data with 
the paging service carrier. The baud rate of 9600 for your modem is only 
a recommendation. You must find the baud rate setting which is optimal 
for your system.
Configuring and Starting the Paging Service 
3. Install the Oracle Enterprise Manager Paging Server. Refer to the installation 
guide provided with the database release for information. 
4. Start the Paging Service. 
a. Go to Start > Settings > Control Panel > Services. 
b. Select the Oracle<ORACLE_HOME_NAME>PagingService and click Start. 
You can also start the paging service by typing the following at a command 
prompt 
oemctrl start paging 
Adding a Paging Server 
Note: Only Super Administrators can add a paging server; this 
functionality is not available to regular administrators. 
1. From the Enterprise Manager Console, select Preferences from the System 
menu. The Edit Administrator preferences property sheet appears. Click the 
Notification tab to access the Notification page. 
2. From the Notification page, highlight Paging Servers from the tree list. 
3. Right-click Paging Servers to obtain the pop-up menu and choose the Add item 
or click the Add Server icon on the detail view to the right. 
4. When the Add Paging Server dialog appears, enter the name of the machine on 
which the paging server runs. For example, pjlee-pc. 
5. Press the OK button. 
If the Console is unable to find the paging server with the given hostname, an error 
appears, saying "VD-4362: Could not add paging server, as paging server 
<hostname> could not be reached." 
If the paging server is found, a new paging server object is added under the "Paging 
Server" object in the tree list. The new paging server will have no paging carrier. 
You must add at least one paging carrier in order for paging to function. 
1-30 Oracle Enterprise Manager Administrator’s Guide
Configuring and Starting the Paging Service 
Note: Only Super Administrators can add a new paging carrier; the 
functionality is not available to regular administrators. 
Console 1-31 
Adding Paging Carrier 
1. From the Notification page, highlight Paging Carriers from the tree list. 
2. Right-click Paging Carriers to obtain the pop-up menu and choose the Add 
Carrier item or click the Add Carrier icon on the detail view to the right. 
3. When the Add New Paging Carrier dialog appears, fill in the fields. Once 
defined, you can view the paging carriers by expanding the appropriate paging 
server and carrier objects in the tree list. 
n Name 
Paging carrier name. Field accepts alphanumeric characters and 
underscores. 
n Type 
Type of paging carrier. Enterprise Manager supports alphanumeric or 
numeric. 
n Protocol 
TAP, FLEXTD, or GSM. Protocol selection is only available if the carrier 
type is Alphanumeric. 
n Connection Properties 
* Country Code: The country code used to dial the pager if the call is 
international. 
* Area Code: Area code used the by country in which the pager is 
located. 
* Number: Local dialing number of the pager. 
* Suffix: Permits identification of voice messages from a paging carrier 
and allows the person being paged to choose from several options 
when using a touch tone phone. For example, commas can be used as 
pauses. The Suffix field accepts the following characters: integers, 
commas, pound sign, and the star (asterisk).
Configuring and Starting the Paging Service 
Note: This option is only available if the paging carrier type is set to 
Numeric. 
n Dialing Properties 
* Timeout (in seconds): Maximum dialing time allowed for a successful 
page. 
* Delay (in seconds): Time delay before dialing. 
4. Press the OK button. 
Specifying Paging Notification Preferences 
While the Super Administrator configured the paging server and its carrier(s), all 
administrators who want page notifications must specify their own notification 
preferences by following the steps below: 
1. Log on to the Console. 
a. Go to System > Preferences > Notification. Then highlight Paging on the 
tree list to view Paging Preferences on the detail view to the right. 
b. Select a paging service carrier from the drop down list. 
c. Enter the Pin number for your alphanumeric pager. If you have a numeric 
pager, leave this field blank. 
d. Test the paging notification by clicking the Test button. 
2. Set your notification schedule. If you neglect to do so, you will not receive page 
notifications. 
a. Within the Console go to System > Preferences > Schedule 
b. Choose when you want to be notified by paging. If you do not select any 
days/hours to be notified by paging, you will never receive a page. 
Refer to the Oracle Enterprise Manager Administrator’s Guide for instructions on 
how to set up the notification schedule. 
1-32 Oracle Enterprise Manager Administrator’s Guide
Configuring and Starting the Paging Service 
Note: Only Super Administrators can remove a paging server; the 
functionality is not available to regular administrators. 
Note: Only Super Administrators can view information on a paging 
server; the functionality is not available to regular administrators. 
Console 1-33 
Other Paging Server Operations 
Removing a Paging Server 
1. From the Notification page, highlight the paging server object you want to 
remove from the tree list. 
2. Right-click the paging server object to obtain the pop-up menu and choose the 
Remove item or click the Remove Server icon on the detail view to the right. 
A warning dialog appears, saying "Remove Paging Server <servername>?" 
3. Click "yes". The Console will check if anyone is currently using any carrier from 
the paging server. If not, all paging carriers will be removed, and the paging 
server will be removed as well. Otherwise an error dialog appears, saying "The 
paging server cannot be removed because at least one carrier is being used. 
Viewing Information on Paging Server 
From the Notification page, left-click the paging server object. 
The detail view to the right will show information about that paging server such as 
the paging carrier names, the pager types, the protocol, and whether or not they are 
in use. 
Pinging a Paging Server 
Note: Only Super Administrators can ping a paging server; the 
functionality is not available to regular administrators.
Configuring and Starting the Paging Service 
To check the status of the paging server, follow the steps below: 
1. From the Notification page, highlight the paging server you want to ping. 
2. Right-click the paging server object to obtain the pop-up menu and choose the 
Ping item or click the Ping Server icon on the detail view to the right. 
Querying Status of the Paging Service 
To check the paging status, right-mouse click the carrier name to access the Ping 
Paging Service item in the context-sensitive menu. 
Stopping the Paging Service 
Stop the paging service from the Windows NT or Windows 2000 Services Control 
Panel. 
You can also stop paging service by typing 
oemctrl stop paging 
Removing a Paging Carrier 
Note: Only Super Administrators can remove a paging carrier; the 
functionality is not available to regular administrators. 
1. From the Notification page, highlight the paging carrier object you want to 
remove from the tree list. 
2. Right-click the paging carrier object to obtain the pop-up menu and choose the 
Remove item or click the Remove Carrier icon on the detail view to the right. 
A message appears, saying "Remove Paging carrier <carrier name>?" 
3. Click "yes." The Console checks if anyone is current using the carrier. If not, it 
will be removed and the notification tree updated. 
1-34 Oracle Enterprise Manager Administrator’s Guide
Creating Enterprise Manager Reports 
Note: Only Super Administrators can edit a paging carrier; the 
functionality is not available to regular administrators. 
Console 1-35 
Editing a Paging Carrier 
1. From the Notification page, select the paging carrier object. The paging carrier 
information appears in the detail view to the right. 
2. Make the changes. 
3. Click the OK button. 
The Console will validate all the carrier information, update the notification 
tree. All administrators who have selected to use this carrier will automatically 
inherit the new changes. 
If the validation fails, an error dialog appears stating which entry failed to 
validate and what type of input is expected. When you click the "OK" button in 
the error dialog, all the paging carrier’s entries are set back to their original 
values. 
Viewing Information about a Paging Carrier 
From the Notification page, select the paging carrier object. The paging carrier 
information appears in the detail view to the right. 
Testing a Paging Carrier 
1. Right-click the paging carrier object and choose the "Test" menu item. A dialog 
appears, asking for the PIN. 
2. Enter the PIN if your pager is an alphanumeric pager and click "OK" to 
continue. If it is a numeric pager, leave this field blank. 
Creating Enterprise Manager Reports 
The Report Wizard allows you to generate pre-defined reports for all managed 
targets. The Enterprise Manager Job system is used to schedule and execute the task 
of generating the actual report. For this reason, the prerequisites for successful Job 
system operation apply to correct functioning of the Report Wizard: node preferred 
credentials must be set, network communication between the Management Server 
and the agent/managed target, the Management Server must be operational.
Creating Enterprise Manager Reports 
IMPORTANT: You must be running an Intelligent Agent version 
8.1.7 in order to generate a report. If you are running an earlier 
version of the Intelligent Agent, you need to apply an Agent update 
patch. The patch consists of a TAR file containing the necessary 
images and the HTML templates needed to generate the reports. 
See the README.agent.reports file located in your ORACLE_ 
HOME/sysman/admin directory for installation instruction. The 
patch file (agent_reports.tar) is also located in this directory. 
Enterprise Report versus Database Configuration/Status Reports 
Oracle Enterprise Manager allows you to generate two types of reports: Enterprise 
Reports and Database Configuration/Status Reports. 
Enterprise Report (General Systems) 
The Enterprise Report provides an overview of the information contained within 
the Enterprise Manager repository. 
This report covers the includes the following information: 
n The setup and configuration of the environment 
Including the administrators, the discovered agent, the job and event library, 
and the available Data Gatherer collections. 
n The current state of environment 
This topology overview provides details on the state of all services known in 
the repository such as outstanding alerts, job information and basic 
configuration of the service. 
An Enterprise Report cannot be customized. 
Database Configuration/Status Report 
A Database Configuration/Status Report may contain schema, instance, storage, 
and security information, depending on what options you select in the Generate 
Report dialog. This report can either be generated immediately, locally on the client 
machine, or it can be scheduled as a job. 
If you schedule a Database Configuration/Status Report, information from the 
Enterprise Report is included in a single report. If an Enterprise Report has been 
1-36 Oracle Enterprise Manager Administrator’s Guide
Creating Enterprise Manager Reports 
previously generated, and you then create a Database Configuration Report, 
database configuration information is added to the existing Enterprise Report. 
Note: Although the Report Wizard is available to all 
administrators, the Report Wizard’s Schedule button is enabled for 
super administrators only 
Console 1-37 
Requirements 
The following general requirement must be met to generate a report: 
n Enterprise Manager Repository views: All the HTML reports are based on 
these repository views, which are created on top of the repository, are generated 
by default by the Enterprise Manager Configuration Assistant starting from 
Oracle Enterprise Manager Release 2.2. 
n Enterprise Manager Release 2.2 or higher since it will have the ability to 
schedule the reports as a job 
n Intelligent Agent version 8.1.7 or higher 
Launching the Report Wizard 
The Report Wizard can be launched in two ways, each generating a different type of 
report. 
n By choosing Enterprise Report from the System main menu to create an 
Enterprise Report (user must have ‘super administrator’ privileges). 
n By choosing Reports from the Navigator main menu and clicking Schedule 
from the Generate Report dialog to create a Database Configuration or Database 
Status Report. (available to all administrators). 
Creating Enterprise Reports 
To create an Enterprise Report, perform the following steps: 
1. Choose "Report" from the Console Navigator menu to display the Reports 
Wizard. The wizard allows you to schedule the job for execution. Depending on 
the size of the Enterprise Manager repository and the need for up-to-date 
information, you can change the scheduling interval of the reports. 
During the creation of the job, the wizard will ask for two parameters:
Creating Enterprise Manager Reports 
n The node which will generate the reports. 
To minimize network traffic and make the setup easy and convenient, use 
the Intelligent Agent on the machine with the web server to generate the 
report. The generated HTML files will therefore be usable by the web server 
immediately. 
n The output directory where to place the reports. 
The reports are first generated in the $TEMP directory. To avoid partial 
updates and partially refreshed information, either copy the entire set of 
HTML files from the TEMP directory to their final destination after 
successful completion or remove all files if the job cannot complete 
successfully. 
2. After the job has completed once, add the output directory where the HTML 
resides to your web server configuration so that it can be recognized as a virtual 
directory. 
Creating DBA Studio Reports 
From DBA studio reports, specific database reports can be scheduled as a job. This 
job follows the same conventions and has the same requirements as the system 
reports. 
If there is no job currently scheduled for the system reports, the DBA Studio reports 
will generate this job and schedule it, together with the job to generate the database 
report. 
If DBA Studio finds the job for the system reports, it will use the settings of this job 
(the Intelligent Agent to be used to generate the report, and the output directory) 
for its job definition. 
The database reports can be scheduled in two ways. 
From the Console 
1. Select a database in the Navigator tree. 
2. Connect to that database. 
3. From the Navigator menu, select "Report." 
From DBA studio (using the Management Server) 
1. Select a database in the Navigator tree. 
2. Connect to that database. 
1-38 Oracle Enterprise Manager Administrator’s Guide
Creating Enterprise Manager Reports 
3. From the Object menu, select "Report" or right-click and select the "Report" item 
Console 1-39 
from the context-sensitive menu.
Creating Enterprise Manager Reports 
1-40 Oracle Enterprise Manager Administrator’s Guide
2 
Navigator 
The Navigator graphically displays network objects and allows you to administer 
the objects. The Navigator tree displays a direct view of the network’s nodes and 
services, the objects they contain, and the relationships among objects. The topics 
discussed in this chapter include: 
Navigator 2-1 
n Navigator Pane 
n Navigator Menu 
n Discovering Services 
n Manipulating Objects in the Navigator 
n Apache Web Servers 
n Paging/Email Blackout 
n Removing a Node from the Navigator 
n Node Removal Failure
Navigator Pane 
Navigator Pane 
The Navigator pane provides: 
n Identification of the objects or services on nodes in the managed environment. 
n Views of the objects in a network environment and the relationships among the 
objects. By expanding an object, you can display any objects it contains. 
n Methods of accessing and launching administration tools on the objects. 
n A source of objects with which to populate groups. 
n A source of objects upon which to launch DBA tools and other integrated 
applications. 
n A source of objects for copying with the drag and drop method. 
The Navigator window can be hidden or shown by selecting Show Navigator Pane 
in the Console View menu. You can also hide or show the pane by clicking on the 
Navigator icon in the Console toolbar. 
Populating the Navigator Tree 
The Navigator tree is populated with objects by selecting Discover Nodes from the 
Navigator menu. The types of services in the network may include, but are not 
limited to: 
n Databases 
n Groups 
n Listeners 
n Nodes 
n Web Servers 
Expanding Objects in the Navigator 
Each object type in the Navigator tree is identified by an icon and name. If there is a 
’+’ or ’-’ to the left of an object’s icon and name, the object is a container that can be 
expanded to display other objects. A container that is represented by a folder icon is 
a logical grouping, or collection, of one specific type of object, such as databases. 
Other containers are objects that hold multiple types of objects. See Figure 2–1, 
"Navigator Menu and Window" for an illustration of a Navigator pane. 
2-2 Oracle Enterprise Manager Administrator’s Guide
Navigator Pane 
The top-most object in the Navigator tree is the network container. The network 
folder can contain: 
Navigator 2-3 
n Databases folder 
n Groups folder 
n Listeners folder 
n Nodes folder 
n Folders for additional services discovered. 
You can expand tree containers to view the objects and relationships in the 
environment. For example, you can expand a node to view the databases and 
listeners on the node. If you expand a database, you can access common 
administration areas such as schema, instance, and security. When a connection is 
made to a database, an icon displays on the database in the tree. See "DBA Studio" 
on page 6-2 for more information on integrated database administration tools that 
are accessible from specific Navigator objects.
Navigator Pane 
Figure 2–1 Navigator Menu and Window 
Viewing Specific Tree Objects 
In large, complex environments you may not want to view the entire network 
system in one tree. The Navigator has been designed to be highly flexible for 
viewing objects. With the Split View menu option, you can split the Navigator tree 
into views that are displayed in separate pages in the Navigator window. Simply 
click on the tab of a page to move the page and its contents to the front of the 
Navigator window. 
Launching Tools 
To launch a database tool in the context of a database or database object, select the 
object in the Navigator tree that you want to access. You can then execute a tool 
from the Tools menu or with the Related Tools option of the right-mouse menu. 
You are connected to the database according to the preferred credentials that have 
been set up for the database. If connection to the database fails for any reason, the 
Database Connect Information dialog box displays. At that point, you can enter the 
2-4 Oracle Enterprise Manager Administrator’s Guide
Navigator Menu 
requisite information and optionally save that information as a preferred credential. 
See "Preferred Credentials" on page 1-25 for information. 
Navigator 2-5 
Navigator Menu 
The Navigator menu allows you to manage objects in the Navigator pane. The 
menu options are enabled according to the object selected in the Navigator tree. 
Usually the Create, Create Like, Edit, and Remove menu options are available when 
an object is selected. See Figure 2–1, "Navigator Menu and Window" for an 
illustration of the Navigator menu. 
Clicking on an object in the Navigator with the right mouse button, displays a 
context-sensitive menu of all the options you can use to manipulate the object, as well 
as related tools. 
For information on operations for an object type, see the chapter in this guide that 
discusses the specific application that manipulates the object type. See Chapter 6, 
"DBA Management Pack" for an overview of the database application tools. 
Create 
Allows you to create an object of a specified type. 
Create Like 
Allows you to create a copy of the selected object in the Navigator. 
Edit 
Allows you to alter or edit the object selected in the Navigator. 
Remove 
Allows you to delete all occurrences of the selected object in the Navigator. 
If you remove a node from the Navigator tree, the node and all its services are 
removed from the Navigator tree. 
If you remove a database, listener, or other service object from the Navigator tree 
the object appears again in the Navigator tree when the node that contains the 
service is rediscovered. 
Discover Nodes 
Discovers services on a node in the network. You can also display the status of 
network services. See "Discovering Services" on page 2-7 for more information. 
Refresh All Nodes 
Refreshes services for all discovered nodes.
Navigator Menu 
Paging/Email Blackout 
Allows a super administrator to specify paging and email blackouts for specified 
targets and/or services that have been previously discovered in the Navigator. 
Paging/email blackouts allow a super adminstrator to schedule deactivation of 
enhanced notification (email/paging), thus preventing Enterprise Manager 
administrators from being flooded with emails and pages if a managed 
target/service is brought down. 
Ping Agent 
Attempts to contact the Intelligent Agent on a specified node. If it fails, either the 
node is down or the Intelligent Agent isn’t running. If either of these is true, no Job 
or Event notification will come through. 
Split View 
Creates a new view page in the Navigator window that contains only the currently 
selected object, such as a single folder, group, or user. This feature allows you to 
create separate views that display specific objects. For example, to create a new 
view that only contains the DEMO database: 
1. Select the DEMO database in the tree. 
2. Select the Split View menu option to create a separate view page in the 
Navigator pane. 
3. Click on the tab of the page to move the page and its contents to the front of the 
Navigator pane. 
Remove Split View 
Removes the current split view from the Navigator. Make sure the view that you 
want to delete is at the front of the Navigator pane. 
Find 
Locates discovered databases within the Navigator Tree. It is available when you 
select a Database or Node icon on the tree. 
Report 
Allows you to generate an HTML database configuration, status, or Enterprise 
Manager Repository report. 
Application SQL History 
Displays SQL statements produced by DBA Studio. This option allows you to view 
the last 100 SQL statements (maximum) executed by the application you are using 
(i.e., DBA Studio, Schema Management, and others) against the selected database. 
2-6 Oracle Enterprise Manager Administrator’s Guide
Discovering Services 
SQL Logging 
Allows you to log SQL in a permanent status. The SQL Logging function allows you 
to specify the SQL logging file information and options. When you are connected to 
the Management Server, you can query the log. You must be logged in as 
super-administrator in order to enable and disable SQL Logging. 
View SQL Log 
Allows you to view the contents of a SQL log. All normal users can view the their 
own SQL logs. If you are logged in as super-administrator, you can view the SQL 
logs of any user. You must be logged in as super-administrator to purge a log file. 
Navigator 2-7 
Discovering Services 
The Navigator provides service discovery functions for identifying network 
services and populating the Navigator tree through the Discovery Wizard. 
Figure 2–2 Discovery Wizard 
The Discovery Wizard searches the network for the nodes you specify. If that node 
has an Oracle Intelligent Agent running, it will be added to the Enterprise Manager 
Console Navigator for management along with any services running on that node. 
You will be able use these services as targets in jobs, events, and groups.
Discovering Services 
If there is no Oracle Intelligent Agent running, you may perform a manual 
configuration. This allows you to define an Oracle database on that node so that it 
appears in the Console Navigator. While manual configuration permits database 
access from the Navigator, its use is not recommended since Enterprise Manager 
services, such as jobs and events, will not be available. 
Figure 2–3 Discovery Wizard: Manual Configuration 
When refreshing an existing node, the Discovery Wizard verifies and updates the 
list of services on a node that had been previously discovered. If the node was 
previously Manually Configured, the Discovery Wizard will check if that node now 
has an Oracle Intelligent Agent and if so, provide that information with the option 
to discover using that Intelligent Agent, or to update the previous configuration. 
Note: Services on the machine where the Management Server is 
running are automatically discovered when you start the Console 
and connect to the Management Server. 
Adding a Service 
To discover new services, choose Discover Nodes from the Console Navigator menu 
to call up the Discovery Wizard. Any services running on that node will, if 
successfully discovered, appear in the Navigator. The Discovery Wizard guides you 
2-8 Oracle Enterprise Manager Administrator’s Guide
Discovering Services 
through the service discovery process. For more information on service discovery 
and refresh, refer to Oracle Enterprise Manager online help. 
Refreshing a Service 
Refreshing a node verifies and updates the list of services on a node that has been 
previously discovered. You can refresh the discovery of a node by selecting a node 
from the Navigator, clicking the right mouse button, and choosing Refresh Node 
from the context-sensitive menu. 
To refresh an existing service, choose Refresh Nodes from the Console Navigator 
menu to call up the Refresh Wizard. The Refresh Wizard performs a "rediscovery" of 
any node selcted in the Console Navigator. This menu option is greyed out until a 
specific node is selected from the Navigator Nodes folder. 
Removing a Service 
Select a node or service from the Console Navigator. Using the right-mouse button, 
choose Delete from the context-sensitive menu. 
Navigator 2-9 
Pinging the Intelligent Agent 
Pinging the Intelligent Agent on a monitored node allows you to check whether the 
Management Server can communicate with the Intelligent Agent on a monitored 
node. Proper Intelligent Agent operation is required for successful service 
discovery. If discovery is successful, the discovered node and services appear in the 
Navigator tree. If discovery has failed, an error message displays. 
The following are common problems if the service discovery has failed: 
n The node must have an Oracle Intelligent Agent started and running. 
n TCP/IP network protocol must be used. 
n If a database has not been discovered, make sure an entry for the database is in 
the tnsnames.ora file on the node where the Intelligent Agent is running. On 
a UNIX platform, check the oratab file. 
n If a database has not been discovered, you may need to stop and restart the 
Intelligent Agent if the database was not configured or installed when the 
Intelligent Agent was last started. When the Intelligent Agent starts, database 
entries are written to the services.ora file in the ORACLE_ 
HOME/network/agent directory (Unix example).
Manipulating Objects in the Navigator 
Determining Node Properties 
Since Enterprise Manager allows you to manage a heterogeneous environment, 
there will be situations where you may need to determine operational properties of 
that node (network name, operating system and version, and Intelligent Agent 
version). For example, you may want to find out which version of the Intelligent 
Agent is running on each node within your enterprise to determine which nodes 
require Intelligent Agent updates. To determine node properties: 
1. Select the desired node in the Navigator. 
2. Using the context-sensitive menu (right mouse button), choose Properties. 
A popup window displaying the node name, operating system and version 
(Intelligent Agent version 8.1.7 is required to determine operating system 
information), and Intelligent Agent version, 
3. Click OK to dismiss the popup. 
Manipulating Objects in the Navigator 
The Navigator interface provides easy manipulation of the services and objects in 
your managed network from the Enterprise Manager Console. From the Navigator, 
you can apply some or all functions available from the Console and any integrated 
applications to selected objects. 
Administering Objects 
To administer an object, select the object in the Navigator tree and choose the 
administration task from the Navigator menu, or use the menu options available 
when you click the right mouse button on the object. The menu options available 
vary according to the object selected. See "Navigator Menu" on page 2-5 for more 
information. When you create or edit an object, the property sheet for that object 
displays. For information on the property sheets, see the chapter on the DBA tool 
that administers the object. 
Copying Navigator Objects 
You can drag and drop some objects in the navigator to make copies of the object in 
different locations. For example, you can drag and drop a database user or role from 
one database to another to add that user or role to another user. However, if you 
drag and drop a group that resides within another group to a different group, it will 
move the group instead of copying it. 
2-10 Oracle Enterprise Manager Administrator’s Guide
Apache Web Servers 
Important: When running on UNIX, if the web server is listenting on a 
port number less than 1024, the administrator must have root privileges in 
order to submit startup or shutdown jobs to the server. 
Navigator 2-11 
Apache Web Servers 
Apache web server management allows you to discover and monitor the server’s 
operational status via the Event system. Additional functionality (extra job tasks 
and event tests) are available when the e-Business Management Tools (part of the 
Diagnostics Pack) are installed. 
Discovering Apache Web Servers 
You discover a web server as you would any other managed service from the 
Enterprise Manager Console. See "Discovering Services" on page 2-7. The discovery 
process does not require the web server to be running. Once discovered, you set the 
server access authorization through the Enterprise Manager Preferred Credentials 
(Node). See "Preferred Credentials" on page 1-25. 
Determining the Status of Apache Web Server 
Select Edit Web Server from the context-sensitive menu to display the Edit Web 
Server General Page. Information displayed pertaining to the selected web server 
includes: 
n Server Name: Server’s Internet host name. Example: xyz-machine.your_ 
company.com. If this machine does not have a registered DNS name, an IP 
address will appear. 
n Port: The network port to which the web server listens. 
n Version: Apache server version number. 
n Server Root Directory: The top-level directory where all web server-related 
files (configuration, error, and log files) are stored. 
n Configuration File Location: Location of the web server configuration file. 
n Status URL: The location of the Apache-generated HTML page that provides 
the current server statistics in an easily readable form.
Paging/Email Blackout 
Paging/Email Blackout 
Paging/Email Blackout allows an administrator with super administrator privileges 
to suspend paging and email notifications for specified targets and/or services that 
have been previously discovered in the Navigator. Paging/email blackouts 
deactivate enhanced notification (email/paging), thus preventing Enterprise 
Manager administrators from being flooded with emails and pages if a managed 
target/service is brought down. For example, if a target is brought down on a 
regular basis for scheduled maintenance, a super administrator administrator can 
schedule a paging/email blackout for that target to prevent enhanced notification 
during the maintenance period. 
Specifying Total Paging/Email Blackout 
Total paging/email blackout specifies that a blackout be started immediately with 
an indefinite duration. The super administrator must manually turn off Total 
Paging/Email before any new blackout schedules can take effect or existing 
blackout schedules resume. To specify a total paging/email blackout: 
1. Choose Paging/Email Blackout from the Navigator menu. 
2. Check Total Paging/Email Blackout. 
3. Click OK. 
Note: You can also access Total Paging/Email Blackout menu item 
from a target’s context-sensitive menu in the Enterprise Manager 
Navigator. 
Defining a Paging/Email Blackout 
To define a paging/email blackout for a specific node: 
1. Select a target from the Navigator and then choose Paging/Email Blackout from 
the Navigator menu. Optionally, you can select an object in the Navigator and 
access Paging/Email Blackout through the context-sensitive menu. 
2. Click Create. The requisite naming and scheduling UI are displayed. Important: 
Be sure that Total Paging/Email Blackout is not checked for either the specific 
service or its parent target. 
2-12 Oracle Enterprise Manager Administrator’s Guide
Paging/Email Blackout 
3. Specify a Blackout Name. All Blackout names for this node/service must be 
unique. Note: the Target name reflects the node/service selected in the 
Navigator and is not editable from this dialog. 
Navigator 2-13 
4. Select an Occurrence 
Select the frequency that you want the paging/email blackout to occur. The 
choices are Once, On Interval, On Day(s) of Week, and On Date(s) of Month. 
n Once—schedules the blackout only one time beginning and ending on the 
dates and times you choose. 
n On Interval—allows you to schedule a specific time interval between 
paging/email blackout periods. The interval can be a combination of hours 
and minutes, or number of days. Select the value you want to change and 
click on the scroll buttons. You can also type in a new value. Select an 
Effective Period in which your blackout schedule will be valid. 
n On Day(s) of Week—allows you to schedule the blackout on one or multiple 
days (Sunday, Monday, etc.) of the week. Click on the days of the week to 
select the days you want the blackout period scheduled and set a start time 
or duration. Select an Effective Period in which your blackout schedule will 
be valid. 
n On Day(s) of Month—allows you to schedule the blackout on one or 
multiple days (1 - 31) of the month. Click on the dates of the month to select 
the dates you want the blackout period scheduled and set a start time or 
duration. Select an Effective Period in which your blackout schedule will be 
valid. 
5. Click OK. 
Important: When selecting On Day(s) of Month or On Day(s) of 
Week , be aware that each day terminates at 12:00 A.M. This is 
important when scheduling paging/email blackout periods that 
span the day change (12:00 A.M.). 
For example, if you wish to schedule a blackout that begins on 
Tuesday at 10:00 P.M and lasts for six hours, you must define two 
blackout periods: 
n Tuesday from 10:00 P.M. to 11:59 P.M. 
n Wednesday from 12:00 A.M. to 4:00 A.M.
Paging/Email Blackout 
Making a Copy of an Existing Blackout Schedule 
To schedule a paging/email blackout schedule for a node that is identical to that of 
another managed node: 
1. Choose Paging/Email Blackout from the Navigator menu. Optionally, you can 
select an object in the Navigator and access Paging/Email Blackout through the 
context-sensitive menu. 
2. Select a Blackout Schedule entry from the Blackout Name list. 
3. Click Create Like. A new entry is created in the list prefixed by "Copy of." 
4. Modify the blackout period parameters (such as Blackout Name) as desired and 
click OK. 
Turning Blackout Schedules On and Off 
Once you have defined one or more paging/email blackout periods for a 
node/service, they persist in the Blackout Name list associated with the 
node/service until deleted. You can turn paging/email blackout on or off by 
checking the box located to the left of the individual blackout name. You can edit 
the Occurrence parameters to reflect the present date and time. Paging/email 
blackouts are set ON by default. 
Deleting Paging/Email Blackout Periods 
1. Choose Paging/Email Blackout from the Navigator menu. Optionally, you can 
select an object in the Navigator and access Paging/Email Blackout through the 
context-sensitive menu. 
2. Select the desired Blackout Name. 
3. Click Delete. 
Viewing Blackout Periods 
Once you have defined blackout periods on multiple nodes, you can view them by 
selecting the desired target in the Console Navigator and choosing Paging/Email 
Blackout from the Navigator menu. If you select a high-level folder from the 
Navigator, such as Databases, Groups, or Nodes, rather that an individual target, all 
blackout periods defined in the container type are displayed. 
2-14 Oracle Enterprise Manager Administrator’s Guide
Node Removal Failure 
Navigator 2-15 
Removing a Node from the Navigator 
Before removing a discovered node from the Enterprise Manager Navigator, you 
must remove all jobs and events submitted against that node. If the Intelligent 
Agent is down when you attempt to remove the node, and jobs and events have not 
been cleared previously, Enterprise Manager will allow you to remove the node. 
However, when the Intelligent Agent is restarted and the node re-discovered, the 
Intelligent Agent will be out of sync with the Oracle Management Server. The 
following example illustrates how this situation can occur. 
1. You register an event with the Intelligent Agent on a managed node. 
2. The Intelligent Agent goes down. 
3. You remove the node from the Navigator without removing the event. 
4. The Intelligent Agent is started and the node is rediscovered. 
5. The Console Event window is clear. 
6. You attempt to register the same event with the managed node. 
7. Enterprise Manager displays a message stating the event is already registered 
even though it is not. 
The Intelligent Agent remembers the current status of jobs and events through a 
series of generated files. Oracle Intelligent Agents 8.0.6 (Oracle 8.0) and higher and 
Intelligent Agents 8.1.6 (Oracle 8.1) and higher automatically synchronize with the 
Oracle Management Server by removing old Intelligent Agent overhead files. For 
older versions of the Intelligent Agent, you must remove these files manually. 
To manually remove the Intelligent Agent overhead files: 
1. Stop the Intelligent Agent (if it is currently running). 
2. Go to the Intelligent Agent directory ($ORACLE_HOME/network/agent or 
$ORACLE_HOME/net80/agent (Windows NT)) 
3. Delete files with the following extensions: .q, .jou, .inp 
4. Restart the Intelligent Agent. 
Node Removal Failure 
Typically, node removal from the Navigator fails because of problems encountered 
by the Management Server. The following are the most probable causes.
Node Removal Failure 
n The Management Server encountered an error condition while accessing the 
repository. Check the Management Server log for detailed error messages. 
(ORACLE_HOME/sysman/log/oms.log). If problem resolution is not obvious 
from the error messages, contact Oracle Support. 
n The Management Server could not open a database session to the repository. 
Ensure that the repository is up and running. You may have to shut down other 
Enterprise Manager applications that may be connected to the repository. Check 
the Management Server log for more detailed error messages. 
n Different DNS servers may resolve node names in different ways. For example, 
if a Management Server is running on a machine whose DNS server resolves a 
particular node as "A", the Management Server discovers the node as "A". 
Next, the Management Server is run on another machine whose DNS server 
resolves the same node as "B". If you switch back to running the Management 
Server on the first machine (originally resolved the node as "A"), attempting to 
remove the node from the Console Navigator will now fail since the repository 
entries will be out of sync. 
The solution is to run the Management Server on the machine from which you last 
discovered the node. In the example above, you would need to run the 
Management Server on the second machine (resolved the node as "B") and then 
remove the node from the Navigator. Always ensure that the DNS setup is 
consistent for all nodes where the Management Server is run. 
2-16 Oracle Enterprise Manager Administrator’s Guide
3 
Groups 
The Group system lets you organize the objects you manage into logical categories 
for more efficient management and administration. You can organize groups based 
on any criteria you determine, such as function, department, geographical location, 
or number of administrators. You can then place the groups on a map or graphical 
view of the network making it easy to locate, diagnose, and act on encountered 
conditions. The system also lets you assign jobs to groups and monitor their status. 
The Groups system is especially useful for managing environments with many 
databases and services. 
The topics discussed in this chapter include: 
Groups 3-1 
n Group Pane 
n Group Menu 
n Managing Groups
Group Pane 
Group Pane 
The Group pane provides an area for constructing a graphical custom view of the 
network environment. When all four panes are displayed, the Groups pane is 
located in the upper right corner of the console. See Figure 3–1, "Navigator and 
Group Panes" for an illustration of a Group pane. 
The Group pane can be hidden or shown by selecting Show/Hide Group pane in 
the Console View menu. You can also hide or show the pane by clicking on the 
Show/Hide Group Display button above the Console toolbar. 
Note that groups are also displayed in the Navigator pane. To display the members 
of a group in this pane, expand the group by clicking the "+" symbol next to the 
group name. 
Figure 3–1 Navigator and Group Panes 
3-2 Oracle Enterprise Manager Administrator’s Guide
Group Menu 
Groups 3-3 
Group Menu 
The Group menu options allow you to perform such actions as create, modify, and 
remove groups. 
Create Group 
Adds a new group to the selected group. See "Adding Objects to a Group" on page 
3-9 for more information. 
Create Group Like 
Copies an existing group. 
Edit Group 
Modifies an existing group. See "Modifying a Group" on page 3-10 for more 
information. 
Remove Group 
Removes an existing group from the current group, or deletes the group from the 
entire system. See "Removing Groups" on page 3-10 for more information. 
Remove Item From Group 
Deletes the selected item from the group pane. You can also delete an object from 
the group by selecting the object and pressing the Delete key. See "Removing 
Groups" on page 3-10 for more information.
Managing Groups 
Managing Groups 
A group is a collection of objects, such as databases, listeners, or nodes, that share a 
common location or function. You can create, modify, and remove groups to further 
organize your network view. Different types of objects, like databases and listeners, 
can be grouped together. 
Groups appear in two places: the Navigator and the Group pane. 
A group is represented on the Navigator by an icon and a name. You can 
double-click on the group’s icon to expand the group, and view and update the 
group’s members and sub-groups. 
The Group pane gives you a more graphical view of the objects in the group and 
their individual status. You can also add background maps to the Group pane to 
better visualize locations of particular objects. 
Grouping nodes or services can simplify tasks that are applied to all members of the 
group. For example, in order to execute a SQL script on all the databases in the 
CHI_MAIL group, you can use the Job Scheduling services to schedule a job on the 
group. The job that executes the SQL script is scheduled on all the databases in the 
group. The job will not be applied to any other objects in the group. 
Creating a Group 
Note: Jobs and events applied to an object before it joins a group will 
not be applied to the group retroactively. You must re-apply any jobs or 
events you want to apply to the entire group. 
Important: If you submit a job or event against a group that 
contains a mixture of manually configured and discovered targets, 
the job or event will only be submitted against the discovered 
targets. If all the targets in a group are manually configured, then 
the job/event submitted against that group will fail. 
To create a group, select the Create Group menu item to display the Create a Group 
property sheet. The property sheet contains the General and Permissions pages (see 
Figure 3–2 and Figure 3–3). After you have completed the property sheet pages, 
3-4 Oracle Enterprise Manager Administrator’s Guide
Managing Groups 
click the OK button to save the group. The new group appears under Groups in the 
Navigator. The Group pane will remain empty. 
The new group is empty until you add objects to it. Dragging an object from the 
Navigator menu copies and pastes it into a group. Note that this action does not 
remove the object from the Navigator. In fact, you can add an object to any number 
of groups, and still be able to manipulate it individually, as well. 
To add an object to a group, select it and drag it over to the Group pane, or drag it 
over to a group folder in the Navigator pane. To add an existing group to the new 
group, or to another existing group, drag and drop the group from the Navigator 
into the group folder or the Group pane. An icon representing the object or group 
appears in the Navigator and in the Group pane. 
Groups 3-5 
Figure 3–2 Create Group General Page 
Group General Page 
Group Name 
Enter a unique name for the new group in the Group Name field of the dialog box. 
Use a background image when viewing this group 
Check this option if you want to display an image in the background of the group 
pane. Sample files are provided in the oracle_ 
homeclassesoraclesysmanresourcesimages directory on the machine 
where the Management Server is located. If you want to use your own images, 
Oracle recommends that you add them to this directory.
Managing Groups 
The sample images included are: 
n asia.gif 
n europe.gif 
n japan.gif 
n usa.gif 
n world.gif 
Do not specify a directory for graphics located in this directory. Specify only the file 
name, such as usa.gif. You can use .GIF or .JPG graphic files. If you check the 
box, enter the file name of the image in the Bitmap Relative URL field. When an 
image is added to a group, the file name is stored in the repository. 
Icons 
Determine whether you want to display large or small icons in the group. 
Group Permissions Page 
Determine the permissions that you want to assign to the group with the 
Permissions Page. This allows other users to view or modify the group. Any 
permissions assigned on this page over-write any user default permissions. See 
"Permissions" on page 1-23 for an explanation of the permissions that can be 
assigned. 
Figure 3–3 Group Permissions Page 
3-6 Oracle Enterprise Manager Administrator’s Guide
Managing Groups 
Groups 3-7 
Manipulating Group Views 
Groups are populated by dragging and dropping databases, groups, nodes, 
listeners or any other discovered services from the Navigator into the Group pane. 
You can create, update, and save any number of groups. In addition, you can add a 
graphic as a background to the group for visual identification or to graphically 
show the location of nodes. For example, you can use a group drawing of a city or 
state for the background of your group. 
Double-clicking on a group in the Navigator pane opens the hierarchical list of its 
members. You can display groups in the Group pane by selecting the group name 
from the pull-down list in the Console toolbar. 
Monitoring Status 
The Group system provides an efficient way to monitor the alerts reported by the 
event system. If the object or group has events registered against it, a flag showing 
the state of the event condition is displayed. If an object in a group has more than 
one event registered against it, the flag will represent the most severe alert 
condition. 
n If the flag is green, there are no problems on the monitored objects. 
n If the flag is yellow, there is a condition detected that should be checked. 
n If the flag is red, there is a severe problem detected by an event and the object 
requires immediate attention. 
n If the flag is gray, the status of the object is unknown. For example, the 
UpDown event is registered to a database but the node is unavailable. The gray 
flag will only display if an up/down test is explicitly registered for the object. 
n If there is no flag, then the object is not being monitored. Note that groups 
within groups do not show a status monitor when the event is clear (green). 
n If there is a yellow hexagon, there is an error state (yellow hexagon). An error 
state indicates there is a problem with the evaluation of the event condition, as 
opposed to a threshold being met. Examples of error states are: registering an 
Archive Full event against a database in non-archivelog mode, registering an 
event that monitors segments but specifying a filter that excludes all available 
segments. 
Groups inherit the worst state of any of the members. If one service in a group is 
down, the group displays a grey flag.
Managing Groups 
Note: For status monitors to display on a group or object, an Intelligent 
Agent must be running on the node where the object is located. 
See Chapter 5, "Events" for more information on events. 
Expanding Objects 
Some group objects, such as database objects and defined group objects, can be 
expanded in the Group pane by double-clicking on the object’s icon. You can 
double-click on some objects to open property sheets. The property sheets allow 
you to both view and alter the properties of the objects. You can double-click on 
databases to display property sheets. 
See Figure 3–1, "Navigator and Group Panes" for an illustration of an expanded 
node in the Group pane. 
Groups 
When you double-click on a group icon, the group expands to display the objects in 
the group. You can drag and drop objects from the Group, the Navigator, and other 
groups to add them to the group. You can delete objects from the group by selecting 
them and pressing the Delete key, or clicking the right mouse button and selecting 
Remove. 
Databases and Other Discovered Services 
When you double-click on a database or other discovered service, you connect to 
that service. The instance property sheet displays if that service is a database. If the 
connection to the database fails for any reason, the Login Information dialog box 
displays. See "Preferred Credentials" on page 1-25 for information on preferred 
credentials. 
Launching Tools from a Group 
You can launch a database tool using an object in the group. Select a database icon 
in the Group pane, then select a DBA tool from the Tools menu or launch palette. 
You are connected to the database according to the user credentials that have been 
set up for the system. See "Preferred Credentials" on page 1-25 for more information 
on user credentials. 
3-8 Oracle Enterprise Manager Administrator’s Guide
Managing Groups 
Groups 3-9 
Adding Objects to a Group 
To add objects to a group, drag and drop the object from its location on the 
Navigator to the group—either the group folder on the Navigator or the group 
shown in the Group pane. 
Note: Only one copy of an item can exist in the group. 
When you add objects in a group, the updates are reflected in every occurrence of 
the group. Any updates to a group are automatically saved as the updates are 
made. 
Deleting Objects from the Group Pane 
To delete objects in a group pane: 
1. Double-click on a group icon in a group to expand the group. 
2. Select an object in the group and press the Delete key to delete an object from a 
group. 
To delete objects from a group in the Navigator: 
1. Expand the group in the tree. 
2. Select an object in the group and press the Delete key to delete an object from a 
group. 
Note: When you delete objects from a group, the updates are reflected 
in every occurrence of that group. Any updates to a group are 
automatically saved as the updates are made.
Managing Groups 
Modifying a Group 
You can modify the properties of a group. 
1. Select a group in the Navigator. 
2. Select the Edit Group menu item to display the Edit Group dialog box. The 
name of the group is automatically entered in the name field. The name cannot 
be modified. 
3. Modify the properties for the group. 
4. Click the OK button when you have finished. 
Removing Groups 
There are two ways to remove a group: 
n Remove the group from within another group. This does not affect the existence 
of the group in the system or in any other groups. 
n Remove the group completely (delete). This removes the group from every 
group where it has been copied. 
After you select a group, there are four ways to remove it: 
n Delete the group completely by selecting Remove Group from the Group menu. 
n Delete the group completely by choosing a group (that is not inside another 
group) and selecting the Remove menu item from the group’s context menu. 
n Delete the group completely by choosing a group (that is not inside another 
group) and selecting the <DELETE> key. 
n Remove a sub-group from within another group by selecting Remove Item from 
the Group menu. This will remove the sub-group from the selected group, but 
will not affect the sub-group’s existence in other groups. 
n Remove a sub-group from within another group by selecting the Remove menu 
item from the group’s context menu. This will remove the sub-group from the 
selected group, but will not affect the sub-group’s existence in other groups. 
n Remove a sub-group from within another group by selecting the <DELETE> 
key. This will remove the sub-group from the selected group, but will not affect 
the sub-group’s existence in other groups. 
3-10 Oracle Enterprise Manager Administrator’s Guide
Managing Groups 
Groups 3-11 
Example: Creating a Group 
The following example illustrates how to create a new database group. 
1. Select Create Group from the Group menu to display the Create a Group dialog. 
2. Enter a name for the new group in the Group Name field. 
3. Check the Use Background Image box to add a graphic to the background. 
Enter a graphic name, or select one of the supplied images from the drop-down 
list. 
4. Choose small icons for the group. 
5. Set the permissions so all Enterprise Manager administrators can view but not 
modify the group. 
6. Click on the Create button to create the new group. A folder for the new group 
appears in the Navigator. 
7. Select the new group from the pull-down group list over the Group pane to 
display the group. 
8. Expand the Databases branch of the Navigator. 
9. Drag a database into the Group pane. 
10. Drag and drop a listener into the new group folder in the Navigator. 
The new group can be added to other groups by dragging and dropping the group 
from the Navigator.
Managing Groups 
3-12 Oracle Enterprise Manager Administrator’s Guide
4 
Jobs 
The Job system allows you to automate standard and repetitive tasks, such as 
executing a SQL script or executing an operating system command. With the Job 
system, you can create and manage jobs, share jobs with other administrators, 
schedule execution of jobs, and view information about the jobs. Jobs can be 
scheduled on a single node or multiple nodes in the network, provided that the 
node has an Intelligent Agent running on it. The topics discussed in this chapter 
include: 
Jobs 4-1 
n Job Process 
n Job Pane 
n Job Menu 
n Creating, Modifying, or Viewing a Job 
n Oracle Job Tasks
Job Process 
Job Process 
The Job process includes: 
1. Creating a job. This involves: 
a. Determining the type and destination of the job. 
b. Determining the tasks. 
c. Determining task dependencies of the job. 
d. Determining the parameters for each task. 
e. Scheduling the times that the job executes. 
f. Assigning permissions to other administrators for notification purposes. 
2. Submitting a job to the selected destinations in the network system. 
3. Viewing the job history to review the results of the job. 
Job Tasks 
The Job system provides a variety of predefined job tasks, or you can submit your 
own tasks by executing a SQL*Plus script or running an operating system program. 
Job tasks are implemented in the Tool Command Language (Tcl) scripts with Oracle 
extensions (OraTcl) to include database-specific commands. You can write your own 
Tcl script and submit it with the Run Tcl job task. For more information on custom 
job scripts, see the Oracle Intelligent Agent User’s Guide. 
The tasks are grouped by the destination (target type) of the task: 
n Databases 
n Nodes 
n Listeners 
Note: All target types include Node tasks. 
The tasks allow you to perform such operations as: 
¥ Execute operating system commands or shell scripts. 
¥ Execute SQL and DBA commands. 
4-2 Oracle Enterprise Manager Administrator’s Guide
Job Process 
n Perform database administration tasks such as starting up and shutting down 
Jobs 4-3 
Oracle databases. 
n Start up and shut down Listeners. 
See the online help for Oracle job tasks and "Oracle Job Tasks" on page 4-23 for 
information on Oracle predefined job tasks and their parameters. 
You can combine two or more tasks into one job, called a composite job. Composite 
jobs consist of separate tasks that are constructed such that some tasks may or may 
not execute upon completion of another task. For example, if a composite job 
consists of two tasks, starting up a database and then running a SQL script, you can 
specify that the script be run only if the database was successfully started. Here, you 
specify a dependency between the two tasks that determine whether the next task is 
executed. The Job system allows you to specify one of three dependencies for any 
task: Always (default), Only on Success, or Only on Failure. 
You can create jobs that can be used as fixit jobs that are to be run when a condition 
is signalled by the Event system. Fixit jobs are not scheduled. See Chapter 5, 
"Events" for information on monitoring events in the system. 
Note: You need to set up a password file to perform administration tasks, such as 
start up or shut down, on a remote database. See the "Configuring a Remote 
Database for Backup or SYSDBA Administration" in the Oracle Enterprise Manager 
Configuration Guide for more information. 
Writing SQL*Plus Scripts 
Creating your own job tasks using the SQL*Plus command language allows you to 
automate any number of complex database operations via the Job system and 
Intelligent Agent(s). The success or failure of a given SQL*Plus script is determined 
by the exit condition returned when the script completes. Because a SQL*Plus script 
can return an error condition that may not be recognized by the Intelligent Agent, 
such as a non-ORA error message, your job task can appear to complete 
successfully even though a command issued from within your script has failed. To 
avoid this situation, you must specify an operational clause when using a SQL*Plus 
EXIT command in your script. For example: 
> EXIT sql.sqlcode 
> EXIT warning 
> EXIT 666 
Using the EXIT command without specifying an operational clause (default) 
commits and exits with a value of SUCCESS. By explicitly defining the conditions
Job Process 
under which your script terminates, the Intelligent Agent can ascertain whether 
your job has succeeded or failed. For more information on SQL*Plus and the 
SQL*Plus command language, see the SQL*Plus User’s Guide and Reference. 
Job Credentials 
Jobs are normally run with the preferences of the administrator who submitted the 
job. This ensures that jobs cannot be used to perform functions the administrator 
could not perform if logged into the machine directly. For example, to write a job 
output file to the ORACLE_HOME/network/agent/ directory, the administrator 
must have permissions to write to that directory on that node. 
Because jobs are categorized by the type of service they act on, the job system 
knows what credentials to pass to the Intelligent Agent. The Job system uses 
Enterprise Manager System Preferences (Preferred Credentials) to determine what 
preference information needs to be passed. When a job runs on a node, the job 
system passes the administrator preferences for the node. When a job runs on a 
service, such as a database, the job system also passes the administrator preferences 
for the service. See "Preferred Credentials" on page 1-25 for information on 
administrator preferences. 
Important: You must set up valid user credentials for the nodes 
on which you want to run jobs. Node credentials are required for 
all jobs. If credentials are not set up correctly for an Windows NT 
node, you may get the "Failed to Authenticate User" error message. 
Make sure the Windows NT node account specified in your 
preferred credentials possesses the "log in as batch jobs" user right. 
See the Enterprise Manager Configuration Guide or your Windows NT 
documentation for instructions on creating NT user accounts. 
Administrator preferences for nodes and/or services are given the following 
prioritization: 
1. Preferred Credential Overrides (Highest Priority) 
2. Preferred Credentials for the selected node or service. 
3. Default Service 
4. Null Credentials (Lowest Priority) Note: Jobs and events will fail. 
4-4 Oracle Enterprise Manager Administrator’s Guide
Job Process 
Jobs 4-5 
Submitting Jobs 
The Job system is simple to use because the task of scheduling and managing jobs is 
centralized in the Enterprise Manager Console. The administrator only needs to 
submit a job once, regardless of the number of destinations on which the job will 
run. 
When you submit a job, the Management Server sends the job information to the 
appropriate Intelligent Agents on the destinations you selected. The Intelligent 
Agents are responsible for executing the job on the specified schedule and returning 
job status messages to the Console through the Management Server. Once 
submitted, jobs will run regardless of whether you are logged in or not. 
Note: There is usually a slight delay between submitting the job and the 
notification by the Intelligent Agent. 
To schedule a job, you do not have to connect at the time of job creation to the node 
on which the job will be run. You only need to submit the job from the Console and 
specify the destinations on which it should run. The destinations can include nodes, 
databases, listeners, user-defined groups that have been created with the Group 
system, or any other discovered services. 
The Job system of Enterprise Manager allows you to efficiently run jobs on multiple 
remote nodes by transferring job information to the Intelligent Agents servicing the 
nodes. When a job is executed, it is run by the Intelligent Agent on that node, thus 
minimizing network traffic between the remote node and the Console and 
Management Server. In addition, jobs can be run on multiple nodes simultaneously 
because there is an Intelligent Agent residing on each node. Jobs can only be run on 
nodes where an Intelligent Agent is running. If you send a job to a group, the job is 
only scheduled on the nodes in the group where the Intelligent Agent is running. 
When you submit a job to one or more remote sites, it is possible that any one of 
those site may be down. If a site or its Intelligent Agent is down, the Management 
Server queues any job requests that could not be delivered to the site. Once the site 
can be contacted, the Management Server submits the queued job to the Intelligent 
Agent, which in turn executes the job on the node. 
Cancelling Jobs 
You can cancel a job by selecting the desired job from the Job Active window and 
choosing Remove Job from the Job menu. Care should be taken when cancelling a 
job. Cancelling a job that is currently running will interrupt the job process and 
terminate the job. Problems can arise when the job is composed of multiple job tasks 
with sequential dependencies.
Job Pane 
Job Pane 
You can view the different pages of job information by selecting the page tabs in the 
Job pane. The pages in the Job pane are: 
¥ Active 
¥ History 
You can switch between the pages by clicking the tab of each page. The rows in both 
pages can be sorted on any column by clicking the column heading. 
The Job pane can be hidden or shown by selecting Job in the Console View menu. 
You can also hide or show the pane by clicking the Job system icon in the Console 
toolbar. 
Figure 4–1 Job Pane in the Console 
4-6 Oracle Enterprise Manager Administrator’s Guide
Job Pane 
Jobs 4-7 
Active Job Pane 
The Active pane contains a summary of the active jobs on the network. These are 
jobs that you have submitted to the job system and are not yet completed. Each row 
is an execution of a particular job scheduled on a specific destination. While a job 
may execute multiple times, the job listed in the Active page is the one that is 
currently scheduled or running. You can use the Edit Job menu option to display 
the details of the selected job. When selecting a job from the Active pane, the only 
job attribute you can modify is the job permission. See "Creating, Modifying, or 
Viewing a Job" on page 4-12 
You can double-click on a job listed in the Active page to view the job details. 
Name 
Name of the job. 
Destination 
Destination of the job. 
Destination Type 
database, listener, node. 
Owner 
Administrator submitting the job. 
Status 
Status of job is one of the following: 
n Submitted: The job has been submitted to the job destination running an 
Intelligent Agent. 
n Scheduled: The job has been successfully delivered to the Intelligent Agent and is 
scheduled for execution. 
Note: Under certain circumstances, a job will remain in a 
Submitted state. The most likely cause would be the Intelligent 
Agent on the node to which you are trying to submit the job is 
down, or the node is not connected to the network. 
n Started: The job execution has started. After the job executes, the job execution is 
displayed in the Job History page. If this is the last scheduled execution of the
Job Pane 
job, the job is removed from the Active Jobs page. Otherwise, the job remains in 
the Active Jobs page and has the status of Scheduled. Unless you view the 
Active Jobs page at the exact time that the job is executing, you would not see 
the Running status. 
n Pending Deletion: The job has been selected for deletion. When the deletion is 
successful, the job is removed from the Active Jobs page and added to the Job 
History page. 
n Fixit: The fixit job has been submitted. 
n Fixing: The fixit job is executing. A fixit job remains in the Active Jobs page until 
it is deleted. 
Date/Time 
This is the time the Intelligent Agent returns after the job has been scheduled by the 
Intelligent Agent. 
Context-sensitive Menu options 
The following options are available by selecting a job and clicking the right mouse 
button. 
Edit/View Job 
Displays the property sheet for the selected job. Only the permissions, notifications, 
and owner can be changed. 
Create Like 
Displays a copy of the selected job. You can edit the property sheet and submit this 
job. 
Copy to Library 
Copies the selected job to the Job Library if it does not already exist there. 
Remove Job 
Delete the selected job. If the job has not been saved to the Job Library, a warning 
dialog appears indicating that you are about to perform a remove operation. You 
may wish to copy the job to the job library before removing it. 
4-8 Oracle Enterprise Manager Administrator’s Guide
Job Pane 
Jobs 4-9 
History Page 
Job History contains a list of previous job executions. These are jobs that have been 
submitted to an Intelligent Agent and have executed successfully or unsuccessfully. 
You cannot modify these jobs. 
n Job Name is the name of the job. 
n Destination of the job. 
n Owner of the job. 
n Destination type 
n Status of job is one of the following: 
n Completed: The job has executed successfully. 
n Failed: The job execution has failed. 
n Deleted: The job has been deleted. 
n For the other status categories, see "Active Job Pane" on page 4-7. 
n Finish Time is the time when the job finished, failed, or was deleted. 
Refresh History Icon 
Refreshes the job history list. Job history is refreshed each time you move from the 
Active tab to the History tab. However, to refresh the job history list while currently 
viewing the History pane, you must click the Refresh History icon located at the 
bottom left of the Job pane. 
Clear All History Icon 
Clears all entries in the Job History list. 
You can double-click on a job listed in the Job History page to display the Job 
property sheet and view the Job Output dialog box, if output exists for the job. If no 
output is produced by a job, a message displays that states that there is no output 
for the job. If the output includes only blank spaces, the dialog box is blank. 
Context Menu options 
The following options are available by selecting a job and clicking the right mouse 
button. 
View Job 
Displays the property sheet for the selected job.
Job Menu 
Create Like 
Displays a copy of the selected job. You can edit the property sheet and submit this 
job. 
Copy to Library 
Copies the selected job to the Job Library if it does not already exist there. 
Remove Job 
Delete the selected job. If the job has not been saved to the Job Library, a warning 
dialog appears indicating that you are about to perform a remove operation. You 
may wish to copy the job to the job library before removing it. 
You can save the jobs from the History page to a file, then clear the jobs from the 
History page. This prevents the History page from being overloaded with obsolete 
jobs that occurred in previous days. Choose the Report Job History option from the 
Job menu to save the history to a report. This report is a file on the machine where 
the Enterprise Manager Console is running. 
You can create a new job similar to a job in the History page with the Create Like 
option. See "Creating, Modifying, or Viewing a Job" on page 4-12 for more 
information. 
Job Menu 
The Job menu allows you to create, modify, save, submit, and manage jobs. The 
menu options are enabled depending on the items selected in the Job pane. See 
Figure 4–1, "Job Pane in the Console" for an illustration of the Job menu. 
Create Job 
Allows you to create a new job. See "Creating, Modifying, or Viewing a Job" on page 
4-12 for more information. 
Create Job Like 
Allows you to create a new job like the selected job in the Job pane. See "Creating, 
Modifying, or Viewing a Job" on page 4-12 for more information. 
Edit Job 
Allows you to modify the job selected in the Job pane. The property sheet is the 
same as the property sheet for creating a new job, however, you can only modify job 
permissions. See "Creating, Modifying, or Viewing a Job" on page 4-12 for more 
information. 
4-10 Oracle Enterprise Manager Administrator’s Guide
Job Menu 
Copy to Library 
Copies the selected job to the Job Library if it does not already exist there. 
View Job 
Displays the property sheet for the selected job in the Job pane. The property sheet 
is in read-only format. Active jobs can be removed but not modified. See "Creating, 
Modifying, or Viewing a Job" on page 4-12 for more information. 
Remove Job 
Removes the selected job from the Active or History page of the Job pane. When 
you delete a job, there is usually a slight delay while the request is processed. See 
"Cancelling Jobs" on page 4-5 for specifics on job cancellation. 
Job Library 
Displays the Job Library dialog. See "Job Library" on page 4-11 for more 
information. 
Clear History 
Clears the jobs listed in the Job History page. 
Refresh History 
Refreshes the job history list. Job history is refreshed each time you move from the 
Active tab to the History tab. However, to refresh the job history list while currently 
viewing the History pane, you must select this menu item. 
Remove Job from History 
Clears the selected job listed in the Job History page. 
Report Job History/Active Jobs 
Generates an HTML-based report summarizing the History or Active Job pane, 
depending on which pane is active when this menu item is selected. By default, the 
report is saved to the ORACLE_HOME/sysman/reports directory. 
Jobs 4-11 
Job Library 
The Job Library dialog contains a list of the jobs that you have created and saved. In 
the dialog, you can view summary information about a job: 
n Job Name is the name of the job. 
n Description is the user-supplied description of the job. 
n Owner is the administrator that is assigned as the owner of the job.
Creating, Modifying, or Viewing a Job 
These jobs can be submitted to the job system with the Submit button. You can use 
the Edit button to modify a job selected in this page. You can also double-click on a 
job listed in the Job Library page to edit the job. You can create a new job based on 
an existing job with the Create Like button. 
Creating, Modifying, or Viewing a Job 
When you create, modify, or view details of a job, similar property sheets display. 
See Figure 4–3, "Job Tasks Page" for an illustration of a Job property sheet. The 
property sheets contains: 
n General Page 
n Task Page 
n Parameters Page 
n Schedule Page 
n Permissions Page 
n Progress Page (this page only appears when a job is selected from the Active or 
History pane) 
Creating a New Job 
Attention: When submitting a job that consists of multiple tasks, 
an error may occur if the string of arguments that was sent is longer 
than the internal buffer. If that error occurs when submitting a job, 
divide the tasks among multiple jobs and resubmit the jobs. 
1. Select Create Job from the Job menu to display the Create Job property sheet. 
2. Complete the pages of the Create Job property sheet. 
3. Determine whether the job is ready to submit. 
a. Select the Submit option and click Submit to send the job to the Intelligent 
Agents at the selected destinations. The job appears in the Active page. 
- OR - 
b. Select the Add to Library option and click Add. The job appears in the Job 
Library. You can modify or submit a saved job at a later time. 
4-12 Oracle Enterprise Manager Administrator’s Guide
Creating, Modifying, or Viewing a Job 
Jobs 4-13 
- OR - 
c. Select the Submit and Add to Library option and click Submit and Add to 
send the job to the Intelligent Agents at the selected destinations and save 
the job to the job library. The job appears in the Active page and the Job 
Library. You can modify or submit a saved job at a later time. 
Note: There is usually a slight delay between the time you submit the job and 
Intelligent Agent notification. 
Modifying a Saved Job 
Note: For submitted jobs in the Active Jobs page, you can only modify 
permissions or notifications. If you want to change other job attributes, you need to 
first delete the job from the Active pane, then re-submit the job with the necessary 
changes. It is more convenient to save the job definition first in the Job Library, them 
make the necessary changes. 
1. If you have not already done so, copy the job to the Job Library using the Copy 
to Library menu option. 
2. Select Job Library from the Job menu. The Job Library dialog appears. 
3. Select the job from the library. 
4. Click Edit. The Job property sheet appears. 
5. Update the pages of the Job property sheet and determine whether the job is 
ready to submit. 
a. Select the Submit option and click OK to submit the job to the Intelligent 
Agents at the selected destinations. The job appears in the Active window. 
- OR - 
b. Select the Save to Library option and click OK. The job appears in the Job 
Library. You can modify or submit a saved job at a later time. 
- OR - 
c. Select the Submit and Save to Library option and click OK to submit the job 
to the Intelligent Agents at the selected destinations and save the job to the 
job library. The job appears in the Active window and the Job Library. You 
can modify or submit a saved job at a later time.
Creating, Modifying, or Viewing a Job 
Viewing Job Details 
To view the details of a particular job, double-click on a job in the Active or History 
Job pane. The Job property sheet for that job appears. 
General Page 
The General page allows you to determine job name, description, type, fixit job 
status, and destinations. 
Figure 4–2 Job General Page 
Job Name 
Enter the name of the new job. 
Description 
Enter the optional description of the job. 
Fixit Job 
Check this box if you want to use this job as a fixit job to correct an event condition. 
The fixit job must be submitted to the destination where the event is being 
monitored. A fixit job cannot be scheduled. 
4-14 Oracle Enterprise Manager Administrator’s Guide
Creating, Modifying, or Viewing a Job 
The fixit job can be selected from the Fixit Job list in the Event Parameters page after 
it has been successfully submitted to an Intelligent Agent. See "Creating, Modifying, 
and Registering an Event" on page 5-29 for more information. 
Destination Type 
Select the destination type from the pull-down list: Database, Listener, Node, 
Group, or other service that is integrated into the Console. 
Job destinations 
Select the destinations of the job in the Available Destinations list and click the < 
(Add) button to move the destination to the Selected Destinations list. 
The destinations are determined by the Destination Type. The destinations include 
databases, listeners, nodes, and groups or other discovered services of these objects. 
Note: Only network objects that have been discovered correctly and have an 
Intelligent Agent running are included in the list of available destinations. See 
"Discovering Services" on page 2-7 for more information. 
Jobs 4-15 
Job Task Page 
The Task page allows you to choose the tasks that you want the job to perform. 
Available Tasks 
Tree list of available job tasks. Tasks vary depending on the Destination Type 
selected on the General page. Select a task and click on the < (Add) button to 
include the task in the job. You can add multiple tasks to the job from the Available 
Tasks scrolling list. See the online help for Oracle job tasks and "Oracle Job Tasks" on 
page 4-23 for information on Oracle predefined job tasks and their parameters. 
Job Tasks 
Tasks currently selected for the current job. You can remove tasks from this list by 
selecting the task and clicking on the >> (Remove) button. 
Up/Down Arrows 
Use the arrow buttons to change the order of the tasks or to make a task conditional 
on a previous task. Select a task in the Selected Tasks list and click on the up or 
down arrow button to position the task.
Creating, Modifying, or Viewing a Job 
Figure 4–3 Job Tasks Page 
Conditions for running a task 
Select a task in the Job Tasks window and select from the following: 
n Always - The task is always executed regardless of the failure or success of 
other tasks. 
n Only on success of - The task is only executed if the task selected in the list is 
successful. 
n Only on failure of - The task is only executed if the task selected in the list has 
failed. 
Note: If any task does not execute, control moves to the next task on the same level 
as the task that did not execute. 
Important: You can add up to five job tasks per job. Adding more 
than five tasks will generate an error message stating the maximum 
number of input files have been exceeded. 
4-16 Oracle Enterprise Manager Administrator’s Guide
Creating, Modifying, or Viewing a Job 
Stopping Jobs 
Normally, a job stops when all tasks have been executed. In some cases, you may 
want the job to stop before completing the task sequence, which might be the case 
when one task in the sequence fails. To handle situations like this, you can include 
the Halt Job task as part of a composite job to stop execution at any point within the 
task sequence. You specify the Halt Job task dependency as you would any other 
task. 
Jobs 4-17 
Job Parameters Page 
On the Parameters Page, you specify parameter settings for the selected job tasks. 
To set the parameters for a task, select the task in the Selected Tasks list. The 
parameters for the selected task are displayed on the right side of the Parameters 
Page. 
Selected Tasks 
Select the task for which you want to set parameters. 
Task Parameters 
Specify the parameters for the selected task. You can enter values in the entry boxes 
or select values from the pull-down lists. The parameters vary according to the job 
task. See the online help for Oracle job tasks and "Oracle Job Tasks" on page 4-23 for 
information on Oracle predefined job tasks and their parameters. 
For some jobs, you can override the preferred credentials for connecting to the 
service. This allows you to enter a username and password. See "Job Credentials" on 
page 4-4 and "Preferred Credentials" on page 1-25 for information on administrator 
preferences. 
Job Schedule Page 
The Schedule page allows you to schedule the execution of the job task. 
Run Job 
Select the frequency that you want the task executed. The choices are Immediately, 
Once, On Interval, On Day of Week, and On Date of Month. 
Start Execution 
Choose the first date and time that you want the task executed. This is the starting 
time for any task scheduled on an interval.
Creating, Modifying, or Viewing a Job 
Stop Execution 
Choose the last date and time that you want the task executed. This option does not 
apply if you chose the Immediately or Once execution options. 
Note: When scheduling a job, the Intelligent Agent time zone (the 
local time zone of the destination where the job will be executed) is 
used. 
Job Permissions Page 
Determine the permissions that you want to assign to the job with the Permissions 
Page. This allows other administrators to view or modify the job. Notifications can 
be assigned with this page. 
The levels of permission that you can assign to an Enterprise Manager 
administrator are: 
None 
Does not allow the administrator to view this job anywhere. 
View 
Allows the administrator to view the job and inspect job properties. 
Modify 
Allows the administrator to suspend and resume the job. The administrator will 
also be able to edit the job’s properties except those reserved for administrators with 
Full permission. 
Full 
Allows the administrator to delete the job from the Active or History pages of the 
Job window, modify permissions for other administrators, and change the 
ownership of the job. 
Notify 
Allows the administrator to receive enhanced notifications (paging and email) for 
the job. Notify permission cannot be assigned if the administrator’s permission level 
is set to None. 
4-18 Oracle Enterprise Manager Administrator’s Guide
Creating, Modifying, or Viewing a Job 
Note: All administrators possessing at least the View permission 
will receive notifications through the Console when a job is 
executed. 
Any permissions assigned on this page supersede any administrator default 
permissions. See "Permissions" on page 1-23 for more information. 
Show Notification Schedule 
Show Notification Schedule displays when administrators are scheduled to receive 
notifications. 
To remove an administrator from receiving an enhanced notification, display the 
context menu (press the right mouse button) on any time block. The context menu 
provides options for adding and removing recipients of the notifications. 
Administrators that appear via the Add Recipient and Remove Recipient menu 
options are those whose schedules match the selected time slot. 
Jobs 4-19 
Job Progress Page 
The Job Progress page is available for jobs in the Active and History pages of the Job 
window. The Progress page provides a log of the job’s activities. 
The Progress page contains all status changes that have been received for a specific 
job. Each row in the page summarizes a status change of the job. If you display the 
Progress page for an execution in the History page, the page typically displays 
Submitted, Scheduled, Started, and Completed or Failed statuses for that execution. 
If you display an execution from the Active Jobs page, the Progress page displays 
only those status changes that have been received. 
When you display the Progress page, the page displays the statuses only for the 
destination and execution time of the job occurrence selected. To view the status 
changes associated with other destinations or execution times, select other 
destinations or execution times from the Destination or Execution pull-down lists. 
You can also select <All> in either list to view all statuses. If the job has been 
Deleted on a destination, the Deleted status always displays at the top of the 
Progress Page. 
The following options are available on the Progress page:
Creating, Modifying, or Viewing a Job 
Destination 
Select the destination of the job occurrences you want to view from the pull-down 
list. Select <All> for all destinations. The list of job occurrences changes according to 
the selection. 
Execution 
Select the execution time of the job occurrences you want to view from the 
pull-down list. Select <All> for all executions. The list of job occurrences changes 
according to the selection. 
Save List 
Select the Save List button to save the list of job occurrences as a local file using the 
standard Windows file dialog box. 
Notification Details 
This option displays the notifications for this job. 
Show Output 
If output exists for the selected occurrence of a job, you can display the output in 
the Output dialog box. You can also double-click on a selected job to display output. 
The columns in the Progress page contain the following information: 
Status 
See "Active Job Pane" on page 4-7 and "History Page" on page 4-9 for information 
on the status of a job. 
Destination 
This is the destination of the specific occurrence of the job. 
Date/Time 
This is the time the Management Server was notified by the Intelligent Agent that a 
status change had occurred. 
Job Output Dialog Box 
The Output dialog box is displayed by double-clicking on an entry in the Progress 
page, or selecting an entry and clicking on the Show Output button, if enabled. This 
dialog displays any output, including error messages, as a result of the execution of 
an occurrence of a job. If no output is produced by a job, a message displays stating 
there is no output for the job. If the output includes only blank spaces, the dialog 
box is blank. 
With the Output dialog box displayed, the following options are available: 
4-20 Oracle Enterprise Manager Administrator’s Guide
Creating, Modifying, or Viewing a Job 
Close 
Select the Close button to exit the dialog box after viewing it. 
Print 
Select the Print button to print the contents of the dialog box. 
Save As 
Select the Save As button to save the contents of the dialog box to a text file. 
Changing the Maximum Limit for Job Output Because the output of some jobs may be 
quite large, Oracle Enterprise Manager provides you with the option of specifying 
the maximum size for any job output returned by the Intelligent Agent. If the job 
output exceeds the maximum limit, any output generated beyond this maximum is 
truncated. By default, the maximum job output size is set to 128K (smallest 
allowable value). The largest permissible value is two megabytes. 
You can set this parameter (oms.vdg.joboutput.maxsize) in the following file: 
$ORACLE_HOME/sysman/config/omsconfig.properties 
Jobs 4-21 
Example omsconfig.properties entry: 
oms.vdg.joboutput.maxsize=128K 
Units must be specified in kilobytes (K) or megabytes (M). 
Example: Creating a Job 
This example illustrates how to complete the General, Tasks, Parameters, and 
Schedule Pages when creating a job. It also describes how to save and submit a job. 
1. Select Create from the Job menu to create a new job. The Create Job property 
sheet displays. 
2. Enter a name for the new job in the Job Name field of the General Page. You 
may also enter a description for the job in the Description field. 
3. Select Database from the Destination Type pull-down list. 
4. Do not check the Fixit Job box for this job. You can create jobs that are used 
specifically as fixit jobs. Fixit jobs can be run automatically in response to an 
event occurrence. See "Event Parameters Page" on page 5-34 for information on 
fixit jobs with events.
Creating, Modifying, or Viewing a Job 
5. Select a destination from the Available Destinations list, then click on the << 
(Add) button to add the destination to the Selected Destinations list. These are 
destinations where an Intelligent Agent is running. The Job Credentials must be 
set up correctly for these destinations. See "Job Credentials" on page 4-4 for 
more information. 
6. Repeat the previous step for another destination. You are choosing the 
destinations where the job will be run. 
7. Click on the Task Page tab of the Create Job property sheet. 
8. Select Run SQL*Plus Script from the Available Tasks list, then click the << (Add) 
button to add the task to the Selected Tasks list. For this example, add only the 
Run SQL*Plus task. You can specify multiple tasks for a job and make a task 
conditional on a previous task. 
9. Make sure the task is set to run Always. If you specified multiple tasks for this 
job, you could make a task conditional on a previous task. 
10. Click on the Parameters Page tab of the Create Job property sheet to set the 
parameters: 
n Enter “SELECT * FROM dba_users;” in the Script Text box. 
n Do not check the Override Preferred Credentials box. If you do not override 
the credentials, the information that is set up with the administrator 
Preferred Credentials property sheet is used. See "Job Credentials" on page 
4-4 for permissions needed to run job tasks. This particular job task requires 
database credentials that permit access to the data dictionary views. Make 
sure the Preferred Credentials for the chosen target have this. 
11. Click on the Schedule Page tab of the Create Job property sheet to schedule the 
execution of the job. 
12. Select the On Interval under Run Job to execute the job on a specific interval. 
13. Set the Start Execution Date of the job to 1/1/2001. Select the month value in 
the Start Execution Date field and enter 7. You can also click the up and down 
arrows to change the value when a number is selected. 
14. Repeat the process in the previous step for the day and year values of the Start 
Execution Date. 
15. Change the Start Execution Time to 12:00 AM. Use the same procedure that you 
used to set the date. 
16. Check the End Execution box to set a final execution date for this job. 
4-22 Oracle Enterprise Manager Administrator’s Guide
Oracle Job Tasks 
17. Set the End Execution Date of the job to 1/3/2001. Set the End Execution Time 
Note: If you have a domain user set up, you must set the domain 
password to be the same as the local password in order for scheduled 
jobs to run when they are submitted using the domain user account. 
(Windows NT only) 
Jobs 4-23 
of the job to 12:00 AM. 
18. The Time Zone should be set to Intelligent Agent (currently static text). This job 
will execute at the local time zone where the Intelligent Agent is located. This is 
the time zone of the destination. 
19. Select the Every ... Days button to set the job frequency for day interval. Click 
on the up arrow to change the value to 3 days. 
20. Click on the Permissions Page tab of the Create Job property sheet to assign 
permissions on this job for other administrators. 
21. Allow all other Enterprise Manager administrators to view and receive 
notifications for this job. 
22. Click the Submit and Add to Library button to save the new job in the Job 
Library and submit the job to the selected destinations. 
23. If you want to modify this job later, select the job in the Job Library dialog and 
choose the Edit option. You can also double-click on the job. 
A submitted job is sent to the Intelligent Agents at the selected destinations. The 
Intelligent Agent for a destination begins processing the job, the job appears in the 
Active Jobs page in the Job window. If the job is processed successfully, the job will 
start executing on 1/1/2001 at 12:00 AM. After an execution of a job, it is moved to 
the Job History page of the Job window. You can view the progress of the job and 
any output in the Job Progress Page. 
Oracle Job Tasks 
This section lists the Oracle predefined job tasks and parameters for: 
n Oracle databases 
n Operating systems or hosts (Nodes) 
n Listeners
Oracle Job Tasks 
This information is entered in the Job Task Page and Job Parameters Page of the 
Create Job property sheet. The name and the parameters are listed for each task. 
Oracle Database Tasks 
These are the tasks that can be run on databases and database groups. In addition, 
you can run operating system or host job tasks. 
n Run SQL*Plus Script 
n Run DBA Script 
n Shutdown Database 
n Startup Database 
Note: You need to set up a password file to perform administration tasks on a 
remote database. See the Oracle Enterprise Manager Configuration Guide for more 
information. 
Enterprise Manager Wizard Database Tasks 
Specific database job tasks are used by the Enterprise Manager data and backup 
management wizards that are accessed through the Console Navigator popup and 
main menus. The job tasks are: 
n Analyze 
n Import 
n Export 
n Load 
n Backup 
n Recovery 
Since these job tasks are used only by their respective wizards, the tasks will not 
have directly editable parameters. To modify parameters for any Wizard database 
task, click on the Load Wizard button located on the Parameters page of the Job 
property sheet to activate the associated Wizard. For more information about these 
wizards and associated job tasks, see the Enterprise Manager online help. 
Run SQL*Plus Script 
This job executes a SQL*Plus script, allowing any legal SQL or PL/SQL scripts to be 
run, including all SQL*Plus formatting commands. You can copy and paste the text 
4-24 Oracle Enterprise Manager Administrator’s Guide
Oracle Job Tasks 
of the script into the Script Text box of the Parameters page (Create Job property 
sheet), or simply type SQL commands in the Script Text box. 
Parameters: 
1. SQL Parameters. Enter one or more arguments that you want the script to use. 
2. Override Preferred Credentials. You can use the preferred credentials that have 
been set up for the database, or you can enter a username and password. If you 
check the box to override the credentials, then you need to enter: 
a. User Name. Username for accessing the database. 
b. Password. Password for the username. 
Note: See "Preferred Credentials" on page 1-25 for more information. 
3. Script Text. You can copy and paste your script into the Script Text box. 
Hint: If you need to determine whether a SQL error has occurred during the 
running of a SQL script, include "WHENEVER SQLERROR EXIT SQL.SQLCODE" 
at the beginning of the script. If a SQL error occurs, the job status is set to failed. 
Jobs 4-25 
Run DBA Script 
This job executes a Server Manager line mode script that contains DBA commands. 
Parameters: 
1. Override Preferred Credentials. You can use the preferred credentials that have 
been set up for the database, or you can enter a username and password. If you 
check the box to override the credentials, then you need to enter: 
a. User Name. Username for accessing the database. 
b. Password. Password for the username. 
c. Connect As. Select the role you want to connect as from the pull-down list. 
Note: See "Preferred Credentials" on page 1-25 for more information. 
2. Script Text. You can copy and paste your script into Script Text box. 
Shutdown Database 
This job task shuts down an Oracle database instance. 
Parameters: 
1. Mode:
Oracle Job Tasks 
n Immediate 
n Abort 
2. Connect As: 
n SYSDBA 
n SYSOPER 
3. Override Preferred Credentials. Check the box if you want to override the 
preferred credentials that have been set up for the database. If you check the 
box to override the credentials, then you need to enter: 
a. User Name. Enter the username for accessing the database. 
b. Password. Enter the password for the username. 
Note: See "Preferred Credentials" on page 1-25 for more information. 
Startup Database 
This job task starts up an Oracle database instance. 
Parameters: 
1. Startup State. Select the start up state from the pull-down list: 
n Startup instance, mount, and open database 
n Startup instance and mount database 
n Startup instance only 
2. Parameter File. Enter the initialization parameter filename you want to use for 
the database. This file is located on the node where the Intelligent Agent and 
database reside. For example with a database on a Unix platform: 
/private/oracle/admin/ora8db/myinit.ora 
If you do not enter a filename, the default platform-specific initialization file is 
used. 
3. Override Preferred Credentials. Check the box if you want to override the 
preferred credentials that have been set up for the database. If you check the 
box to override the credentials, then you need to enter: 
a. User Name. Enter the username for accessing the database. 
b. Password. Enter the password for the username. 
4-26 Oracle Enterprise Manager Administrator’s Guide
Oracle Job Tasks 
Jobs 4-27 
Note: See "Preferred Credentials" on page 1-25 for more information. 
4. Mount Mode. Select the mount option from the pull-down list: 
n Exclusive 
n Normal 
n Parallel 
5. Connect As. Select the connecting role from the pull-down list: 
n SYSDBA 
n SYSOPER 
6. Restrict Connections. Check this box if you want to start the database in 
Restricted mode. 
7. Force Startup. Check this box if you want to start up the database with the Force 
option. Refer to the Oracle 8i Administrator’s Guide for more information on 
startup options. 
Halt Job 
Normally, a job stops when all tasks have been executed. In some cases, you may 
want the job to stop before completing the task sequence, which might be the case 
when one task in the sequence fails. To handle situations like this, you can include 
the Halt Job task as part of a composite job to stop execution at any point within the 
task sequence. You specify the Halt Job task dependency as you would any other 
task. 
Operating System or Node Tasks 
These are the tasks that can be run on the host's operating system. 
n Broadcast Message 
n Run OS Command 
n Run Tcl Script 
n Halt Job 
Broadcast Message 
This job allows you to submit a message to the selected destinations using the 
platform-specific mechanism. To send the message to a destination, you may need 
to have permissions on specific directories. For example, you may need permissions
Oracle Job Tasks 
on /dev/console (system console device) to send a message to a Unix 
destination. 
Note: On a Windows platform, this task sends the message to ALL users on the 
network. To send a message to specific users, use the Run OS Command task to 
execute the net command with the send option. See the Windows online help for 
information on net command line arguments. You can also enter 
net send /help 
at the MSDOS command prompt. 
Parameters: 
Message Text. Enter the message text that you want sent to the selected 
destinations. 
Run OS Command 
This is a generic method of running any program or script that is executable on that 
host, provided your credentials allow you to do that. 
Parameters: 
1. OS command or shell script name. The command or script must be accessible 
from the node where the Intelligent Agent and database reside. You may have 
to include the path for the Intelligent Agent to locate and execute the command 
or script. For example: ls 
2. One or more arguments to the command. For example: -l /export/oracle 
Run Tcl Script 
This job executes a Tcl script. This is a generic method of running any Tcl script that 
is executable on that host, provided the preferred credentials allow that. See 
"Preferred Credentials" on page 1-25 for more information. 
Parameters: 
1. Parameters. One or more command-line arguments that you want the script to 
use. The arguments must be delimited by quotes. 
Note: Multiple parameters, such as "one two three", are treated as only one 
parameter. To ensure that the parameters entered in the field are treated as separate 
arguments and to ensure that the Tcl script functions in future releases, include the 
following at the beginning of the Tcl script: 
set argc [llength $argv] 
4-28 Oracle Enterprise Manager Administrator’s Guide
Oracle Job Tasks 
Jobs 4-29 
if { $argc == 1} { set argv [lindex $argv 0]} 
2. Script Text. Copy and paste the Tcl script into the Script Text box. 
Tcl Script Examples 
For information on writing Tcl job tasks, see the Intelligent Agent User’s Guide. For 
information on Tcl, see "Tcl and the Tk Toolkit," by John K. Outsterhout, published 
by Addison-Wesley Publishing Company, 1994. For examples of Tcl job scripts, 
review the scripts located in ORACLE_HOMEnetworkagentjobsoracle 
subdirectories on the machine where an Intelligent Agent has been installed. Do not 
edit these Tcl scripts. 
The following is an example of a Tcl script (Unix platform) that logs on to a 
database and runs a SQL statement: 
set argc [llength $argv] 
if {$argc == 1} {set argv [lindex $argv 0]} 
set connect_str [lindex $argv 0] 
set sql_statement [lindex $argv 1] 
set lda [oralogon $connect_str] 
set cur1 [oraopen $lda] 
orasql $cur1 $sql_statement 
set result_row [orafetch $cur1] 
while {$oramsg(rc) == 0} { 
puts $result_row 
set result_row [orafetch $cur1] 
} 
oraclose $cur1 
oralogoff $lda 
When the script is executed with the Run Tcl Script task, the following are examples 
of command line arguments that should be entered in the Parameters field: 
"scott/tiger@or817.world" "select * from emp" 
The following is an example of a Tcl script (Unix platform) that displays the 
contents of a file if it exists and triggers a third-party event if it does not exist: 
set argc [llength $argv] 
if {$argc == 1} {set argv [lindex $argv 0]} 
set myfile [lindex $argv 0] 
append mymessage "File not found:" $myfile 
if {[file exists $myfile]} { 
catfile $myfile 
} else {
Oracle Job Tasks 
puts $mymessage 
orareportevent /user/host/file/alert $oramsg(nodename) 1 $mymessage 
} 
When the script is executed with the Run Tcl Script task, the following is an 
example of a command line argument that should be entered in the Parameters 
field: 
"/export/oracle/network/agent/dbsnmp.ver" 
Note: When orareportevent is used to trigger a third-party event with a job 
script, you need to create and register an event that has the "Unsolicited events" box 
checked. See "Event General Page" on page 5-31 for more information. 
Listener Tasks 
These are the tasks that can be run on Listeners. In addition, you can run operating 
system or host job tasks. 
n Shutdown Listener 
n Startup Listener 
Shutdown Listener 
This stops the Listener. The preferred credentials for the node must have a user that 
has system administration privileges. See "Preferred Credentials" on page 1-25 for 
information on user preferences. 
Parameters: 
Password. Enter a password for the listener if you choose to override the default 
password. 
Startup Listener 
This can be invoked to start the Listener. The preferred credentials for the node 
must have a user that has system administration privileges. See "Preferred 
Credentials" on page 1-25 for information on user preferences. 
Parameters: 
None 
4-30 Oracle Enterprise Manager Administrator’s Guide
Oracle Job Tasks 
Jobs 4-31 
Important: See "Numeric Pager Job/Event Ids" on page 5-42 for 
specific ids.
Oracle Job Tasks 
4-32 Oracle Enterprise Manager Administrator’s Guide
5 
Events 
The Event system allows you to monitor your network for specific conditions, such 
as loss of service or lack of storage, that may occur in your managed environment. 
You select tests to run on managed targets (databases, nodes, listeners, or other 
services), then set the threshold parameters for which you want to be notified. You 
can share events with other administrators, in addition to being able to notify 
specific administrators when an event condition occurs. For some event tests, you 
can also choose to execute a fixit job that automatically corrects the problem. 
The following topics are discussed in this chapter: 
Events 5-1 
n Event System Overview 
n Event Categories and Types 
n Event Pane 
n Event Menu 
n Creating, Modifying, and Registering an Event 
n Oracle Event Tests 
n Event System Features and Requirements
What’s New in Events 
What’s New in Events 
This section discusses the enhancements to the Events System in Enterprise 
Manager 2.2. 
n New operating system event tests 
These event tests monitor operating system-specific metrics for Solaris, HP-UX, 
Compaq Tru64, IBM AIX and Windows NT. These new events require an 8.1.7 
or higher Intelligent Agent. As with other Advanced Events, these events are 
available with the Oracle Diagnostics Pack. 
n Support for duplicate events 
Duplicate events can now be registered against 8.1.7 or higher Agents. 
Duplicate events are those that contain the same event tests and parameters 
against the same target. For example, 2 or more administrators can create 
their own events that register the same Tablespace Full event with the same 
parameters against the same tablespace. 
You cannot, however, have duplicate event tests within the same Event. For 
example, if you create an Event called "Database Availability", it cannot have 2 
or more of the same Database Up/Down event test against the same database 
A. 
Refer to the Enterprise Manager release notes for details on duplicate events 
with earlier versions of Enterprise Manager and the agents. 
n Improved Node Up/Down Monitoring 
The Node Up/Down event test is enhanced to distinguish between situations 
where the target node is unreachable, the agent is down, or the agent is not 
responding. 
n Enhanced Monitoring for Target Subcomponents 
For Events that monitor targets with multiple subcomponents, (e.g. a group of 
tablespaces), notifications will now be sent each time the status of any 
subcomponent changes, even if it does not change the overall severity of the 
Event. 
For example, you register a Tablespace Full event for tablespaces A, B, C. If 
tablespace A becomes full, the event triggers an Alert. If tablespace B also 
becomes full, then even though the event is still in Alert due to tablespace A, 
another notification will be sent due to tablespace B becoming full. 
n Error State for Events 
5-2 Oracle Enterprise Manager Administrator’s Guide
What’s New in Events 
When there are problems evaluating an event (e.g. an archive full event against 
a database that is NOT running in archivelog mode), then an alert may be sent 
indicating the event is in error. This error state is denoted by a yellow hexagon. 
In most cases, events in error are due to user errors and can thus be corrected. 
Some examples of error situations are: 
Events 5-3 
n registering an Archive Full event against a database running in 
noarchivelog mode 
n registering an event that monitors segments but specifying a filter that 
excludes all available segments 
n registering an event that needs to connect to the database but providing the 
wrong database credential 
Refer to "Interpreting Events" on page 5-8 for more information. 
n Enhanced Datablock Corruption event 
When registered against 8.1.7 or higher Agents, the Datablock Corruption event 
test will now also monitor for ORA-1157 (cannot identify/lock data file string – 
see DBWR trace file) and ORA-27048 (skgfifi: file header information is invalid) 
errors. 
n Enhanced User-Defined SQL Test 
The User-Defined SQL event test can support pl/sql functions. This means 
you can select from a pl/sql function and have the return value evaluated 
against a specified threshold. The actual pl/sql function needs to be defined 
separately. 
n Enhancements to the Event Handler 
To simplify setup and configuration, the Event Handler is now solely available 
as an external service of the Management Server. Error handling has also been 
improved. 
n Context-Sensitive Help for Event Tests 
When creating/editing events, this feature will allow users to select an 
individual event test and press the F1 key or click the Help button to access 
online help for that particular event.
Event System Overview 
Event System Overview 
The Event system allows you to efficiently monitor a large system. Using the Event 
system and Intelligent Agents, you can effectively monitor any number of 
databases, nodes, or other services 24 hours a day, and be alerted when a problem 
or specific condition is detected. You can also pinpoint only the services you wish to 
monitor. The Event system can be extended to include other third-party 
applications that detect events independent of the Intelligent Agents. 
In the Event system, event settings are stored based on the administrator registering 
the event. This allows administrators of large systems to customize their event 
systems to their preferences and tasks. Administrators receive messages for events 
for which they have been selected to receive notifications by other administrators. 
The Event system includes the following processes: 
1. Creating an event by completing the Event property sheet pages. This involves: 
a. Determining the destination and frequency of the event. 
b. Selecting the event tests that you want to run. 
c. Determining the parameters for the event tests. 
d. Specifying a fixit job to be run when an event triggers. 
e. Assigning permissions to allow other administrators to share the event. 
2. Saving and modifying an event. 
3. Registering, or submitting, an event to a destination. 
4. Interpreting and correcting an event occurrence. 
a. Logging information pertinent to your interpretation of the event to the 
Event log. 
b. Assigning the Event to a different administrator if appropriate. 
Using Events 
You need to create and register events, which are simply a group of event tests that 
you want to run on your managed systems. Oracle Enterprise Manager includes a 
variety of predefined event tests that you can use when creating events. The event 
tests are grouped by service type, for instance: 
n Database 
n Listener 
5-4 Oracle Enterprise Manager Administrator’s Guide
Event System Overview 
Events 5-5 
n Web Servers 
n Concurrent Manager 
n Node 
Creating Events 
You can create events using the predefined event tests that have been installed with 
Oracle Enterprise Manager. See "Event Categories and Types" on page 5-10 for more 
information. 
The events are created with information entered in the Event property sheet. You 
determine parameters such as the destination that is monitored, the specific tests to 
perform, the frequency that the event test is executed, and whether other 
administrators can share the events. See "Permissions" on page 1-23 for more 
information. Some event tests have parameters with threshold values that you can 
customize for your system. See "Event Parameters Page" on page 5-34 for more 
information. To use the Event system, an administrator must have sufficient 
privileges to access database objects from the Console. Under most circumstances, 
full DBA privileges are not required, nor would be appropriate to assign full DBA 
privileges to every administrator. For this reason, the Event Handler role was 
created. 
Enterprise Manager Monitor Role Beginning with Oracle 8.0.6 databases and higher, 
the OEM_MONITOR role is created by the Oracle database creation scripts. This 
role permits access to database functionality within Enterprise Manager. For 
example, running events against a database (tablespace full, buffer cache hit ratio) 
or browsing through the objects in a database via the Console Navigator tree. These 
types of functionality require database credentials on which to perform these 
operations. Rather than granting the powerful DBA role to the database credentials, 
many administrators prefer to provide only the necessary privileges required to do 
these operations. Granting the OEM_MONITOR role to the database credentials, 
ensures that the user has the minimum sufficient privileges required for these 
operations. 
For database users on 7.3.x databases, you need to define the OEM_MONITOR role 
manually. 
Note: You need to create the OEM_MONITOR role using the SYS 
account.
Event System Overview 
Here are the steps you need to perform: 
1. Create a role called OEM_MONITOR 
drop role OEM_MONITOR; 
create role OEM_MONTOR: 
2. Grant the ’connect’ role to OEM_MONITOR 
grant connect to OEM_MONITOR; 
3. Grant the system privileges ’Analyze any’ & ’Create table’ to OEM_MONITOR 
grant analyze any to OEM_MONITOR; 
grant create table to OEM_MONITOR; 
4. Create the SELECT_CATALOG_ROLE role as defined in sc_role.sql . 
5. Grant the SELECT_CATALOG_ROLE to the OEM_MONITOR role 
grant select_catalog_role to OEM_MONITOR; 
You are now ready to grant the OEM_MONITOR role to the database user that will 
be used as “database preferred credentials” in Enterprise Manager. In addition to 
granting the OEM_MONITOR role to a user, you must also ensure that the QUOTA 
for the user account is set to UNLIMITED. 
The “Continued Row” event test needs to analyze results into a table so it needs 
both the "analyze any" and "create table" privileges. 
Note: The "analyze any" privilege is used by the "index rebuild" 
event to compute statistics. 
Registering Events 
Events are registered, or submitted, to specific destinations, such as nodes, listeners, 
or databases. The status of a registered event is viewed in the Registered page of the 
Event pane. 
The event scripts are executed on nodes with the permissions of the Intelligent 
Agent. However, some of the database event tests, such as Continued Rows, require 
access to system tables and require additional permissions. You need to set up 
preferred credentials for the monitored database with an administrator that has 
system privileges. See "Preferred Credentials" on page 1-25 for more information. 
The Intelligent Agent is responsible for detecting when a specific event condition 
has occurred. The Intelligent Agent first notifies a Management Server, which in 
5-6 Oracle Enterprise Manager Administrator’s Guide
Event System Overview 
turn notifies interested administrators either through the Oracle Enterprise Manger 
Console, or by external means such as Email or Paging. 
The Management Server is responsible for registering event information with the 
appropriate Intelligent Agents on nodes in the network. You determine the 
frequency that an Intelligent Agent checks an event. See "Frequency" on page 5-32 
for details on setting the frequency interval for an event. An exception to this is the 
Up/Down (node) event test, which is checked at an interval set by the system itself. 
See "Fault Management Event Tests" on page 5-11 for more information on this 
event test. 
Events 5-7 
Event Occurrences 
When an alert condition occurs, the Intelligent Agent is responsible for notifying the 
Management Server. Each event is logged in the repository and can be viewed and 
acknowledged in the Alerts page of the Console. See Figure 5–1, "Event Menu and 
Pane" for an illustration of the Event pane. 
Event Notifications 
Events can consist of multiple event tests. If any one of these tests identify a 
specified condition, the event is triggered and a notification is sent to the Console. If 
enhanced notification is configured for your system, paging and/or email 
notifications are sent. 
Event notification occurs as follows: 
n A notification is sent when the threshold of an event test exceeds the level 
specified by parameter values. If the event does not have parameters, a 
notification is sent when the event occurs. 
n If the event test condition remains above the threshold specified, a new 
notification is not sent. If the condition does not exist when the next test is run, 
the event clears. Notifications are also sent (email/paging) when an event 
clears. 
n If an event test condition changes from warning to critical or critical to warning, 
a new notification is sent to the Event pane or via E-mail or paging. 
n If you acknowledge and move an alert to history, a new notification is not sent 
to the Alerts page unless a moved warning changes to a critical alert.
Event System Overview 
Notifying Administrators 
Enterprise Manager administrators can be notified in various ways, such as 
electronic mail or paging, depending on the administrator’s setups and 
permissions. You need to set up the notification services and determine the 
administrators that need to be notified for the events. See "Event Permissions Page" 
on page 5-35 and "Permissions" on page 1-23 to determine the administrators that 
receive notifications. See "Notification" on page 1-12 and "Schedule" on page 1-22 to 
determine how and when an administrator is notified. 
If you plan to notify administrators with email or paging, you need to make sure 
the following are set up properly: 
n The settings for the system modem. 
n The notification schedules for the administrators. 
n The mail and paging services that are used to contact administrators. 
n The mail address and paging numbers for each administrator. 
Interpreting Events 
An event is composed of one or more event tests. While an individual event test 
may result in a different status (For example, some clear, some are in alert), there is 
a general status for the Event. To determine the general severity for the event, the 
following rules apply in succession: 
a. If the event includes an UpDown event test, and this test triggers, then the 
general status of the Event is "Unknown" (gray flag) 
b. Otherwise, if the event includes a test that reaches an alert state, then the 
general status of the Event is "Critical" (red flag) 
c. Otherwise, if the event includes a test that reaches a warning state, then the 
general status of the Event is "Warning" (yellow flag) 
d. Otherwise, if the event includes a test that is in error, then the general status 
of the Event is "Error" (yellow hexagon) 
e. Otherwise, all tests should be clear, so the general status of the event is 
"Clear" 
You can still see the individual status of each event test in the Event Viewer. 
Event Colors and Icons All events return values and some events produce output 
messages. The events return different icons depending on the severity of the event. 
These severity levels are determined by parameter thresholds you set for the event 
5-8 Oracle Enterprise Manager Administrator’s Guide
Event System Overview 
tests during event creation. The colors are displayed on the event severity icon that 
is located: 
Events 5-9 
n Next to the event name listed in the Alerts page. 
n On the object in the Group pane if it is part of a group. See Chapter 3, "Groups" 
for information on the Group pane. 
The colors of the event severity icons are: 
n Error State (yellow hexagon with an exclamation point) 
An error state indicates there is a problem with the evaluation of the event 
condition, as opposed to a threshold being met. Examples of error states are: 
registering an Archive Full event against a database in non-archivelog mode, 
registering an event that monitors segments but specifying a filter that excludes 
all available segments. 
n Event cleared (green flag) 
n Warning (yellow flag) 
n Critical (red flag) 
n Unknown (gray flag) 
A gray flag represents an "unknown" state where it is not possible for 
Enterprise Manager to ascertain the event status because the node is 
unreachable or the Intelligent Agent is not working. The gray flag will appear 
on the group pane and as the flag for the event in the Alert tab if your event 
includes at least one up/down event test (any target: node/database/listener). 
When the gray flag occurs, it will be set for the Event. When you see the event 
in the Event viewer, the flag for the up/down event test will be gray, and the 
flags for the other event tests will remain the color of their original state. 
If you have a single db up/down event test in an event, it will also turn gray (at 
the Event level). When you look at the Event in the Event Viewer, you will see 
two event tests: db up/down and node up/down (which is always added 
whenever you have any up/down event test). Both these event tests will have 
gray flags. 
If you have an event that does not include any up/down event test, then it will 
remain the same color even though other events are showing gray flags. 
If an UpDown event test is specified for a particular event, and the node to 
which the event is assigned goes down, the event will return an "unknown" 
severity (gray flag). The original event severity will be restored when the node 
comes back up. At least one UpDown event test (node, listener, database, etc.)
Event Categories and Types 
must be specified for an event in order for the "unknown" severity to be 
returned. Events not containing an UpDown event test will not provide any 
node down notification. 
Note: Some events, such as Probe and User Blocks events, do not return a 
warning value because the warning threshold parameter is not used. The event has 
either occurred or not occurred. 
Correcting Problems 
When an event occurs, you need to correct the problem. In some cases, you can 
create a fixit job that responds to specific event conditions. These situations are 
noted in the online help for Oracle events. 
In other cases, the solution requires careful attention by a system administrator. For 
example, space management event conditions may require an administrator to 
increase space requirements and resource management conditions may require an 
administrator to adjust initialization parameters. 
For information on how to correct event conditions, refer to the appropriate 
documentation. To correct Oracle database problems, refer to the Oracle Server 
Administrator’s, Tuning, and Reference Guides. For network problems, refer to the 
Oracle networking guides for your system. 
Event Categories and Types 
The Oracle event tests for the database, listener, and node destination types are 
grouped into categories: 
n Fault Management event tests 
n Space Management event tests 
n Resource Management event tests 
n Performance Management event tests 
n Unsolicited events 
Only the UpDown event tests are included with Oracle Enterprise Manager. These 
fall under the category of ‘Fault Management event tests’. Additional advanced 
events for all categories are available with the optional Oracle Diagnostics Pack. 
Beginning with the Oracle Diagnostics Pack for Enterprise Manager version 2.2, 
operating system-specific tests are also available for NT and UNIX platforms. 
5-10 Oracle Enterprise Manager Administrator’s Guide
Event Categories and Types 
See the online help for Oracle predefined event tests, "Oracle Event Tests" on page 
5-40, and the Diagnostic Pack documentation for information on events and their 
parameters. All the Node events are supported on Unix and Windows NT 
platforms. For other platforms, see your platform-specific documentation. 
Events 5-11 
Fault Management Event Tests 
This category of event tests monitors for catastrophic conditions on the system, such 
as a database, node, or listener is down. Immediate action must be taken by the 
administrator. Examples of event tests available in this category include: 
n Alert 
n UpDown 
Most of the fault management event tests do not require any threshold values 
because the event test only checks whether the service is up or down. For the Alert 
event test, the event test checks whether error messages are written into the 
database alert log file. 
The UpDown event tests are provided with the Enterprise Manager base product. 
These event tests check whether a database, listener, or node is available. With the 
UpDown event test for databases or listeners, you can use the Startup Database or 
Startup Listener task as a fixit job to re-start the database or listener. To avoid 
executing that job when the database or listener is brought down intentionally, you 
need to remove the event registration. 
Space Management Event Tests 
This category of event tests track possible space problems, such as running out of 
space on a disk or archive device. Examples of space management event tests in this 
category include: 
n Disk Full 
n Archive Full 
To check for space management events, set a threshold on the free space left. For 
example, set an alert if the free space on a disk falls below a specific number of 
bytes. In order to properly choose the threshold value, you need to know the 
characteristics of the tablespaces. For example, you would want to know whether 
the tablespaces contain online transaction processing (OLTP) tables or decision 
support tables. The former usually has a very fast growth rate, while the latter 
almost never grows.
Event Categories and Types 
Resource Management Event Tests 
This category of event tests track possible resource problems, such as exceeding 
datafile or lock limits. Examples of resource management event tests in this 
category include: 
n Datafile Limit 
n Lock Limit 
To check for resource management events, set a threshold on the percentage of a 
resource used. For example, you can set an alert if the percentage of the datafile 
resource used is greater than a specified value. 
Performance Management Event Tests 
This category of event test monitors the system for performance problems, such as 
excessive disk input/output or library cache miss rate. Examples of events in this 
category include: 
n Disk I/O 
n Library Cache 
To check for performance management events, set a threshold on a system value. 
For example, you can set an alert if the library cache miss rate is greater than a 
specific value. The set of threshold values is system specific, depending on the 
hardware platform, number of users, and other factors. 
Unsolicited Event Tests 
Unsolicited event tests are event tests that have been initiated outside the Enterprise 
Manager Event system. An event is considered unsolicited if it is raised by a process 
other than the Oracle Intelligent Agent, but is running on the same node as the 
Intelligent Agent. These events are usually provided by third-party software. 
Creating an unsolicited event allows you to integrate and monitor third-party 
events. Essentially, there are two phases to setting up an unsolicited event: 
n Registering interest in an unsolicited event 
n Raising the unsolicited event 
Registering Interest in an Unsolicited Event 
To register interest in an unsolicited event, check the Unsolicited Event Test box in 
the Event General page and complete the information in the succeeding property 
5-12 Oracle Enterprise Manager Administrator’s Guide
Event Categories and Types 
sheet pages. Select the Unsolicited event in the Test page and complete the 
Parameters pages. Information on how to fill out the Parameters page is discussed 
in the next section. After completing the unsolicited event, you can save and submit 
the event. See "Creating, Modifying, and Registering an Event" on page 5-29 for 
more information. 
Setting the Parameters Property Sheet for Unsolicited Events 
Because unsolicited events originate outside the Event system, you may wish to 
screen only for specific external events. The Parameters page for the Unsolicited 
Event Test allows you to filter unsolicited events based upon the following field 
entries: 
Events 5-13 
n Event Name: Name of the event 
n Object: Name of the object that the event is monitoring 
n Severity: Level of severity of the event 
n Message: Message to be displayed in the Console 
You can enter a wildcard "*" (no filtering) or a character string in these fields to 
define the filtering mechanism. 
Event Name 
This is the four-part name of the event in the form: 
/vendor/product/category/name 
You can enter any character strings but all four parts and the forward slashes (/) are 
required. The eventname is assumed to be in 7-bit ASCII, so that it never changes 
regardless of platform or language. The name of the event that fires must match the 
value specified in this parameter field in order for the unsolicited event to fire. 
Enter a "*" if you do not want to filter on an event name. 
Object 
An object can be any service the unsolicited event is monitoring, such as a database, 
listener, or node name. Important: The object must be a service that the Intelligent 
Agent has already discovered. 
Enter a wildcard character ( "*") if you want to receive unsolicted events from any 
type of object. Or, you can use the percent sign "%" for partial filtering. For example, 
ORCL% for events fired on objects whose name starts with "ORCL."
Event Categories and Types 
Severity 
Enter the numeric severity level (-1, 1, 2) corresponding to the severity of the event. 
Severity levels map to different flags in the Console Event Pane: 
Table 5–1 Severity Level/Event Flag Mapping 
Flag Color Severity Severity Level 
Green Cleared Severity -1 
Yellow Warning Severity 1 
Red Critical Severity 2 
Message 
Message is a quoted text string that is displayed in the Console, such as "File not 
found." If a message filter is specified, then the event is passed only if the message 
matches what is specified in the message filter. 
You can specify wildcard characters as part of the filter i.e. Message Filter : 
ERROR%. In this case the unsolicited event should fire on anything with a message 
that starts with "ERROR:" 
Raising an Unsolicited Event Test 
To raise unsolicited events, users have a choice of a command-line interface 
(oemevent executable) or an OraTcl verb (orareportevent). The related syntax is as 
follows: 
oemevent [event_name] [object_name] [severity] [message] 
orareportevent [event_name] [object_name] [severity] [message] 
where event_name is the name of the event that triggered the unsolicited event. 
object_name is the name of the object that the event is monitoring, severity is 
the level of severity for the event, and message is the text string displayed in the 
Enterprise Manager Console. For additional details, please refer to the Intelligent 
Agent User’s Guide. 
Note that the severity is specified as a string in oemevent and as an integer in 
orareportevent. Also, note that the event_name must be a four-part string of 
the form /a/b/c/d, where the different elements may be used to organize the event 
test within a hierarchy of event tests. For example, 
/myevents/node/files/filefound may be an event test you developed. It 
5-14 Oracle Enterprise Manager Administrator’s Guide
Event Categories and Types 
relates to nodes, more specifically space on nodes, and it monitors for the existence 
of a particular file. 
For an example of using OraTcl to trigger a third-party event, see Tcl Script 
Examples in the Run Tcl job task. For information on OraTcl and event scripts, see 
the Oracle Intelligent Agent User’s Guide. 
Raising Unsolicited Events Via Enterprise Manager Jobs 
Typically, unsolicited events are evaluated and raised by third-party software. 
Enterprise Manager allows you to implement unsolicted events through the Job 
system and Tcl. You create a Tcl job and submit it as a periodic job. The Tcl contains 
logic to evaluate the underlying test and decide whether it needs to raise the event 
and at what severity level. Since the job is submitted as a periodic job, the 
underlying test is evaluated periodically like all regular Enterprise Manager event 
tests. Using techniques like the ones scribed below, users of Enterprise can 
implement event monitoring specific to their environments. 
Example 1: Simple Job Raising an Unsolicited Event It is possible to submit a job with an 
imbedded OS command task that executes the oemevent program and passes the 
program all necessary arguments. All users that have registered for the event raised 
by oemevent, will receive the event notification. The event has to be known to the 
administrator submitting the job that raises it. 
However, the job that raises the event may contain enough logic to evaluate the 
underlying test and decide whether it needs to raise the event and at what severity 
level. Such a job may be submitted as a periodic job so that the underlying test is 
evaluated periodically, which is similar to regular OEM event tests. 
Unsolicited events (their logic actually) are evaluated in their own process and 
within the proper OS security envelope. For this reason, no longer pose security or 
robustness threats to the system. What we have introduced here is a procedure 
where one needs to submit a job in order to monitor for an event. 
Consider as an example how to implement an event test which triggers when a 
particular file is found. Lets call this event 
/myevents/node/files/filefound. The following Tcl script needs to be 
submitted as the job: 
# event name 
set event_name /myevents/node/files/filefound 
# filename to look for comes at the first (and only) argument 
set file_name [lindex $argv 0] 
# check for the file, and if it’s found trigger the event as critical 
Events 5-15
Event Categories and Types 
if { [file exists $file_name] } { 
orareportevent $event_name $oramsg(oraobject) 2 "$file_name found" 
} 
In order to receive this event, a user needs to register an event with the Unsolicited 
test selected and configured to filter in events with name 
/myevents/node/files/filefound. This event should be registered against a 
node and will trigger against it. The message attached to the event occurrence will 
contain the values of all parameters passed into orareportevent. 
Although this event is fairly straightforward, there are two things wrong:: 
1. The event does not ever clear – it should, if the file disappears 
2. The event will trigger every time the above script is evaluated, even if it has 
triggered the time before – you will receive the same alert multiple (possibly 
infinite) times. An event should not trigger unless there is a severity change. 
Any other scripting language or executable program can also be used to implement 
the logic of an unsolicited event test. However, Tcl is preferable because it allows 
platform-independent implementation and the fact that the code may be sent from 
the Enterprise Manager Console ‘on-demand’ without requiring anything to be 
installed on the Intelligent Agent side. 
Example 2: Unsolicited Events with the Proper Lifecycle As with regular Enterprise 
Manager events, unsolicited events could be triggered only once per condition 
detected and could clear automatically if the condition that triggers the event is no 
longer met. Events adhering to this operational pattern are said to have a "proper 
lifecycle." 
Typically, scripts that implement unsolicited events are composed of two basic 
parts: 
1. The part that evaluates the event and sets its associated severity 
2. The part that handles the event reporting and avoids multiple notifications if 
the severity does not change 
The following Tcl script illustrates this two-part script implementation, as well as a 
technique that allows proper event lifecycle. 
#--------------------------------------------------------------------- 
# 
# Tcl Procedure 
# orareportevent1 
# 
5-16 Oracle Enterprise Manager Administrator’s Guide
Event Categories and Types 
# Purpose: 
# Trigger an unsolicited event only previous state is different 
# 
# Arguments: 
# - event_name: event test to trigger 
# - severity: new severity 
# - message: message to be attached to the event report 
# 
#--------------------------------------------------------------------- 
proc orareportevent1 {event_name severity message} { 
# define a ’lock’ that its contents define the previous event status 
# and figure out the event state during the previous execution 
global oramsg 
append event_lock [tempdir] "/" $oramsg(jobid) ".el" 
if { [file exists $event_lock] } { 
Events 5-17 
set f [open $event_lock r] 
gets $f previous_severity 
close $f 
} else { 
set previous_severity -1 
} 
# if event test state has changed, trigger the event at new severity 
if { $previous_severity != $severity } { 
orareportevent $event_name $oramsg(oraobject) $severity $message 
if { $severity == -1 } { 
rmfile $event_lock 
} else { 
set f [open $event_lock w] 
puts $f $severity 
close $f 
} 
} 
} 
#--------------------------------------------------------------------- 
# 
# Event Test Name: 
# /myevents/node/files/filefound 
# 
# Purpose: 
# Monitor for the existence of a particular file 
# The test triggers at warning level if the file exists, but 
# at critical level if the file is larger than the specified 
# value 
#
Event Categories and Types 
# Arguments: 
# - filename to look for 
# - critical file size 
# 
#--------------------------------------------------------------------- 
set event_name /myevents/node/files/filefound 
set file_name [lindex $argv 0] 
set critical_filesize [lindex $argv 1] 
if { [file exists $file_name] } { 
# if the file exists calculate its size in Kilobytes 
set file_size [expr [file size $file_name] / 1024] 
if { $file_size > $critical_filesize } { 
# if file is larger than the critical value, trigger as critical 
orareportevent1 $event_name 2 "Size: $file_size Kb" 
} else { 
# if file is smaller than the critical value, trigger as warning 
orareportevent1 $event_name 1 "Filesize: $file_size Kb" 
} 
} else { 
# if file in no longer there, clear the event 
orareportevent1 $event_name -1 "File does not exist" 
} 
Example 3: An Unsolicited Event Script that Accesses the Oracle Database This section 
contains an example of unsolicited event tests. In this case, the test evaluation 
involves connecting to an Oracle instance and performing some SQL against it. 
This example checks the size of a particular table in the database and triggers the 
event when a set threshold is crossed. There is a warning value and a critical value. 
The size of the table is measured by counting the number of its rows. 
#--------------------------------------------------------------------- 
# 
# Tcl Procedure 
# orareportevent1 
# 
# Purpose: 
# Trigger an unsolicited event only previous state is different 
# 
# Arguments: 
# - event_name: event test to trigger 
# - severity: new severity 
# - message: message to be attached to the event report 
5-18 Oracle Enterprise Manager Administrator’s Guide
Event Categories and Types 
# 
#--------------------------------------------------------------------- 
proc orareportevent1 {event_name severity message} { 
# define a ’lock’ that its contents define the previous event status 
# and figure out the event state during the previous execution 
global oramsg 
append event_lock [tempdir] "/" $oramsg(jobid) ".el" 
if { [file exists $event_lock] } { 
Events 5-19 
set f [open $event_lock r] 
gets $f previous_severity 
close $f 
} else { 
set previous_severity -1 
} 
# if event test state has changed, trigger the event at the new severity 
if { $previous_severity != $severity } { 
orareportevent $event_name $oramsg(oraobject) $severity $message 
if { $severity == -1 } { 
rmfile $event_lock 
} else { 
set f [open $event_lock w] 
puts $f $severity 
close $f 
} 
} 
} 
#--------------------------------------------------------------------- 
# 
# Event Test Name: 
# /myevents/database/space/tablesize 
# 
# Purpose: 
# Monitor the size of a particular database table 
# The test triggers at warning level when the warning threshold 
# is crossed and at critical level when the critical threshold 
# is crossed 
# 
# Arguments: 
# - table name 
# - critical threshold 
# - warning threshold 
# - username/password for conneting to target (optional) 
# 
#---------------------------------------------------------------------
Event Categories and Types 
set event_name /myevents/database/space/tablesize 
set table_name [lindex $argv 0] 
set critical_threshold [lindex $argv 1] 
set warning_threshold [lindex $argv 2] 
if { $argc == 4 } { 
set connect [format "%s@%s" [lindex $argv 3] $oramsg(oraobject)] 
} else { 
set connect [format "%s/%s@%s" $SMP_USER $SMP_PASSWORD $oramsg(oraobject)] 
} 
if {[catch {oralogon $connect} lda]} { 
append msg "Cannot connect to target." "n" $oramsg(errortxt) 
orafail $msg 
} 
if {[catch {oraopen $lda} cur]} { 
append msg "Cannot connect to target." "n" $oramsg(errortxt) 
oralogoff $lda 
orafail $msg 
} 
set sql [format "select count(*) from %s" $table_name] 
if {[catch {orasql $cur $sql}]} { 
append msg "Cannot execute SQL against the target." "n" $oramsg(errortxt) 
oraclose $cur 
oralogoff $lda 
orafail $msg 
} 
if {[catch {orafetch $cur} row]} { 
append msg "Cannot execute SQL against the target." "n" $oramsg(errortxt) 
oraclose $cur 
oralogoff $lda 
orafail $msg 
} 
set current_tablesize [lindex $row 0] 
if { $current_tablesize > $critical_threshold } { 
orareportevent1 $event_name 2 "Table:$table_name #rows:$current_tablesize" 
} elseif { $current_tablesize > $warning_threshold } { 
orareportevent1 $event_name 1 "Table:$table_name #rows:$current_tablesize" 
} else { 
orareportevent1 $event_name -1 "Table:$table_name #rows:$current_tablesize" 
5-20 Oracle Enterprise Manager Administrator’s Guide
Event Pane 
Events 5-21 
} 
A number of OraTcl verbs were used in this script. Refer to the Intelligent Agent 
User’s Guide for details on OraTcl verbs. Note that the preferred credentials, 
specified in the console, are available to the script writer via the SMP_USER and 
SMP_PASSWORD Tcl global variables. For jobs against a database, the values of 
those variables are set to the username and password specified as preferred 
credentials for that database. Notice that this script allows for an optional overwrite 
of the preferred credentials via an optional forth input argument. 
Unsolicited Event Caveats 
n To monitor for an unsolicited event against multiple targets on the same node 
(say the event above against multiple databases on the same node), you need to 
register for the unsolicited event multiple times so that you may have the 
flexibility of proper filtering. 
n Unsolicited Events cannot be used with Fixit Jobs. 
Event Pane 
The Event pane contains the following pages: 
n Alerts Page 
n History Page 
n Registered Page 
You can switch between the pages by clicking the tab of each page. The rows in any 
page can be sorted on any column by clicking the column heading. See Figure 5–1, 
"Event Menu and Pane" for an illustration of the Event pane. 
The Event pane can be hidden or shown by selecting Show/Hide Event Display in 
the Console View menu. You can also hide or show the pane by clicking on the flag 
icon in the Console toolbar.
Event Pane 
Figure 5–1 Event Menu and Pane 
Alerts Page 
The Alerts page displays event tests that have been triggered. 
Severity 
Severity of the event occurrence: critical (red flag), warning (yellow flag), clear 
(green flag), unknown (gray flag), or error state (yellow hexagon). 
Event 
Name of the event. 
Target 
Target where the event was triggered. 
Time/Date 
Time and date of the event occurrence. 
Assigned To 
Administrators assigned to work on the event occurrence. 
5-22 Oracle Enterprise Manager Administrator’s Guide
Event Pane 
Events 5-23 
Owner 
Administrator who owns the event. 
Viewing Alerts 
To view details of an event that has occurred, double-click on the event to display 
the Event Viewer property sheet. You can enter notes on the nature and progress of 
the event condition. Note: Comments entered into the log are viewable/editable by 
admins with the Modify permission. After you have reviewed an event, you can 
move it to the History page. See "Event Viewer" on page 5-27 for more information. 
History Page 
The Event History page displays a history of events that have occurred and have 
been moved to History by an administrator or cleared by an Intelligent Agent. The 
Event History page displays the same columns as the Alerts page. 
The History page is refreshed automatically each time you move between the 
History page and the Alerts or Registered page. However, to refresh the event 
history list while currently viewing the History pane, you must click the Refresh 
History icon located at the bottom left of the event History page. 
To clear all entries in the History page, click the Clear History icon located next to 
the Refresh History icon. 
Registered Page 
The Registered page displays the events that have been registered, or submitted, to 
monitor test conditions on any network objects. The Registered page contains the 
following information: 
Event 
Name of the event. 
Target 
Target where the event was monitored. 
Target Type 
Type of event destination: database, node, listener, web server, Concurrent Manager, 
Status 
Current registration status of the event: Registered, Registration Pending, 
De-Registration Pending, and Registration Failed.
Event Menu 
Owner 
Administrator who owns the event. 
Note: Under certain circumstances, an event will remain in a Registration 
Pending state. There are two probable causes: 
1. The Intelligent Agent on the node with which you are trying to register the 
event is down, or the node is not connected to the network. 
2. The node with which you want to register the event was defined manually 
(without using the Intelligent Agent). Connections to a manually defined node 
will not allow you to utilize remote management functionality such as Jobs or 
Events. You must first de-register any jobs or events against the node, remove 
the node from the Console navigator, and then rediscover the node while it is 
running a 7.3.4 or later Intelligent Agent. 
Event Menu 
The Event menu allows you to set up event and administrator information. This 
menu also provides options to register, track, and view specific events. Menu 
options are enabled or displayed according to the items selected in the Event pane. 
See Figure 5–1, "Event Menu and Pane" for an illustration of the Event menu. 
Note: When you register or remove an event, there is usually a slight delay while 
the Intelligent Agent processes the request. 
Create Event 
Displays the Event property sheet and allows you to create the definition of a new 
event. See "Creating, Modifying, and Registering an Event" on page 5-29 for more 
information. 
Edit Event 
Displays the definition of the selected event and allow you to edit the event 
permissions. 
Edit Event Occurrence 
Displays the definition of an existing event. See "Creating, Modifying, and 
Registering an Event" on page 5-29 for more information. 
Acknowledge 
Acknowledges the selected event in the Alerts page. When an event triggers, an 
entry is added to the Alerts page. In the severity column, a flag of the appropriate 
color is displayed along with a pair of eyeglasses. The eyeglasses also appear 
5-24 Oracle Enterprise Manager Administrator’s Guide
Event Menu 
whenever there is a change in the status of the event (e.g. from ‘warning’ to 
‘critical’) If you choose to "acknowledge" this event, then it means you are aware 
of this event occurrence and hence the eyeglasses will disappear. 
Copy to Library 
Copy the selected event in the Event pane to the Event Library. 
Remove Event 
Removes the selected event from the Event pane, effectively de-registering the 
event. This menu option only appears when an event test is selected in the 
Registered page. 
Move to History 
Moves the selected event in the Alerts page to Event History page of the Event 
pane. 
Refresh History 
Updates the History pane with the most recent entries. 
Clear History 
Clears the contents of the Event History page. 
Report Event History 
Saves the contents of the Event History page to a report. 
Report Registered Events 
Creates a report of currently registered events. 
Report Event Alerts 
Creates a report of the events that have triggered. 
Event Library 
Displays the Event Library dialog. See "Event Library Dialog" on page 5-26 for more 
information. 
Events 5-25 
Context-Sensitive Menus 
If you select an item in the Event pane with the right mouse button, the 
context-sensitive menu for that item appears. This menu is a subset of the Event 
menu plus selection-specific menu options.
Event Menu 
Event Library Dialog 
The Event Library dialog displays the events that have been created and saved to 
the Event Library. The advantage to using the Event Library is that both events and 
any associated target information can be stored, copied, or modified in the library 
for future use. When you create an event, you have the option of submitting, saving 
to the Event Library, or submitting and saving to the Event Library. 
This dialog contains the following information: 
Event 
Name of the event. 
Owner 
Administrator who created the event. 
Editing an Event 
Select an event and click Edit to display the property sheet for the event. The 
property sheet allows you to view and modify the events. Editing most event 
parameters can only be done via the Event Library dialog box. 
Oracle Event Tests 
Several predefined event tests have been installed with Oracle Enterprise Manager. 
These appear in the Tests page of the Event property sheet. You can add these tests 
to an event. The tests include: 
n Oracle DB UpDown: checks whether a database is up or down. 
n Oracle Host UpDown: checks whether a node is up or down. 
n Oracle Listener UpDown: checks whether a listener is up or down. 
n Data Gatherer UpDown: checks whether the data gatherer is up or down. 
Note: Only the UpDown tests are included with Oracle Enterprise Manager. 
Additional advanced event tests are available with the optional Oracle Diagnostics 
Pack. 
To view the specific tests assigned to an event, double-click on the event in the 
Event Library dialog and view the Test page of the Event property sheet. See the 
online help for Oracle events, "Oracle Event Tests" on page 5-40, or the Diagnostic 
Pack documentation for information on Oracle events and their parameters. 
5-26 Oracle Enterprise Manager Administrator’s Guide
Event Viewer 
Events 5-27 
Event Viewer 
The Event Viewer property sheet displays details on a selected event in the History 
or Alerts page. When an event triggers, you select the triggered event and bring it 
up in the Event Viewer. The Event Viewer contains information on why the event 
triggered. You can also assign the event to the a particular administrator and put 
instructions for other administrators via the Log page. 
You can enter optional comments in the Log page, which is good way to share 
information about an event with other administrators. Once cleared, events are 
automatically moved to the History page. The pages of the Event Viewer include: 
n General 
n Log 
n Notification Details 
General 
The Event Viewer General page displays statistics and owner information on a 
selected event. You can display the property sheet for the event with the Show 
Event Definition option. The following statistics are displayed on the General page: 
Target 
Service (database, node, etc.) where the event triggered. 
Target Type 
Type of service, such as database, listener, or node. 
Last Updated 
Time of last update. 
Owner 
Administrator that created the event. 
Assigned To 
List of administrators that are receiving notifications for this event. 
Test Name 
Event test that was evaluated. 
Severity 
Severity of the event occurrence: critical, warning, clear, unknown, or error..
Event Viewer 
Time/Date 
Time and date of the event occurrence. 
Message 
Message generated from the alert. You may position your cursor above the message 
to see it displayed as balloon text. 
Log 
The Event Viewer Log page displays an entry whenever an event is moved to 
history. An event can be moved manually with the Move to History menu option or 
automatically when the severity of the event changes. 
The Log page also allows comments to be entered on a selected event. Any 
administrator with permissions to modify the event can add comments in this page. 
You enter comments in the text box and select the Apply or OK button to add the 
comment. 
The information displayed in the Log page includes: 
Type Entry 
Text input field allowing you to add comments. 
Entry 
Comment that has been entered for this event. 
Author 
Administrator that entered the comment. 
Date/Time 
The date and time when the comment was entered. 
Notification Details 
The Event Viewer Notification Details displays details of email and paging 
notifications sent for a selected event. The information displayed in Details page 
includes: 
Severity 
The severity flag associated with the event occurrence. 
Administrator 
Administrator that was notified. 
5-28 Oracle Enterprise Manager Administrator’s Guide
Creating, Modifying, and Registering an Event 
Date/Time 
The date and time of the notification. 
Method 
Method of notification: E-mail or page. 
Notification Status 
Status of the notification, indicating whether the notification was sent, is pending, 
or has failed. 
Message 
If the notification failed, this message indicates the reason for notification failure. 
Events 5-29 
Creating, Modifying, and Registering an Event 
Events include the destination type and the event information that you want to 
monitor. Events can consist of multiple event tests. To create or modify an event: 
1. Choose the Create Event option from the Event menu to display the Event 
property sheet. (you can also display the Event property sheet by opening an 
event from the Event Library dialog.) 
2. Complete or modify the fields in the General, Parameter, and Permissions pages 
of the property sheet to create a new event. If you modify an event that has 
been registered, those changes are not used by the registered event. 
3. When you have completed the Event property sheet: 
a. Choose Submit, to register the event against the selected destinations. The 
new event is not saved to the Event Library. 
b. Choose Add to the Library (or Save to Library if editing an event from the 
Library) to save the event to the Event Library. The event will not be 
submitted to the target destinations at this time. The new event appears in 
the Event Library dialog. 
c. Choose Submit and Add to Library (or Submit and Save to Library) to 
submit the event to the selected destinations and save the event to the 
Event Library. The new event appears in the Event Library dialog. 
If you registered an event, the Intelligent Agent for a destination processes the event 
and the event appears in the Registered page of the Event pane. Each destination 
service is listed separately with the event.
Creating, Modifying, and Registering an Event 
Note: There is usually a slight delay between the time the event is registered and 
the actual notification by the Intelligent Agent. 
When threshold values are exceeded for the tests in an event, the event appears in 
the Alerts page of the Event pane. This notification changes the color of the severity 
flag for the event in the Alerts page. If the destination database icon is displayed in 
the Group pane, the flag on the icon changes color. The colors and their meaning 
are: 
n Unknown (gray flag) 
n Event cleared (green flag) 
n Warning (yellow flag) 
n Alert (red flag) 
n Error (yellow hexagon) 
Cases where an event notification is Unknown (gray flag) indicate the target or 
node where the event is registered is unavailable. 
Warning: Do not register an UpDown event (included in the Oracle DB Fault 
event) against the database or node where the Repository schema is stored. If the 
database containing Repository goes down, the Management Server also shuts 
down. Hence, the Intelligent Agent cannot inform the Management Server that the 
database is down. 
The property sheet for creating a new event is the same as the property sheet for 
modifying an event, except that the event name field is read-only. See Figure 5–2, 
"Event General Page" for an illustration of the Event property sheet. 
See "Event Categories and Types" on page 5-10 for more information. 
Modifying a Registered Event 
To modify a registered event, perform the following steps: 
1. If you need to modify any of the administrator permissions for the event, 
including enabling or disabling notifypermissions, then you can select the 
Event from the Registered pane, make the modifications, then click "OK" to 
accept the changes. 
If the monitored destinations for the event specify multiple targets, e.g. 
databases A, B, C, then any changes made to the permissions for the Event will 
apply to all targets, A, B and C. 
5-30 Oracle Enterprise Manager Administrator’s Guide
Creating, Modifying, and Registering an Event 
2. If you need to modify any other event parameter (destination list, parameter 
values, etc). then first make a copy of the event to the library if you haven’t 
already done so. The "Copy to Library" is an option available from the 
right-mouse context menu of the registered event. Next, de-register the 
Event(s) you’d like to modify. Then, go to the Event library, and select and edit 
the event. Finally ’Submit’ the event for registration. 
Events 5-31 
Event General Page 
On the General page, you determine the event name, destination type, description, 
fixit job, polling frequency, and whether this event should monitor third-party 
events. 
Figure 5–2 Event General Page 
Event Name: 
Enter an event name. 
Destination Type: 
Select the destination type you want to monitor from the pull-down list. The types 
include Database, Listener, Node, or other service that is integrated into the 
Console.
Creating, Modifying, and Registering an Event 
If the selected Destination Type is "Node", then a second pull-down list of operating 
systems will appear. If you choose ‘All’, then event tests that apply to all types of 
nodes, i.e. operating systems, will be available. If you choose a particular operating 
system, (e.g. Solaris), then additional operating-system specific event tests will be 
available. 
In general, the selection of the Destination Type determines the list of Available 
Destinations. If your choose "Node" and a particular operating system, such as 
Solaris, then the list of available destinations will show all Solaris nodes that are 
running at least an 8.1.7 Intelligent Agent. Any Solaris nodes that use older agents 
will not be shown. 
Event Description: 
Enter a description or comment for the event 
Fixit Job 
A fixit job is designed to correct a problem. For example, you may want the 
Intelligent Agent to run a job to restart a database when the database instance has 
shut down unexpectedly. Fixit jobs have been created with the Job system and have 
been designated as fixit jobs. The jobs must be submitted and running on the same 
destination that the event is set on. You must select destinations to make fixit jobs 
available in the pull-down list. See "General Page" on page 4-14 for more 
information. 
Fixit job options are: 
n To choose a fixit job, select an existing fixit job from the pull-down list. 
n Select <None> if you do not want to use a fixit job. 
To turn off a fixit job after an event has been registered, you can copy the registered 
event to Event Library, remove the event registration, edit the event from the 
Library to remove the fixit job, and re-submit the event for registration. 
Note: Each event must use a unique fixit job on each destination where the event 
is registered. Also, when a single Intelligent Agent is monitoring multiple databases 
at a destination, create a separate event and fixit job for each database. 
Frequency 
Determine the frequency that you want the test to be evaluated on the selected 
destinations. The frequency determines how often the event condition is checked. 
For example, if the frequency is set to 60 seconds, the event condition is checked 
every 60 seconds. The frequency should not be less than 60 seconds. To set the 
frequency: 
5-32 Oracle Enterprise Manager Administrator’s Guide
Creating, Modifying, and Registering an Event 
n Enter a value in the frequency field or select a value from the pull-down list. 
n Select the interval units from the pull-down list. 
Consider carefully the value for frequency. Some event evaluations may take more 
time, particularly if there are large numbers of objects to be monitored. The 
following list covers some of the potentially longer-running database event tests: 
Events 5-33 
n Continued Row* 
n Index Rebuild* 
n Chunk Small 
n Fast Segment Growth 
n Maximum Extents 
n Multiple Extents 
n Tablespace Full 
n SnapShot Log Full 
* Continued Row and Index Rebuild are resource expensive because they perform 
an ANALYZE on the segments they monitor. 
See "Event Notifications" on page 5-7 for details on the notification frequency. 
Enable Unsolicited Events 
Check this box to monitor unsolicited events. See "Unsolicited Event Tests" on page 
5-12 for more information. 
Event Tests Page 
On the Tests page, you determine the event tests that you want to perform. Event 
test are arranged hierarchically in a tree list for ease of viewing and selection. As 
with the Console Navigator, you can expand and compress entries in the tree list.
Creating, Modifying, and Registering an Event 
Figure 5–3 Event Tests Page 
Available Tests: 
Select the event tests in the list you want to perform in this event, then click on the 
<< (Add) button to move the events to the Selected Events list. 
Selected Tests: 
Select the event tests in the list you want to remove from this event, then click on 
the >> (Remove) button. 
Event Parameters Page 
The parameter settings for the selected event tests are entered in the Parameters 
page of the Event property sheet. The settings and types of parameters vary 
according to the event test selected. Some event tests do not have parameters. See 
the online help for Oracle events and "Oracle Event Tests" on page 5-40 for 
information on tests and their parameters. 
5-34 Oracle Enterprise Manager Administrator’s Guide
Creating, Modifying, and Registering an Event 
Events 5-35 
Figure 5–4 Event Parameters Page 
Parameters 
The parameters for an event are displayed when the event is selected in the Selected 
Tests list. The parameters vary according to the event selected. Some events do not 
have parameters. 
You can accept the default values or change the values for the parameters. To enter 
parameter values for an event, you can enter a value directly into a parameter field. 
Filtering 
Filtering is used in events such as Chunk Small and Maximum Extents. Examples of 
filters are = ’SYSTEM’, LIKE ’%SMP%’, and IN (’SYSTEM’, ’TOOLS’). Note 
that the quotes are single quotes. Use uppercase to match the case of the database 
object names. If you enter a filter value that does not select any objects or is an 
incorrect value, the event fails. 
Event Permissions Page 
Determine the permissions that you want to assign to the event with the 
Permissions Page. This allows other administrators to view or modify the event. 
Notifications are also assigned with this page.
Creating, Modifying, and Registering an Event 
The levels of permission that you can assign to an Enterprise Manager 
administrator are: 
None 
Does not allow the administrator to view this event anywhere. 
View 
Allows the administrator to view the event, inspect event properties, and receive 
notifications. 
Modify 
Allows the administrator to modify the event’s log (See "Event Viewer" on page 
5-27), and edit the event's properties except those reserved for Full permission. 
Full 
Allows the administrator to delete the event, modify permissions for other 
administrators, and change the ownership of the event. 
Notify 
Allows the administrator to receive enhanced event notifications on the objects 
through paging or email. Other notifications will be routed to that particular 
administrator’s Console. Notify permission cannot be assigned if the 
administrator's permission level is set to None. 
Any permissions assigned on this page supersede any administrator default 
permissions. See "Permissions" on page 1-23 for more information. Also, the 
administrator’s notification schedule must be set up in order for them to receive the 
E-mail/page notification. 
Enable SNMP Notifications 
When checked, permits external notification (SNMP traps) for third-party event 
tests at the destination where the Intelligent Agent is located. 
Show Notification Schedule 
Show Notification Schedule displays the notification schedule for the event. The 
schedule shown on this page is a combined schedule for all administrators that 
have been given "Notify" privileges for this event. To view administrators assigned 
to a particular time slot, use the right mouse button to call up the context-sensitive 
menu, choose the "Remove Recipient" option, and view the list of administrators. To 
add or remove notifications for an administrator, display the context menu (press 
the right mouse button) on any time block. The context menu provides options for 
adding and removing recipients of the notifications. 
5-36 Oracle Enterprise Manager Administrator’s Guide
Creating, Modifying, and Registering an Event 
Events 5-37 
Event Progress Page 
The Event Progress page displays when you edit an event from the Registered page 
of the Events pane. This page provides the current registration status for the event 
selected: Registered, Registration Failed, or Registration Pending. In addition, the 
destination and time and date when registration was attempted is shown. 
When the Progress page is displayed, it shows only the status for the selected event. 
If the selected event is registered, or had been submitted for registration on other 
destinations, you can view the status of this event for those destinations by selecting 
the desired target from the Destination pull-down list. The status of the event 
displays for that destination. To view the status of this event for all destinations 
simultaneously, select <All>. 
The following options are available on the Progress page: 
Destination (pull-down list) 
Select the destination of the event you want to view from the pull-down list. Select 
<All> for all destinations for which this event has either been registered or failed to 
be registered. 
Status 
Status for the event: Registered, Registration Pending, or Registration Failed. 
Destination 
Network destination for the event. 
Date/Time 
Date and Time the event was submitted for registration. 
Show Output 
Displays the Event Status Message dialog. This button is active only when you have 
selected a failed event registration. Selecting this option will allow you to view the 
reasons for the failure. 
Save List 
Saves the contents of the list to a text file. 
Example: Creating and Registering an Event 
In the following example, a new event for monitoring extents in a database is 
created and registered at several databases. When creating an event, the General, 
Tests, Parameters, and Permissions Pages are completed to define the event. You
Creating, Modifying, and Registering an Event 
need to register, or submit, an event to run event tests on specific destinations in the 
network environment. 
The following example is used for illustrative purposes. When creating actual 
events, you must enter accurate values for the polling frequency, and parameter 
values. 
1. To create a new event, select Create Event from the Event Menu to display the 
General Page of the Event property sheet. 
2. Enter an event name in the Event Name field, such as Maximum Extents. 
Provide a descriptive name so the event can be easily identified from the Event 
pane. 
3. Enter a brief description of and comments about the event in the Description 
field. The event in this example will monitor Maximum Extents. This event is 
only available with the Oracle Diagnostics Pack. 
4. Select Database from the Destination Type pull-down list. 
5. Keep the frequency at 60 seconds. 
6. Do not select a fixit job (if any are available). These are jobs that have been 
created with the Job system and have been designated as fixit jobs. 
7. Select a database from the Available Destinations list, then click on the << (Add) 
button. The database is moved to the Selected Destinations list and will be 
monitored for the events in the event. 
8. Repeat the previous step for several additional databases. 
9. Click on the Tests page tab to display the Tests page. 
10. Select the Maximum Extents event test. This test checks the number of available 
extents for table, index, cluster, or rollback segments. Because this test accesses 
system tables, you must set up Administrator Preferred Credentials with an 
administrator that has system privileges. See "Preferred Credentials" on page 
1-25 for more information. 
Note: The Maximum Extents event test is only available with the 
optional Diagnostics Pack. The standard Up/Down event tests 
provided with Enterprise Manager do not require parameter 
settings. 
5-38 Oracle Enterprise Manager Administrator’s Guide
Creating, Modifying, and Registering an Event 
11. Click on the << (Add) button. The event test is moved to the Selected Tests list 
Events 5-39 
and will be added to the event. 
12. Click on the Parameters page tab to display that page. If you had selected 
several tests, you would need to select a specific test in the Selected Tests list to 
display the Parameters for the event test. 
13. Click on Warning threshold in the scrolling list, to change the value of the 
parameter. Enter 3 in the text field. 
14. Click on Alert threshold in the scrolling list, to change the value of the 
parameter. Enter 2 in the text field. 
15. Do not change the other parameters. Note that the * in the Tablespace name, 
Segment name, and Segment type parameter fields signifies all existing values. 
To monitor a specific tablespace, such as USERS, you would enter = ’USERS’ in 
the Tablespace name field. 
16. Click on the Permissions page tab to display that page. Assign permissions to 
all administrators to allow them to view the event and receive notifications. 
17. After you have completed the event property sheet, select the Submit and Add 
to the Library button at the bottom of the property sheet to submit the event to 
the selected destinations. 
18. If you want to modify the event, you can edit this event in Event Library dialog. 
In order for new values to affect event monitoring, you need to de-register and 
then re-register the event. 
When an event is submitted, each destination is validated and the Intelligent Agent 
for each destination processes the event. If the registration is successful, the event 
appears in the Registered page of the Event pane. Each destination database is listed 
separately with the event. 
If an event condition occurs or threshold values are exceeded for an event test, a 
notification is sent to the Alerts page of the Console Event pane. If administrators 
have been selected to be notified by email or paging, an email or page is sent. The 
event notification changes the color of the severity flag for the event in the Alerts 
page. If the destination database icon is displayed in the Group pane, the flag on the 
icon changes color. The colors and their meaning are: 
n Unknown (gray flag) 
n Cleared (green flag) 
n Warning (yellow flag) 
n Critical (red flag)
Oracle Event Tests 
n Error ( yellow hexagon) 
After an event condition is fixed, the event is cleared automatically. There are four 
event tests that are exceptions to this rule: Alert, Data Block Corruption, Session 
Terminated, Archiver Hung. Since there is no way to determine automatically that 
these event conditions have been resolved, these events must be manually cleared. 
Administrator Event Notification 
Oracle Enterprise Manager allows you to specify administrators that are notified 
when a particular event condition occurs. Each administrator can be associated with 
an email ID and/or a pager number. When using a paging service or email 
notification, each administrator can be assigned responsibility for specific systems 
at specific days and times. 
For more information on setting up Oracle Enterprise Manager administrators, see 
"Managing Enterprise Manager Administrators" on page 1-8. 
Oracle Event Tests 
This section lists the Event system event tests with their parameters and return 
values. See "Event Parameters Page" on page 5-34 for information on entering 
parameter values. A list of event tests with numeric pager event Ids is also 
provided. See "Numeric Pager Job/Event Ids" on page 5-42 for more information. 
Event tests are specified for database, listener, and node services. The event tests are 
also divided into fault, space, resource, and performance management categories. 
Only the UpDown event tests are included with Oracle Enterprise Manager. 
Additional advanced event tests are available with the optional Oracle Diagnostics 
Pack. 
The event test scripts are written in the Tool Command Language (Tcl) enhanced 
with Oracle Tcl commands (OraTcl). For information on using Tcl and OraTcl to 
write event scripts, see Oracle Intelligent Agent User’s Guide. 
Some of the event tests require special tables in the database. For example, the 
catblock.sql script needs to be run to use the User Blocks event test. 
Some of the database event tests, such as Chain Row, require access to system tables 
and require additional permissions. You need to set up preferred credentials for the 
monitored database with an administrator that has system privileges. See 
"Enterprise Manager Monitor Role" on page 5-5 and "Preferred Credentials" on page 
1-25 for more information. 
5-40 Oracle Enterprise Manager Administrator’s Guide
Oracle Event Tests 
Note: If an Up/Down event test (Database Up/down, Listener 
Up/Down) has been registered on a node, then the UpDown Node 
event test is implicitly registered and is triggered when the 
Intelligent Agent is down, or when the Management Server looses 
contact with the node. 
Events 5-41 
Database Fault Management Event Tests 
This category of event test tracks severe problems that require immediate attention. 
UpDown (Database) 
This event test checks whether the database being monitored is running. If this 
event test is triggered, other database events are not ignored. 
Parameters 
none 
Action 
The Startup Database job task can be set up as a fixit job for automatically correcting 
the problem. 
Note: If the listener serving a database is down, this event test may be triggered 
because the Intelligent Agent uses the listener to communicate with the database. 
Node Fault Management Events 
This category of events monitors for catastrophic conditions on the system. 
Immediate action needs to be taken by the administrator. 
UpDown (Node) 
This event checks whether the Intelligent Agent on a node can be accessed from the 
Console via periodic "heartbeating" between the Management Server and the 
Intelligent Agent. Since this event does not actually register with the Intelligent 
Agent, no fixit jobs can be associated with it. If the defaults are accepted, this event 
will trigger within five minutes of the Intelligent Agent becoming inaccessible and 
will clear within three minutes of the Intelligent Agent becoming accessible again. 
Parameters 
none
Oracle Event Tests 
Listener Fault Management Events 
This category of events monitors for catastrophic conditions on the system. 
Immediate action needs to be taken by the administrator. 
SQL*Net UpDown (Listener) 
This event checks whether the listener on the node being monitored is available. 
Parameters 
none 
Action 
The Startup Listener job task can be set up as a fixit job for automatically correcting 
the problem. 
Data Gatherer Fault Management Events 
The Oracle Data Gatherer Alert and UpDown events are both Fault Management 
events for the node destination type. This category of events monitors for 
catastrophic conditions on the system. Immediate action needs to be taken by the 
administrator. 
UpDown (Data Gatherer) 
This event checks whether the Intelligent Agent data gathering service on a node 
can be accessed from the Console. If the Intelligent Agent data gathering service is 
down, this event is triggered. 
Parameters 
none 
Numeric Pager Job/Event Ids 
The Event Management System provides paging services that notify an 
administrator with a page when an event has occurred. Alphanumeric pagers 
provide a brief text message identifying the event. Numeric pagers provide the 
numeric pager event Ids to identify the event. 
For job notifications, you will receive a 6 digit number. The first 3 digits indicate the 
job-id. The last 3 digits indicate job status. 
For event notifications you will receive the event ID with the status code. 
5-42 Oracle Enterprise Manager Administrator’s Guide
Event System Features and Requirements 
For a complete list of pager job/event IDs, see "Paging Status Codes for Numeric 
Pages" on page 1-18 
Events 5-43 
General Event System Troubleshooting Procedures 
The following procedures will assist you and/or Oracle Support if problems are 
encountered with the Event subsystem. 
Obtaining Enterprise Manager Repository Status 
If you need to contact Oracle Support, you must provide specific information on the 
status of your Oracle Enterprise Manager repository. To assist you, a SQL script has 
been provided that extracts pertinent Repository data and generates a debug log 
file. 
To generate the log file, perform the following procedure: 
1. Save oms.log.* for every Management Server connected to the repository. 
The log files are, by default, located in 
$ORACLE_HOME/sysman/log. 
2. Log on as the repository user and connect to the repository using SQL*Plus. 
For example: 
connect <repository name>/<repository password> 
3. Run the following SQL script: 
@$ORACLE_HOME/sysman/admin/evtdbg.sql 
4. This SQL script will generate a file called evtdbg.log in the directory where 
Server Manager or SQL*Plus is invoked. 
5. Submit the Management Server log files along with evtdbg.log to Oracle 
Support. 
Note: The size of the evtdbg.log file can be quite large. 
Event System Features and Requirements 
Because the Enterprise Manager framework is a three-tier system that can manage a 
heterogeneous environment, it is important to keep in mind various software
Event System Features and Requirements 
version requirements necessary for proper event system operation. The following 
table lists event system features and associated software version requirements. 
Table 5–2 Event Features and Their Requirements 
Feature Name Description 
Enterprise 
Manager 
Version 
5-44 Oracle Enterprise Manager Administrator’s Guide 
Required 
Agent 
Management 
Server/Console 
Required 
Works 
In 
Browser 
Advanced Events All events for databases, 
nodes, listeners. See 
Enterprise Manager online 
help for more information. 
Diagnostics 
Pack 1.5.5 and 
highe.r 
All supported 
agents, latest 
recommended 
For EM 2.x, the 
Management 
Server and 
Console that 
corresponds with 
that Pack 
yes 
Event Handler Component that allows you 
to log event information or 
execute custom commands 
in response to an event 
occurrence. See 
Appendix A, "Enterprise 
Manager Event Handler" 
for more information 
2.0.4 and 
higher/ beta 
n/a 2.0.4 OMS n/a 
2.1 and higher 
/ production 
n/a 2.1 OMS n/a 
Improved Node Up/Down 
Monitoring 
Enhancement to the Node 
Up/Down event test. 
Provides more information 
on whether or not the node 
is down, the agent is down, 
etc. 
2.2 and higher all supported 2.2 and higher yes 
User-Defined SQL Test Allows you to write your 
own custom SQL to monitor 
database events 
Diagnostics 
Pack 2.1 and 
higher 
8.1.6 and 
higher 
2.1 and higher yes 
Enhanced monitoring for 
target subcomponents 
"For events whose targets 
involve multiple 
subcomponents (e.g. 
monitor tablespace full for 
ALL tablespaces), 
information on which 
subcomponent is in alarm is 
now provided 
"2.2 and higher 8.1.7 and 
higher 
2.2 and higher yes 
Context sensitive help for 
Event tests 
"In the Parameters tab of the 
Event dialog, invoking 
""Help"" will bring up 
information pertinent to the 
current selected event test 
"2.2 and higher n/a 2.2 and higher yes
Event System Features and Requirements 
Events 5-45 
Events with synonymous 
event tests 
"Events can be created that 
have more than one of the 
same event test (e.g. a 
""Tablespace Full"" test for 
""SYSTEM"", another 
""Tablespace Full"" event test 
for ""USER"") 
"2.2 and higher all supported 
by EM 2.2 
2.2. and higher yes 
Job and Events Notification 
filters 
n Filters that apply to 
both paging & email 
Allows you to filter pages & 
emails based on job and 
event status 
2.1 all agents 
supported by 
EM 2.1 
2.1 yes 
n Different filters for 
paging & email 
Allows separate filters for 
pages & emails based on job 
and event status 
2.2 and higher all agents 
supported by 
EM 2.2 
2.2 and higher yes 
Customization for paging 
& email messages 
Allows you to customize the 
messages for email and 
pages 
Diagnostics 
Pack 2.2. and 
higher 
all agents 
supported by 
EM 2.2 
2.2 and higher yes 
Advanced O/S event tests New event tests that 
monitor operating system 
specific metrics 
2.2 and higher 8.1.7 and 
higher 
2.2 and higher yes 
Concurrent Manager 
Events 
Events to monitor error 
conditions against the 
Oracle Applications 
Concurrent Processing 
Server 
2.0.4 and 
higher 
8.1.5 and 
higher 
2.0.4 and higher yes 
Forms Server Events Events to monitor error 
conditions against the 
Oracle Developer Forms 
Server 
2.0.4 and 
higher (2.0.4 
console needs 
Forms 
Extensions. 
8.0.6 and 
higher 
(requires 
Forms Agent 
Extensions. 
2.0.4 and higher 
(2.0.4 console 
needs Forms 
Extensions. 
yes 
Program Filtering in 
Concurrent Manager 
Events 
Allows you to monitor 
particular Oracle 
Applications Concurrent 
Programs. Also allows you 
to exclude particular 
Concurrent Programs from 
being monitored. 
2.2 and higher 8.1.7 and 
higher 
2.2 and higher yes 
Table 5–2 Event Features and Their Requirements 
Feature Name Description 
Enterprise 
Manager 
Version 
Required 
Agent 
Management 
Server/Console 
Required 
Works 
In 
Browser
Event System Features and Requirements 
5-46 Oracle Enterprise Manager Administrator’s Guide
Part II 
The Database Administration Tools
A85248
6 
DBA Management Pack 
The primary database administration components of Oracle Enterprise Manager are 
contained in the DBA Management Pack, which is a suite of database 
administration tools and wizards bundled with Oracle Enterprise Manager. This 
functionality can be accessed with the new DBA Studio tool or launched separately 
from the Oracle Enterprise Manager Console or operating system. DBA 
Management Pack features can be used to perform most of your database 
administration tasks, and support all versions of Oracle databases. 
DBA Studio or individual DBA Management Pack tools can be launched by either 
connecting to the Oracle Management Server using Oracle Enterprise Manager’s 
three-tier framework, or by connecting directly to a database. 
DBA Management Pack includes the following functionality: 
DBA Management Pack 6-1 
n Instance Management 
n Schema Management 
n Security Management 
n Storage Management 
n Replication Management 
n JServer Management 
n Cache Management 
n SQL*Plus Worksheet 
With this functionality you can: 
n Complete database administration operations quickly and conveniently using a 
mouse rather than manually entering SQL commands
DBA Studio 
n Concurrently perform multiple tasks in multiple Oracle Enterprise Manager 
windows 
n Administer multiple databases simultaneously 
n Perform database administration tasks from a central location for both local and 
remote databases running on any Oracle platform in any location worldwide 
DBA Management Pack also includes wizards for assisting with such tasks as 
importing, exporting, loading, backing up, and recovering data. 
This chapter contains the following sections: 
DBA Studio 
Topic See Page 
DBA Studio 6-2 
Common Features of DBA Management Pack 
Functionality 
DBA Management Pack features can now be accessed from the new DBA Studio, as 
well as from the Oracle Enterprise Manager Console or operating system. DBA 
Studio is an interface from which all DBA Management Pack features can be 
accessed (with the exception of SQL*Plus Worksheet) and can either be run with a 
connection to an Oracle Management Server, which utilizes Oracle Enterprise 
Manager’s three-tier framework, or connected directly to a database. 
With DBA Studio, you can manage database security, schemas, instances, and 
storage from a unified tree view without launching separate tools. This integrated 
access to DBA functionality simplifies switching between DBA tasks and provides 
an accurate view of database configuration status. 
DBA Studio can be launched from the operating system, from the Enterprise 
Manager Console, or from a browser. 
6-2 Oracle Enterprise Manager Administrator’s Guide 
6-3 
DBA Management Pack Functionality and 
Wizards 
6-5
Common Features of DBA Management Pack Functionality 
Common Features of DBA Management Pack Functionality 
This section discusses the common features shared by the different tools in DBA 
Management Pack. 
DBA Management Pack 6-3 
Tree Views and Property Sheets 
Most DBA tools display a tree view of connected databases, which can be expanded 
to show subordinate objects. When you select a database or object in the tree, a 
property sheet appears on the right where you can view or edit database properties. 
Wizards also display tree views and property sheets as necessary. 
Multi-Column Lists 
When you select a folder in a tree list, a multi-column list of all the folder’s objects 
appears on the right side of the window, providing a quick summary of information 
about each object in the selected folder. 
Database Version Awareness 
All DBA Management Pack tools and wizards are aware of the features that are 
available in each database version. When you select a database in a tree view, the 
tool only displays objects and properties that are enabled in that database version. 
Database Reports 
You can extract information from the database such as object definitions, object 
dependencies, database configuration, or reports, including custom SQL queries, 
and save it in a variety of formats (text, HTML, or comma-separated-values). 
Logging of Database Changes 
You can now log all Data Definition Language (DDL) and Data Manipulation 
Language (DML) changes made by an application when connected to a database. 
Showing Object DDL 
Data Definition Language (DDL) commands set up the data such as creating and 
altering databases and tables. In DBA Studio, you can display the Data Definition 
DDL for objects.
Common Features of DBA Management Pack Functionality 
Show SQL 
Though one of the benefits of DBA Management Pack is that DBA tasks can be 
performed without manually entering SQL, you do have the option of viewing the 
SQL code generated for you. By selecting Show SQL, you can review this code 
before implementing any changes, as well as copy and paste it into your own SQL 
scripts if you wish. 
Show Dependencies 
Database object dependencies and dependents can be viewed by right-mouse 
clicking an object in the tree view and choosing Show Dependencies. Dependencies 
show what the selected object depends on, such as the tablespace location and the 
owner of the selected object. Dependents rely on the selected object, such as which 
indexes will be dropped and which synonyms will be affected if you drop the 
selected object. 
Right-Mouse Commands 
With DBA Management Pack, you can right-mouse click any folder or object in a 
tree list to perform administrative tasks. Right-mouse clicking an object shows all 
the tasks that can be performed on the object, such as connecting to or 
disconnecting from the database, creating users, adding or removing profiles, 
assigning privileges, showing dependencies, and bringing up wizards. 
Font Settings 
DBA Studio provides you the option of changing the font settings for its graphical 
interface. You can apply a different font or different font size, apply or remove the 
bold style, apply or remove italics style, or restore the application’s default font. 
Advanced Mode 
DBA Management Pack features can be run in Advanced Mode, which displays 
additional tabbed pages in property sheets from which a tool’s advanced database 
administration features can be accessed. 
6-4 Oracle Enterprise Manager Administrator’s Guide
DBA Management Pack Functionality and Wizards 
DBA Management Pack 6-5 
DBA Management Pack Functionality and Wizards 
This section describes DBA Management Pack’s features and wizards. 
DBA Studio Tool Task See Page 
Instance Management Manages instances and sessions 6-6 
Schema Management Manages schema objects 6-10 
Security Management Manages security parameters 6-13 
Storage Management Manages database storage 6-16 
Replication Management Enables an administrator to quickly 
set up, configure, and manage an 
Oracle replication environment 
6-18 
JServer Management Enables you to manage the 
namespace, browse CORBA and 
EJB components published in the 
namespace, change permissions on 
the published components, and 
execute the main() method in 
schema-resident Java classes and 
view the output. 
6-19 
Cache Management Enables you to set up, manage, and 
monitor caches created by Oracle8i 
Cache. 
6-19 
SQL*Plus Worksheet Executes SQL and PL/SQL 
commands 
6-20 
Wizards Assist with importing, exporting, 
loading, backing up, and recovering 
data, as well as analyzing and 
creating tables and views 
6-20
DBA Management Pack Functionality and Wizards 
Instance Management 
Instance Management functionality helps you manage database instances and 
sessions in your Oracle environment. With Instance Management features you can: 
n Start up and shut down a database 
n View and edit the values of initialization parameters 
n View current session SQL and the explain plan 
n Manage stored configurations (when connected to the Oracle Management 
Server) 
n Manage resource allocations (with Oracle8i) 
n Manage users’ sessions 
n Monitor long running operations (with Oracle8i) 
When you expand the Instance node under the database in the tree view, the 
following list of objects and folders appears: 
n Database 
n Stored Configurations (only when connected to Oracle Management Server) 
n Sessions 
n In-Doubt Transactions 
n Resource Consumer Groups (with Oracle8i) 
n Resource Plans (with Oracle8i) 
n Resource Plan Schedule (with Oracle8i Release 2) 
6-6 Oracle Enterprise Manager Administrator’s Guide
DBA Management Pack Functionality and Wizards 
DBA Management Pack 6-7 
Figure 6–1 Instance Management Tree 
Database Operations 
When you select the Database node under Instance, a property sheet of tabbed 
pages appears on the right for viewing information about the database instance and 
editing database properties. In this property sheet, the following information can be 
viewed and/or edited: 
n Status of the database, including the database version and any installed options, 
and allows you to start up and shut down a database 
n Memory usage of the current database 
n Current state of redo log archival 
n Resource management (with Oracle8i)
DBA Management Pack Functionality and Wizards 
Figure 6–2 Instance Management Window 
Stored Configurations 
When the database is connected to the Oracle Management Server, the Stored 
Configurations folder appears in the tree view with which you can create multiple 
database start-up configurations without the need to track initialization parameter 
files (INIT<SID>.ORA). Stored configurations exist in the Oracle Enterprise 
Manager repository (they are not external files) and can be created, edited, and 
deleted. You can also add and delete parameters and export a configuration to a file. 
Sessions 
The Sessions folder lists all users connected to the discovered database. When you 
select a user in the list, the Sessions property sheet appears with which you can edit 
user properties, view information about the status of each user, view current SQL or 
6-8 Oracle Enterprise Manager Administrator’s Guide
DBA Management Pack Functionality and Wizards 
the last run SQL for the database session, and view the database session explain 
plan. 
In-Doubt Transactions 
The In-Doubt Transactions folder contains information about distributed 
transactions that failed in the PREPARED state. You can sort the Transactions list on 
each of the columns by clicking on the column heading. 
The In-Doubt Transactions property sheet displays information about distributed 
transactions in which a commit was interrupted by a system, network, or any 
failure resulting from external factors. 
Resource Consumer Groups 
The Resource Consumer Groups folder lists sets of users who have similar resource 
usage requirements. When you select a resource consumer group object in the 
folder, a property sheet appears in which you can view or specify properties and 
assign or remove users from the resource consumer group. 
Resource Plans 
The Resource Plans folder lists objects that represent resource plans, which are ways 
of allocating resources among consumer groups. Resource plans contain directives 
that specify the resources to be given to each group and can be specified in 
hierarchical fashion using subplans. 
The Resource Plans property sheet, which appears when you select an object 
representing a Resource Plan, allows you to choose available groups/subplans to 
include in the resource plan, select the percentage of CPU resources allocated to a 
group, and then activate the plan. You can also view the degree of parallelism for 
each consumer group. 
Resource Plan Schedule 
The Resource Plan Schedule property sheet allows you to automate when to 
activate a resource plan. 
Note: The scheduling job is implemented using DBMS_JOB. 
DBA Management Pack 6-9
DBA Management Pack Functionality and Wizards 
Schema Management 
With DBA Management Pack’s Schema Management functionality, you can create, 
alter, or drop database schema objects such as clusters, indexes, materialized views, 
tables, and views, as well as view dependencies of schema objects. Oracle Schema 
Management features also support Oracle8i objects, which include index organized 
tables, partitioned tables and indexes, advanced queues, and Java stored 
procedures. 
Figure 6–3 Schema Management Window 
6-10 Oracle Enterprise Manager Administrator’s Guide
DBA Management Pack Functionality and Wizards 
When you expand the Schema node under the database in the tree view, a list of 
schema objects appears. 
DBA Management Pack 6-11 
Figure 6–4 Schema Objects 
Tree List by Schema 
Databases contain at least one named schema for each database user. Each schema 
object belongs to one of these named schemas, regardless of object type. Several 
objects belonging to the same schema can be edited by opening the View menu and 
selecting By Schema. The tree view then reorders all schema objects within a set of 
schema folders listed alphabetically by name.
DBA Management Pack Functionality and Wizards 
Editing an Object 
To edit an object, you use the object’s property sheet, which appears when you 
select the object in the tree view. You can then modify the object’s parameters. 
Schema Management features also include the Table Data Editor content viewer, 
which allows you to view, update, and delete the contents of a table and display the 
contents of a view or synonym by selecting a right-mouse command on a table in 
the tree view. 
Creating Objects 
Schema Management allows you to create an object or a clone of an object by 
selecting Create or Create Like from the Object menu. When creating a clone of an 
object, all attributes are identical except for the name. Parameters for new objects 
and cloned objects are specified in property sheets which appear when you select 
Create or Create Like from the Object menu. 
6-12 Oracle Enterprise Manager Administrator’s Guide
DBA Management Pack Functionality and Wizards 
DBA Management Pack 6-13 
Security Management 
In a large network environment, security parameters for objects, administrators, 
and users are in constant change. With DBA Management Pack’s Security 
Management features, an administrator can make these necessary changes quickly 
and efficiently. 
When you expand the Security node under the database in the tree view, folders for 
users, roles, and profiles appear. 
Figure 6–5 Managing Users, Roles, and Profiles
DBA Management Pack Functionality and Wizards 
Figure 6–6 Security Management Window 
User Operations 
Security Management features help you manage the database users in your network 
by helping you create users and clones of users, add and remove user permissions 
and roles, and alter user properties, including account status and default profiles. 
Security Management capabilities also allow you to easily see users’ dependents 
and dependencies. 
6-14 Oracle Enterprise Manager Administrator’s Guide
DBA Management Pack Functionality and Wizards 
Role Operations 
With Security Management role operations features, you can modify role properties 
as easily as user properties. You can also create roles and clones of roles, add and 
remove permissions from roles, and see grantees of roles. 
Profile Operations 
A profile is a set of limits on a user’s database resources. As with users and roles, 
you can create a profile or a clone of a profile, alter a profile’s properties, and assign 
and remove profiles from users. You also have the ability to see profile dependents 
and dependencies, as well as grantees of profiles. 
Profiles, roles, and the users to which they are assigned can easily be seen in 
security lists provided by Security Management. Administrators can then use 
property sheets to determine security parameters, simplifying the process of 
making changes. 
Security Management features also support Oracle8 password management, which 
increases system security. Supported features include: account locking, password 
lifetime and expiration, password history, password complexity, verifications, and 
export/import of passwords. 
DBA Management Pack 6-15
DBA Management Pack Functionality and Wizards 
Storage Management 
DBA Management Pack’s Storage Management features help you administer 
tablespaces, datafiles, redo logs, and rollback segments for optimum database 
storage. 
Figure 6–7 Storage Management Window 
6-16 Oracle Enterprise Manager Administrator’s Guide
DBA Management Pack Functionality and Wizards 
When you connect to a database, the Storage Management branch of the tree view 
lists an icon for the Controlfile and five folders which contain all the storage objects 
in the selected database. The five folders include: 
DBA Management Pack 6-17 
n Tablespaces 
n Datafiles 
n Rollback Segments 
n Redo Log Groups 
n Archive Logs 
Figure 6–8 Managing Database Storage Parameters 
The following sections describe the Storage Management operations that can be 
performed with the objects in each of these folders: 
Controlfile Operations 
When you select the Controlfile icon, a property sheet appears where you can see 
the number of controlfiles created for the database and other statistics.
DBA Management Pack Functionality and Wizards 
Tablespace Operations 
Using the contents of the Tablespaces folder, you can create, edit, or drop a 
tablespace, add a datafile or rollback segment, take a tablespace off- or on-line, 
make a tablespace read-only or writable, and set tablespace storage parameters. You 
can also click the tablespace to see the used and free space of the tablespace or 
datafile. 
Datafile Operations 
With the contents of the Datafiles folder, you can create a datafile or a clone of a 
datafile, edit a datafile, and take a datafile off- or on-line. You can also click the 
datafile to see the used and available space. 
Rollback Segment Operations 
Using the Rollback Segments folder, you can create, alter, drop, or shrink a rollback 
segment as well as take one off- or on-line. 
Redo Log Group Operations 
Using the Redo Log Groups folder, you can switch the current redo log group, 
trigger a checkpoint in a redo log group, create a new redo log group, and rename, 
remove, or add new redo log group members. 
Archive Log Operations 
The archive log folder allows you to view the current archive logs in the database. 
Replication Management 
The Replication Management tool is part of DBA Studio and enables an 
administrator to quickly set up, configure, and manage an Oracle replication 
environment. Specifically, the Replication Management tool provides a 
comprehensive wizard to prepare a database for supporting multimaster and/or 
snapshot replication. Once set up, additional wizards help you replicate schema 
objects using either multimaster or a combination of multimaster and snapshot 
replication. After you have configured your replication environment, you can use 
the Replication Management tool and the other tools in DBA Studio to monitor and 
manage your replication environment. 
6-18 Oracle Enterprise Manager Administrator’s Guide
DBA Management Pack Functionality and Wizards 
DBA Management Pack 6-19 
JServer Management 
JServer is the name of the Java engine embedded in Oracle8i database. CORBA and 
EJB components implemented in Java can be stored and executed inside the 
database. Client applications access these components through a name service. 
Use DBA studio to: 
n Manage the namespace 
n Browse CORBA and EJB components published in the namespace 
n Change permissions on the published components 
n Execute the main() method in schema-resident Java classes and view the output 
Cache Management 
With Cache Manager, you can set up, manage, and monitor caches created by 
Oracle8i Cache. 
Oracle8i Cache increases the capacity of applications, such as Web applications, 
enterprise resource planning (ERP) applications, and vertical applications, by 
adding intelligent middle-tier caching. Use Oracle8i Cache to cache frequently used 
data on the middle-tier node, increasing the number of requests that your 
environment can process. 
Oracle8i Cache maintains a history of queries and, based on that history, 
intelligently routes queries either to the caches on the middle-tier nodes or to the 
origin database. The origin database is the original and primary storage for the 
data. For more information about Oracle8i Cache, see the Oracle8i Cache Concepts 
and Administration Guide. 
Cache Manager lets you: 
n Add tables to or remove tables from one or more caches. 
n Allocate disk space and memory to the caches. 
n Set the synchronization policy of each table. 
n Synchronize tables in one or more caches. 
n Start and stop caches and enable and disable caching. 
n Monitor the ratio of queries that are satisfied by the cache to the queries that are 
routed to the origin database. 
n Monitor the performance of the caches.
DBA Management Pack Functionality and Wizards 
n Update the list of users in a cache. 
SQL*Plus Worksheet 
When you need to administer your database environment with SQL, PL/SQL, or 
SQL*Plus commands, use Oracle SQL*Plus Worksheet. With Oracle SQL*Plus 
Worksheet, you can enter SQL and PL/SQL code and DBA commands dynamically 
and run scripts which are stored as files. 
The SQL*Plus Worksheet window consists of an Input pane (top) where commands 
are entered, and an Output pane (bottom) where the results of your commands 
appear after you click the Execute button. 
SQL*Plus Worksheet maintains a history of the commands you have entered, 
allowing you to edit and re-execute an earlier command without having to retype it. 
The last 50 command executions can be displayed by clicking the Command 
History button. Selections from the Command History dialog box can then be 
copied and inserted into the Input pane. 
With SQL*Plus Worksheet, you can have multiple copies of the worksheet open at a 
time, each of which is separate from the others; so work can be committed or rolled 
back in each worksheet independently. 
SQL*Plus Worksheet can be accessed from the Enterprise Manager Console or the 
browser. 
Wizards 
Note: Additional information on all tools and wizards in DBA 
Management Pack can be found in the Oracle Enterprise Manager online 
Help. 
For help with database administration tasks, the DBA Management Pack offers a 
variety of wizards: 
n Analyze Wizard 
n Backup and Recovery Management Wizards 
n Create Table Wizard 
n Data Management Wizards (Import/Export/Load) 
n Dimension Creation Wizard 
6-20 Oracle Enterprise Manager Administrator’s Guide
DBA Management Pack Functionality and Wizards 
DBA Management Pack 6-21 
n Resource Plan Wizard 
n Summary Advisor Wizard 
n View Wizard 
These wizards increase the ease-of-use of the DBA applications. 
For more information on wizards, see the DBA Management Pack Quick Tour or the 
Oracle Enterprise Manager online Help.
DBA Management Pack Functionality and Wizards 
6-22 Oracle Enterprise Manager Administrator’s Guide
A 
Enterprise Manager Event Handler 
Important: The Event Handler is a pre-production feature in this 
release of Enterprise Manager and should not be used in a 
production environment. 
Applications accessing the Oracle Management Server event services may require 
trapping of specific event conditions and the ability to handle them appropriately. 
This can be achieved using the Event Handler, an application that listens for event 
notifications from the Oracle Management Server and allows these events to be 
further processed by event "adapters". An adapter is an additional piece of 
software that takes events from the Event Handler for further processing. 
Enterprise Manager 2.2 ships with 2 event adapters: 
n Event Logger - allows the Event Handler to log events to designated log files and 
n Command Executor - allows simple operating system commands to be executed 
Enterprise Manager Event Handler A-1 
in response to an event occurrence. 
These adapters permit other types of applications to integrate with the Enterprise 
Manager event system and trigger other operations based on these trapped events. 
You can have either or both adapters working with the Event Handler. 
Prior to passing event notifications for further processing, the Event Handler also 
provides a simple filtering mechanism that allows system administrators to specify 
the conditions by which the events are passed to either or both event adapters.
How the Event Handler Works 
Figure A–1 Event Handler Architecture 
How the Event Handler Works 
When the Event Handler starts, information from the filters are used to determine 
which events the Event Handler should select and pass on to the Event Logger 
and/or Command Executor adapters. Once the adapters receive the event, they 
further process the event based on the templates set up for the adapter. Templates 
provide a way to customize the behavior of the adapters. For the Event Logger, this 
means specifying which events should be logged. For the Command Executor, this 
means specifying the types of events it should respond to and the operating system 
command it should execute in response to that event. 
A-2 Oracle Enterprise Manager Administrator’s Guide
How to Set Up the Event Handler 
Template 
Enterprise Manager Event Handler A-3 
Figure A–2 Event Handler Process 
Event Type A 
Event Type A 
How to Set Up the Event Handler 
To set up and implement an Event Handler, you must perform the following steps: 
1. Define the filters. 
Filters determine which events are passed on to the Event Logger and 
Command Executor adapters. 
2. Define the templates. 
Templates tell the Event Logger and Command Executor adapters how to 
process the event. For the Event Logger, a template specifies which events 
should be logged and how the information should be formatted. For the 
Command Executor, a template specifies the events the adapter should respond 
to and the operating system command it should execute in response to that 
event. 
3. Start up the Event Handler. For Enterprise Manager 2.2, the Event Handler 
starts up as one of the services of the Management Server. 
Event Type A 
Event Type B 
Event Type A 
Event Type B 
Event Type A 
Event Filter 
Event Type A 
Event Logger 
Command Executor 
Template 
Logfile 
Event A 
Event A 
Event A 
> df -k .
Defining Event Filters 
Each of these steps are discussed in detail later in this appendix. 
Defining Event Filters 
When the Event Handler starts, it uses "filters" to determine which events are 
passed on to the Event Logger and/or Command Executor adapters. The system 
administrator can designate what events, if any, are sent to the Event Logger and 
Command Executor adapters. This is called "filtering." Events may be filtered on a 
global basis (applied to both adapters) or on a per adapter basis. Filters apply to 
either the Event Logger or the Command Executor. Filters are set up by means of 
entries in the omsconfig.properties file located in the $ORACLE_ 
HOME/sysman/config directory. Each entry specifies the conditions by which the 
events are passed to the adapters. The conditions are based on ’eventname’ and/or 
’node’ on which the event occurred. An event passes through the filter if it meets the 
conditions specified by the filter. 
Each filter is distinguished by having a common name associated with it and the 
entries for that filter are grouped under this common name. 
Filter Syntax 
Actual filter entries are defined in the omsconfig.properties file. The syntax for filters 
are as follows: 
Syntax for global filters: 
/com/oracle/sysman/em/eventHandler/global_filters/<filter-name>/<’eventname’ or 
’node’> = <value> 
Syntax for filters for the Event Logger only: 
/com/oracle/sysman/em/eventHandler/eventlogger_ 
filters/<filter-name>/<’eventname’ or ’node’> = <value> 
Syntax for filters for the Command Executor only: 
/com/oracle/sysman/em/eventHandler/commandexecutor_ 
filters/<filter-name>/<’eventname’ or ’node’> = <value> 
The character "*" can be used as a wildcard character to specify all possible values. 
The sense of the condition can be negated by prefixing a "!" in front of the value. 
The following rules apply to all event filters: 
A-4 Oracle Enterprise Manager Administrator’s Guide
Defining Event Filters 
1. All conditions specified by a given filter must hold true for the event. 
Example: For the global_filter MyFilter: 
/com/oracle/sysman/em/eventHandler/global_filters/MyFilter/eventname = 
cputest 
/com/oracle/sysman/em/eventHandler/global_filters/MyFilter/node = 
prodserver.us.oracle.com 
If the name of the event is ’cputest’ and if it occurred on node 
’prodserver.us.oracle.com’, then the event will be passed to all event adapters. 
2. The event must pass at least one filter 
3. An event is forwarded to an adapter (Event Logger or Command Executor) if it 
passes through either a global filter or a filter for that particular adapter. 
By default, all events are suppressed, and at least one filter (global or adapter) must 
be present in order for events to be forwarded to any of the adapters. See Sample 
Filters and Templates: on page A-15 for examples of filters. 
Assuming the event has passed through the filters, they are forwarded on to the 
event adapters, Event Logger or Command Executor. We will describe what 
happens to them next. 
Important: Another level of filtering occurs when you start the 
Event Handler itself. In order to start the Event Handler, you need 
to provide a valid Management Server administrator and 
password. This Management Server administrator will have 
associated events that it will be able to receive. If you start the 
Event Handler using a particular Management Server 
administrator, then the Event Handler will only be able to receive 
event notifications to which that Management Server administrator 
has been given at least VIEW permissions. If you start the Event 
Handler using the sysman or superuser account, it will receive ALL 
events. Hence all events that the Management Server administrator 
is not entitled to receive will *not* be received by the Event 
Handler. 
Enterprise Manager Event Handler A-5 
The Event Logger Templates 
The Event Logger logs events received from the Management Server to a file.
Defining Event Filters 
The default log file is $ORACLE_HOME/sysman/log/event.log. By default, the 
format of an Event Logger message is: 
<name>;<occurrence number>;<timestamp>;<assignee, if any>;<severity> 
and is overwritten each time the Event Handler starts. 
The format and behavior of the default log message can be modified slightly by 
using the following properties, read as entries in the omsconfig.properties file. 
/com/oracle/sysman/em/eventlogger/logfile=<full logfile path> 
/com/oracle/sysman/em/eventlogger/separatorstring=<separator string for logfile entries> 
/com/oracle/sysman/em/eventlogger/appendonstart=<true/false> 
The appendonstart property determines whether or not the log file will be 
overwritten each time the Event Handler starts. The default is false, which means 
overwrite. Set this to true if new log entries should be appended to an existing log 
file. 
You can further customize Event Logger operation by using templates. Templates 
are strings that generically represent the format of a message as a way to customize 
the format of event notifications written to a log file. A template contains one or 
more place holders, which are symbolic representations for pertinent pieces of 
information about the event. Place holders are enclosed within "%" characters to 
distinguish them from ordinary words in the template string. Available 
place-holders are: 
Table 6–1 Event Handler Place Holders 
Place Holder Definition 
%eventname% The name of the event. 
%severity% The severity of the event as a string. (Alert, Clear, 
Warning, Node Down) 
%timestamp% The timestamp of the event occurrence. (MM-dd-yyyy 
hh:mm:ss Example: 05-22-00 05:22:00 AM 
%targetname% Name of the target. 
%targettype% Type of the target. (oracle_sysman_node, oracle_sysman_ 
database, oracle_sysman_listener) 
%occ_no% The occurrence number of the event. 
%assignee% The assignee for this event. 
A-6 Oracle Enterprise Manager Administrator’s Guide
Defining Event Filters 
%node% The node on which the event occurred, not to be 
confused with target. 
%output% The output associated with the event occurrence. 
Templates are declared by making entries in the omsconfig.properties file. Events can 
be assigned to templates based on event names or originating node (the same 
criteria used by the Event Handler filtering system). Templates use this format to 
specify which events the template should apply: 
/com/oracle/sysman/em/eventlogger/templates/<template-name>/<’event_name’ or 
’node’>=<value> 
To specify the message format that the template should use, the following format 
must be used: 
/com/oracle/sysman/em/eventlogger/templates/<template-name>/message=<message 
format> 
An example of a template entry in the omsconfig.properties file would be: 
/com/oracle/sysman/em/eventlogger/templates/foo/eventname=cputest 
/com/oracle/sysman/em/eventlogger/templates/foo/message=%eventname% fired on %node%: Cpu 
usage on %targetname% is high! occ_no: %occ_no% Severity: %severity% Time: %timestamp% 
The template definition above assigns all events named cputest to the template 
named foo. Whenever a cputest event fires, the logged output will appear as 
follows: 
cputest fired on smptest16: Cpu usage on smptest16 is high! occ_no: 21 Severity: Alert 
Time: 10-21-1999 02:39:29 PM 
Note: Templates override the default message format. 
As with Event Handler filters, the wildcard character "*" can be used for event 
names and node names. If more than one template criterion matches an event 
occurrence, only one of them is randomly chosen. For this reason, care should be 
used when assigning events to templates. 
Enterprise Manager Event Handler A-7 
Table 6–1 Event Handler Place Holders 
Place Holder Definition
Defining Event Filters 
The Command Executor Templates 
The Command Executor adapter executes simple commands in response to event 
occurrences. The command executor looks at a set of user-defined templates to 
decide what command to execute in response to an event occurrence. A template 
can contain several place-holders, which are symbolic representations for 
interesting pieces of information about the event. Place-holders are enclosed within 
’%’ characters to distinguish them from ordinary words in the template string. For a 
list of currently used place-holders, see Table 6–1, "Event Handler Place Holders" on 
page A-6 
As with the Event Logger, templates are declared by making entries in the 
omsconfig.properties file. Events can be assigned to templates based on event names 
or originating node (the same criteria offered by the event-handler filtering system). 
Templates use this format to specify the events to which the template should apply. 
/com/oracle/sysman/em/eventlogger/templates/<template-name>/<’event_name’ or 
’node’>=<value> 
Note: As with event-handler filters, the wildcard character ’*’ can 
be used within event names and node names. If more than one 
template criterion matches an event occurrence, only one criteria is 
randomly chosen. It is important, to be careful when assigning 
events to templates. 
Templates use the following format to specify the command to which the template 
should apply: 
/com/oracle/sysman/em/commandexecutor/templates/<template-name>/command=<value> 
A typical entry for a template would be: 
/com/oracle/sysman/em/commandexecutor/templates/foo/eventname=cputest 
/com/oracle/sysman/em/commandexecutor/templates/foo/command=net send my-machine-name 
%eventname% fired on %node%: CPU usage on %targetname% is high! occ_no %occ_no% Severity: 
%severity% Time: %timestamp% 
where "my-machine-name" is the name of the machine to which you want to send a 
message. 
A-8 Oracle Enterprise Manager Administrator’s Guide
Defining Event Filters 
The template definition above assigns all events named cputest to the template 
named foo. Whenever a cputest event fires, the following message will be sent to 
machine "my-machine-name": 
cputest fired on smptest16: Cpu usage on smptest16 is high! occ_no: 21 Severity: Alert 
Time: 10-21-1999 02:39:29 PM 
There may be situations where the command you want to execute has an argument 
consisting of several items, for example: 
foo a b c "this is a test" "d=e" 
Enterprise Manager Event Handler A-9 
where: 
foo is the executable command, and 
n a is its first argument 
n b is its second argument 
n c is its third argument 
this is a test is its fourth argument 
d=e is its fifth argument. 
In this case, you can use quotes ("") to group items within a single argument 
together as indicated in the example above, e.g. "this is a test". To include literal 
quotes as part of the argument, you need to prefix these quotes with backslashes 
(). For example: 
foo a b c "d="e"" "this is "quoted" " 
will be pass the following arguments to foo: 
a is the 1st argument 
b is the 2nd argument 
c is the 3rd argument 
d="e" is the 4th argument 
this is "quoted" is the 5th argument
Defining Event Filters 
Starting up and Running the Event Handler 
The Event Handler is one of the Management Server services. Hence, it is started or 
shut down when the Management Server is started or shut down. 
1. Add the following entries to the omsconfig.properties file. 
To start the Event Handler, make sure you have the following entries in the 
omsconfig.properties file. This is located in the %ORACLE_ 
HOME%sysmanconfig directory. %ORACLE_HOME% refers to the Oracle 
Home directory where Enterprise Manager was installed. 
Note: For convenience, these entries are in the %ORACLE_ 
HOME%/sysman/admin/omsconfig.properties.EventHandl 
er file. Simply copy the entries from this file into the 
omsconfig.properties file. 
The following configuration file entries relate to the Event Logger: 
/com/oracle/sysman/em/eventHandler/handlers/eventlogger/entrypoint=oracle.sy 
sman.vda.vdae.VdaeEventLogger 
/com/oracle/sysman/em/eventHandler/handlers/eventlogger/processOnStartup=tru 
e 
The following configuration file entries relate to the Command Executor: 
/com/oracle/sysman/em/eventHandler/handlers/commandexecutor/entrypoint=oracl 
e.sysman.vda.vdae.VdaeCommandExecutor 
/com/oracle/sysman/em/eventHandler/handlers/commandexecutor/processOnStartup 
=true 
Important: There should be NO carriage returns or linefeed 
characters within each entry. This is true for all entries in any of the 
Enterprise Manager configuration files. 
2. Add the Enterprise Manager Administrator to the omsconfig.properties file. 
You need to start up the Event Handler using a valid set of Enterprise Manager 
credentials. 
A-10 Oracle Enterprise Manager Administrator’s Guide
Defining Event Filters 
Specify the Enterprise Manager Administrator by adding the following entries 
to the omsconfig.properties file. 
eventhandler.user=<EM administrator> 
eventhandler.passwd=<corresponding password> 
When the Event Handler is started for the first time, it reads the 
eventhandler.passwd entry, encrypts it, and writes it back in encrypted 
form as another entry, eventhandler.passwd.encr. The original 
non-encrypted password will be removed. Thereafter, it will use the encrypted 
password only. 
If you need to change the password, remove the 
eventhandler.passwd.encr entry, and add the eventhandler.passwd 
again. 
3. Add the appropriate entries to the OMSExternalRegistry.registry file. 
Add the following entries to the OMSExternalRegistry.registry file (located in 
%ORACLE_HOME%/sysman/config), substituting the appropriate values for 
<oracle-home>: 
/com/oracle/sysman/em/oms/services/external/EventHandlerSession/external_ 
service_name = EventHandlerSession 
/com/oracle/sysman/em/oms/services/external/EventHandlerSession/name = 
EventHandlerSession 
/com/oracle/sysman/em/oms/services/external/EventHandlerSession/oms_service_ 
interface = oracle.sysman.vda.vdae.VdaeEventHandlerSession 
/com/oracle/sysman/em/oms/services/external/EventHandlerSession/startup_ 
mode=1 
/com/oracle/sysman/em/oms/services/external/EventHandlerSession/name_value_ 
pair=ORACLE_HOME=<oracle-home> 
/com/oracle/sysman/em/oms/services/external/EventHandlerSession/args=-s 
/com/oracle/sysman/em/oms/services/external/EventHandlerSession/service_ 
classpath= 
/com/oracle/sysman/em/oms/services/external/EventHandlerSession/outfile_ 
destination=<oracle-home>/sysman/log 
/com/oracle/sysman/em/oms/services/external/EventHandlerSession/errfile_ 
destination=<oracle-home>/sysman/log 
/com/oracle/sysman/em/oms/services/external/EventHandlerSession/logfile_ 
name=eventHandler 
Enterprise Manager Event Handler A-11
Defining Event Filters 
Note: For convenience, these entries can be found in the 
%ORACLE_ 
HOME%/sysman/admin/OMSExternalRegistry.registry.Ev 
entHandler file. Simply copy the entries from this file and paste 
them into the OMSExternalRegistry.registry file located in your 
%ORACLE_HOME%/sysman/config directory. 
4. In the omsconfig.properties file, specify your filters and templates for the 
Event Logger and Command Executor as discussed in the previous sections. 
5. Start the Management Server. 
For UNIX and Windows NT, enter the following at the command line: 
oemctrl start oms 
For Windows NT, you can start and stop the Management Server as a Service in 
the Control Panel (OracleORANTManagementServer). 
Stopping the Event Handler 
The Event Handler stops when the Management Server is stopped. Use the 
OEMCTRL utility to stop the Management Server. 
oemctrl stop oms <oms-user>/<oms-password> 
Or, on machines running Windows NT, you can stop the Management Server by 
stopping the corresponding service (from Control Panel Services). 
Troubleshooting Tips 
n If the logger/executor doesn’t seem to respond to events, check the following: 
1. Make sure you have the appropriate entries to start the logger and executor 
in the omsconfig.properties file. These are: 
/com/oracle/sysman/em/eventHandler/handlers/eventlogger/entrypoint=oracl 
e.sysman.vda.vdae.VdaeEventLogger 
/com/oracle/sysman/em/eventHandler/handlers/eventlogger/processOnStartup 
=true 
/com/oracle/sysman/em/eventHandler/handlers/commandexecutor/entrypoint=o 
A-12 Oracle Enterprise Manager Administrator’s Guide
Defining Event Filters 
racle.sysman.vda.vdae.VdaeCommandExecutor 
/com/oracle/sysman/em/eventHandler/handlers/commandexecutor/processOnSta 
rtup=true 
2. Make sure the Management Server administrator used to start the Event 
Handler receives the event notification via the EM console. The 
Management Server administrator needs to have at least VIEW permissions 
on the event. 
3. Make sure you have set a filter that allows events to pass through to them. 
Try initially setting a filter that allows *all* events to pass through. 
Example: 
/com/oracle/sysman/em/eventHandler/global_filters/allEvents/eventname=* 
4. Check the syntax of any templates associated with the logger/executor. Try 
using a simple template or any of the samples given below. 
5. When using the logger on unix, make sure you have the appropriate 
permissions to create the log file. It will use the permissions of the 
operating system user who started the Event Handler. Try creating a file in 
the directory where the logger’s log file should have been created. 
6. When using the command executor on unix, make sure you have the 
appropriate permissions to execute the command. It will use the 
permissions of the operating system user who started the Event Handler. 
Try running the command directly on the operating system to make sure it 
works. 
7. Make sure the Event Handler service is still up. Check the screen where you 
started the Management Server and watch for messages that indicate the 
Event Handler is no longer running. If on a UNIX system, check to see if the 
service is running. 
8. Make sure there are no linefeed characters within any single entry in the 
omsconfig.properties and OMSExternalRegistry.registry file. 
9. When using templates, make sure you specify both the event condition on 
which the template applies as well as the message format (for the Event 
Logger) or the command to be executed (for the Command Executor) 
n The Event Handler is an English-only release. 
Enterprise Manager Event Handler A-13
Defining Event Filters 
Tracing 
Should come as a last resort to find out errors that have occurred with the Event 
Handler. Trace information can be directed either to the screen or to a log file in the 
%ORACLE_HOME%sysmanlog directory. To enable logging or tracing, turn on the 
options specified in the omsconfig.properties file and restart the Event 
Handler. 
/com/oracle/sysman/em/eventHandler/tracing_enabled = true or false 
/com/oracle/sysman/em/eventHandler/logging_enabled = true or false 
The trace information generated can either be generated to a file or to the screen. If 
tracing_enabled is set to true, then any trace information will be sent to the screen. 
If logging_enabled is set to true, then trace information will be generated in the log 
file. However, logging takes precedence, i.e. if logging_enabled is true, then trace 
information will always be sent to the log file. 
These are the various combinations and their output: 
tracing_enabled = false 
logging_enabled = false 
No trace on screen or in the log file. 
tracing_enabled = false 
logging_enabled = true 
Trace information will be generated to the log file. 
tracing_enabled = true 
logging_enabled = false 
Trace information will be generated to the screen. 
If the Event Handler was started as an external service, then the trace will be 
written to the file specified by the logfile_name entry and in the directory specified 
by outfile_destination entry in the OMSExternalRegistry.registry file 
tracing_enabled = true 
logging_enabled = true 
Trace information will be generated to the log file. 
A-14 Oracle Enterprise Manager Administrator’s Guide
Defining Event Filters 
Enterprise Manager Event Handler A-15 
Sample Filters and Templates: 
The following are useful filters and templates. Some of these entries can be found in 
the %ORACLE_HOME%/sysman/admin/omsconfig.properties.EventHandler file. 
Filters: 
Pass all events to both event logger and command executor 
/com/oracle/sysman/em/eventHandler/global_filters/allNodes/node = * 
Pass all events to the event logger 
/com/oracle/sysman/em/eventHandler/eventlogger_filters/allEvents/eventname=* 
Pass all events to the command executor 
/com/oracle/sysman/em/eventHandler/commandexecutor_filters/allEvents/node=* 
Pass on all events except “cputest” to both event logger and command executor 
/com/oracle/sysman/em/eventHandler/global_filters/not-cputest/eventname = 
!cputest 
Pass on all events named cputest that did not originate on the node smptest16 to the Event 
Logger: 
/com/oracle/sysman/em/eventHandler/eventlogger_ 
filters/pass-some-cputest/eventname=cputest 
/com/oracle/sysman/em/eventHandler/eventlogger_ 
filters/pass-some-cputest/node=!smptest16 
Pass all events except cputest to the Command Executor adapter: 
/com/oracle/sysman/em/eventHandler/commandexecutor_ 
filters/pass-no-cputest/eventname=!cputest 
Templates 
Sample template for the event logger: 
/com/oracle/sysman/em/eventlogger/templates/allEvents/eventname=* 
/com/oracle/sysman/em/eventlogger/templates/allEvents/message=%eventname% fired 
on %node%: Target %targetname%: Output %output% Severity: %severity% Time: 
%timestamp%
Known Issues 
A sample log entry using this template would look like: 
cputest fired on smptest16: Target smptest16: Output Cpu usage is high. 
Severity: Alert Time: 10-21-1999 02:39:29 PM 
Sample templates for the command executor: 
For Windows NT: 
/com/oracle/sysman/em/commandexecutor/templates/allEvents2/eventname=* 
/com/oracle/sysman/em/commandexecutor/templates/allEvents2/command=net send 
my-machine %eventname% fired on %node%: Target %targetname%: Output %output% 
Severity: %severity% Time: %timestamp% 
where my-machine is the name of the PC to which the message will be sent. 
Whenever any event fires, a message using the above format is sent to machine 
my-machine. 
For Solaris: 
/com/oracle/sysman/em/commandexecutor/templates/allEvents/command=xterm 
-display hqsun1:0 -e telnet 
Here, whenever any event fires, a telnet session is opened. 
Known Issues 
n The Event Handler may not start if there are any carriage return characters 
within any of the required entries. 
n If you specify incomplete template entries, for example: 
/com/oracle/sysman/em/eventlogger/templates/allEvents/eventname=* 
but do not specify the message format to use, for example: 
/com/oracle/sysman/em/eventlogger/templates/allEvents/message= ... 
You may see a NullPointerException. 
n If there is a problem starting the Event Logger, as indicated previously, this 
problem may affect the Command Executor also. The reverse is also true: if 
there is a problem starting the Command Executor due to incorrect 
A-16 Oracle Enterprise Manager Administrator’s Guide
Differences between Solaris and Windows NT 
configuration entries, then it may affect the operation of the Logger. Set up 
Event Handler tracing to determine the root problem. 
Differences between Solaris and Windows NT 
For Event Handler entries that require a directory path, use the syntax that is 
appropriate to the operating system. For example 
Solaris: 
/com/oracle/sysman/em/eventlogger/logfile=/app/oracle/8.1.6/sysman/log/MyEvents. 
log 
Windows NT: 
/com/oracle/sysman/em/eventlogger/logfile=c:orantsysmanlogMyEvents.log 
Enterprise Manager Event Handler A-17
Differences between Solaris and Windows NT 
A-18 Oracle Enterprise Manager Administrator’s Guide
B 
Keyboard Shortcuts 
This appendix provides a list of general Windows keyboard shortcuts. For a 
complete list of Windows keyboard shortcuts and navigation, refer to your 
operating system documentation. 
Keyboard Shortcuts B-1
Figure B–1 General Windows Keyboard Shortcuts 
Key Action 
F1 Displays Help information for the active object or the window as a whole. 
WINDOWS LOGO KEY OR CTRL+ESC Opens the Start menu located on the taskbar. 
CTRL+ALT+DELETE In Microsoft Windows, opens the Close Program dialog box, which 
contains a list box of applications to be closed and the command buttons 
End Task, Shut Down, and Cancel. 
In Microsoft Windows NT, opens the Windows NT Security dialog box, 
with the following options: Lock Workstation, Logoff, Shut Down, Change 
Password, Task Manager, and Cancel. If you are not logged on, opens the 
logon dialog box. 
DELETE Deletes the selected item(s). If the items are files, moves them to the 
Recycle Bin. 
SHIFT+DELETE Delete the selected item(s). If the items are files, destroys them 
immediately without moving them to the Recycle Bin. 
CTRL+N Opens the New dialog box. (You also can choose the New command from 
the File menu.) 
CTRL+O Opens the Open dialog box. (You also can choose the Open command from 
the File menu.) 
CTRL+P Opens the Print dialog box. (You also can choose the Print command from 
the File menu.) 
CTRL+S Opens the Save dialog box. (You also can choose the Save command from 
the File menu.) 
CTRL+X Cuts the selected item(s) to the Clipboard. (You also can choose the Cut 
command from the Edit menu.) 
CTRL+INSERT OR CTRL+C Copies the selected item(s) to the Clipboard. (You also can choose the Copy 
command from the Edit menu.) 
SHIFT+INSERT OR CTRL+V Pastes the copied items(s) from the Clipboard. (You also can choose the 
Paste command from the Edit menu.) 
ALT+BACKSPACE OR CTRL+Z Undoes the last action. Note that not all actions, such as shutting down, 
can be undone. (You also can choose the Undo command from the Edit 
menu.) 
ALT+SHIFT+BACKSPACE Redoes the previously undone action. (You also can choose the Redo 
command from the Edit menu.) 
B-2 Oracle Enterprise Manager Administrator’s Guide
WINDOWS LOGO KEY+M Minimizes all open windows. The keyboard focus goes to the least recently 
selected icon on the desktop. Add SHIFT to expand previously opened 
windows and return focus to the most recently used application. 
Keyboard Shortcuts B-3 
Key Action
B-4 Oracle Enterprise Manager Administrator’s Guide
Index 
Index-1 
Symbols 
, 1-26 
A 
acknowledging events 
Event menu, 5-24 
Event window, 5-23 
Active Jobs page, 4-7 
add a group to a map 
Map menu, 3-3 
additional services folders 
Navigator tree, 2-3 
administration task 
Navigator objects, 2-10 
administrator 
adding, editing, and deleting, 1-9 
managing, 1-8 
preferences, 1-11 
reassigning objects when deleting, 1-11 
super, 1-8 
Administrator Notification 
email and paging, 5-40 
Advanced Mode 
View menu, 1-5 
agent 
down, 5-41 
UpDown Node event, 5-41 
Apache Web Server, 2-11 
Apache Web Server, discovering, 2-11 
apply (register) an event set, 5-38 
Archive Log Operations in Storage Management 
features, 7-18 
audience for this guide, xv 
Available Destinations list 
Job system, 4-15 
B 
Background images 
adding to groups, 3-5 
blackouts, paging/email, 2-12 
Broadcast Message task, 4-27 
C 
checking status 
paging service, 1-34 
clone (of a database object), 7-12 
Command Executor Templates, A-8 
communication daemon 
populating Navigator, 2-2 
Components, 1-2 
Event, 1-3 
Group, 1-2 
Job, 1-3 
Navigator, 1-2 
composite job, 4-3 
configuring 
paging service, 1-28 
Console 
customize layout, 1-5 
File menu, 1-5 
Help menu, 1-7 
menus, 1-4 
user preferences, 1-25 
using menus, 1-4
console 
list of tasks that can be performed from, xiv 
Console panes 
Groups, 3-1 
Navigator, 2-1 
context menu, 2-5 
context-sensitive menus 
Navigator, 1-4 
using in the Navigator, 1-4 
Controlfile Operations of Storage Management 
features, 7-17 
copying tree objects 
Navigator, 2-10 
create 
event set, 5-24 
job, 4-10 
or modify a job, 4-12 
or modify an event set, 5-29 
specified object type in the Navigator, 2-5 
customize and manage network views 
Map system, 3-3 
D 
Data Gatherer events, 5-42 
database 
connection made in tree, 2-3 
Database Fault Management Events, 5-41 
Database Operations, 7-7 
Databases folder 
Navigator tree, 2-3 
datafile operations of Storage Management 
features, 7-18 
DBA Management Pack, 7-1 
DBA Studio, 7-2 
delete 
group, 3-3 
discovering services 
Navigator, 2-7 
SQL*Net network, 2-2 
discovery 
problems, 2-9 
discovery status, 2-9 
drag and drop 
Navigator, 2-10 
Index-2 
Navigator objects, 2-2 
E 
edit 
group, 3-3 
EMS 
Event Management system, 5-1 
event 
set, 5-4 
unsolicited, 5-12, 5-33 
Event Filters, A-4 
Event Handler, A-1 
Event History page 
Event window, 5-23 
Event Logger Templates, A-5 
Event Management, 5-1 
categories of events, 5-10 
creating an event set, 5-29 
Enterprise Manager, 1-3 
fault management, 5-11 
introduction, 5-1 
menu, 5-24 
modifying a registered event set, 5-38 
modifying an event set, 5-29 
Oracle events, 5-40 
parameter settings, 5-35 
performance management, 5-12 
process, 5-4 
registering an event set, 5-38 
resource management, 5-12 
space management, 5-11 
types of events, 5-10 
viewing a registered event set, 5-38 
viewing an event set, 5-26 
window, 5-21 
Event Set Library page 
Event window, 5-26 
predefined event sets, 5-26 
Event Set Management property sheet 
creating an event, 5-24 
modifying a new event, 5-24 
example 
creating an event set, 5-37 
group, 3-11
Index-3 
Job Scheduling, 4-21 
registering an event, 5-37 
expanding 
map objects, 3-8 
F 
Fault Management events, 5-10 
fixit job, 4-3, 5-1 
creating, 4-14 
events, 5-32 
removing, 5-32 
submitting, 5-32 
with events, 5-1 
G 
General page 
job, 4-14 
Group 
pane, 3-2 
group, 3-4 
add or delete, 3-9 
adding background images, 3-5 
create, 3-4 
edit, 3-3 
example, 3-11 
job destination, 4-15 
modify, 3-10 
modifying properties, 3-10 
Group system, 1-2 
Groups folder 
Navigator tree, 2-3 
H 
history 
Command History Button, SQL*Plus 
Worksheet, 7-20 
I 
Input pane, SQL*Plus Worksheet, 7-20 
J 
job 
alter, 4-10 
composite, 4-3 
create, 4-10 
manage, 4-10 
modify, 4-10 
view, 4-11 
Job History page, 4-9 
Job Library, 4-12 
job output 
Progress Page, 4-20 
Job Scheduling, 4-1 
credential preference, 4-4, 4-17 
destination requirements, 4-15 
Enterprise Manager, 1-3 
example, 4-21 
General page, 4-14 
job destination, 4-14 
job destinations, 4-15 
job name, 4-14 
job tasks, 4-15 
job type, 4-14 
managing jobs, 4-5 
menu, 4-10 
scheduling jobs, 4-5 
scheduling process, 4-2 
task parameters, 4-17 
window, 4-6 
Job Tasks 
wizards, 4-24 
jobs, cancelling, 4-5 
K 
keyboard shortcuts, general Windows platform, B- 
1 
L 
launching a database tool 
from a map, 3-8 
from the Console, 2-5 
from the Navigator, 1-2 
Navigator, 2-4
with the right-mouse button, 2-4 
levels of permission, 1-24 
Listener Fault Management Events, 5-42 
Listeners folder 
Navigator tree, 2-3 
Lists, Saving, 1-27 
LRS 
See Log roll-forward server (LRS), A-1 
M 
manipulation of the objects 
in the Navigator, 2-10 
Map, 3-1 
bitmap background, 3-6 
create, 3-7 
creating with dragging and dropping, 3-7 
customized views, 3-1 
expanding objects, 3-8 
status of objects, 3-7 
user-defined views, 3-4 
menus 
Console, 1-4 
File menu, 1-5 
Help menu, 1-7 
Job, 4-10 
View, 1-5 
modify 
event set, 5-24 
group, 3-3 
multiple tasks 
submitting a job, 4-12 
N 
Navigator, 2-1 
Enterprise Manager, 1-2 
manipulating objects, 2-10 
menu, 2-5 
new view, 2-6 
objects, 1-2 
splitting the tree, 2-4, 2-6 
window, 2-2 
network 
container, 2-3 
Index-4 
new view 
Navigator tree, 2-6 
Node Fault Management Events, 5-41 
Node Properties, 2-10 
Nodes folder 
Navigator tree, 2-3 
O 
object 
creating, 7-12 
editing, 7-12 
Oracle DB UpDown 
event profile, 5-26 
Oracle events, 5-40 
Oracle Host UpDown 
event profile, 5-26 
Oracle Listener UpDown 
event profile, 5-26 
Oracle Security Management, 7-13 
Oracle SQL*Plus Worksheet, 7-20 
Oracle8i objects, 7-10 
OraTcl 
job scripts, 4-2 
Output Dialog box 
Job Scheduling, 4-20 
Output pane, SQL*Plus Worksheet, 7-20 
Outstanding Events page 
Event system, 5-22 
P 
paging service 
querying status, 1-34 
setting up, 1-28 
stopping, 1-34 
paging status codes for numeric pages, 1-18 
Paging/Email Blackout, 2-12 
Total, 2-12 
parameters 
events, 5-34 
jobs, 4-17 
Parameters Page 
job, 4-17 
password management, 7-15
Index-5 
Performance Management events, 5-10 
Ping Agent, 2-6 
ping agent menu item, 2-9 
PL/SQL 
using with Oracle SQL*Plus Worksheet, 7-20 
Pre-defined Profiles 
Event system, 5-26 
Preferred credentials 
, 1-26 
preferred credentials 
connecting in a map, 3-8 
Console, 1-25 
problems 
Navigator discovery, 2-9 
profile operations, Security Management, 7-15 
Progress page 
job, 4-20 
purpose of this guide, xiv 
R 
redo log group operations of Storage Management 
features, 7-18 
Refreshing Discovery 
Refresh Topology Menu Choice, 2-9 
registered destination 
map objects, 3-7 
registering events, 5-29 
Registrations page 
Event window, 5-23 
related publications, xx 
removing 
a split page in the Navigator, 2-6 
job with Remove menu item, 4-11 
problems with a job, 4-11 
problems with an event, 5-25 
registered events, 5-25 
Report, 1-35 
creating, 1-35 
database configuration, 1-36 
enterprise, 1-36 
system requirements, 1-37 
Report Wizard, 1-35 
launching, 1-37 
Resource Management events, 5-10 
right mouse button 
used in the Navigator, 1-4 
right-mouse button 
Related Tools menu, 2-4 
role operations, Security Management, 7-15 
rollback segment operations of Storage Management 
features, 7-18 
rollback segments, 7-16 
Run DBA Script task, 4-25 
Run OS Command task, 4-28 
Run SQL*Plus task, 4-24 
Run Tcl Script task, 4-28 
S 
sample images, 3-6 
saving 
job history, 4-10 
schedule 
and manage jobs, 4-5 
execution of a job, 4-17 
job, 4-5 
Schema Management, 7-10 
Security Management, 7-13 
Service Discovery 
Navigator menu option, 2-5 
Service Name, 1-25 
Service Type, 1-25 
setting a bitmap background 
Map menu, 3-6 
setting up 
paging service, 1-28 
short-cut menu, 1-4 
Shutdown Database task, 4-25 
Shutdown Listener task, 4-30 
signal flag 
on map objects, 3-7 
SMTP mail 
setup, 1-6 
Space Management event, 5-10 
specifying service names, 1-26 
split (new) view 
Navigator, 2-6 
splitting the Navigator tree, 2-4, 2-6 
new view, 2-6
SQL 
Oracle SQL*Plus Worksheet, 7-20 
SQL error 
job task, 4-25 
SQL*Net network 
services, 2-2 
SQL*Plus Worksheet, 7-20 
starting 
paging service, 1-32 
Startup Database task, 4-26 
Startup Listener task, 4-30 
status 
of a map object, 3-7 
of a registered event set, 5-6 
stopping 
paging service, 1-34 
Storage Management, 7-16 
summary of the pending jobs 
Active Jobs page, 4-7 
Super Administrator, 1-8 
T 
tablespace operations of Storage Management 
features, 7-18 
tablespaces, 7-16 
task parameters 
Job system, 4-17 
Tcl 
job scripts, 4-2 
script examples, 4-29 
third-party events 
creating, 5-12 
with job task, 4-29 
tnsnames.ora, 2-9 
tools 
DBA Studio, 7-2 
Tools menu, 1-6 
U 
unsolicited event, 5-12, 5-33 
unsolicited events, 5-10 
UpDown (Database) event, 5-41 
UpDown (Listener) event, 5-42 
Index-6 
UpDown (Node) event, 5-41 
user operations, Security Management, 7-14 
user preferences 
jobs, 4-4, 4-17 
when running jobs, 4-4, 4-17 
user-defined groups 
job destinations, 4-15 
user-defined map views 
creating, 3-4 
W 
web server 
discovering, 2-11 
Wizard Job Tasks, 4-24 
worksheet, Oracle SQL*Plus Worksheet, 7-20

More Related Content

PDF
Oracle demantra implementation guide part e22232 09
PDF
Eacs
PDF
Oracle Incentive User Guide 122cnug
PDF
Oracle demantra implementation guide part e22232 09
Eacs
Oracle Incentive User Guide 122cnug

What's hot (20)

PDF
oracle finance E13422
PDF
Oracle database 12c advanced replication
PDF
Installed base
PDF
Oracle Enterprise Scheduler(ESS Job Scheduling)
PDF
Oracle@cloud adapter(SFDC integration with SOA Suites12c)
PDF
Oracle database 12c client installation overview
PDF
Manufacturing scheduling user guide
PDF
Oracle hrms approvals management implementation guide
PDF
Zfs administration
PDF
Oracle database 12c application express end user's guide
PDF
Cdh user guider12.2
PDF
Engineering user guide
PDF
Javaee tutorial
PDF
Oracle database 12c client installation guide 2
PDF
Oracle® business intelligence
PDF
Oracle timesten
PDF
Developer’s guide for oracle data integrator
PDF
E49322 07
PDF
Tai lieu-sql-plus-user-s-guide-and-reference
PDF
Oracle onsite rdc user guide 4.6
oracle finance E13422
Oracle database 12c advanced replication
Installed base
Oracle Enterprise Scheduler(ESS Job Scheduling)
Oracle@cloud adapter(SFDC integration with SOA Suites12c)
Oracle database 12c client installation overview
Manufacturing scheduling user guide
Oracle hrms approvals management implementation guide
Zfs administration
Oracle database 12c application express end user's guide
Cdh user guider12.2
Engineering user guide
Javaee tutorial
Oracle database 12c client installation guide 2
Oracle® business intelligence
Oracle timesten
Developer’s guide for oracle data integrator
E49322 07
Tai lieu-sql-plus-user-s-guide-and-reference
Oracle onsite rdc user guide 4.6
Ad

Viewers also liked (14)

PPTX
Let’s organize the mathematical historical game in
PDF
Redesign the U$ Dollar - joint submission
PDF
Shift2010_StayingSoftInAWorldGoneHard
PDF
O-net work4 35
PPT
Podcasting
DOC
2015 - Information Resources and ICT at SPHMMC- Pre workshop assessment for p...
PDF
Genral arrangement of 2 floor building + RC floor system
PDF
FY 2013 R&D REPORT January 6 2014 - National Aeronautics and Space Administra...
PDF
Denmark Repository project in Denmark – Some critical aspects and recommendat...
PPT
Knapton Powerpoint Presentation
PDF
3d cubes building blocks stacked process design 3 powerpoint ppt slides.
PPTX
Moodle Update for MMU's EQAL Programme, Feb 2011
PPTX
Take the Lead Social Media Webinar Slides
PPTX
PHM Phase 2 Strategy
Let’s organize the mathematical historical game in
Redesign the U$ Dollar - joint submission
Shift2010_StayingSoftInAWorldGoneHard
O-net work4 35
Podcasting
2015 - Information Resources and ICT at SPHMMC- Pre workshop assessment for p...
Genral arrangement of 2 floor building + RC floor system
FY 2013 R&D REPORT January 6 2014 - National Aeronautics and Space Administra...
Denmark Repository project in Denmark – Some critical aspects and recommendat...
Knapton Powerpoint Presentation
3d cubes building blocks stacked process design 3 powerpoint ppt slides.
Moodle Update for MMU's EQAL Programme, Feb 2011
Take the Lead Social Media Webinar Slides
PHM Phase 2 Strategy
Ad

Similar to A85248 (20)

PDF
Fusion hcm roles information
PDF
Oracle database 12c application express administration guide
PDF
Kscope Not Your Father's Enterprise Manager
PDF
Oracle database 12c 2 day + application express developer's guide
PDF
Orac appl express guide release 4
PDF
Ora db 2 day+ app express dev guide
PPTX
Oracle EM12c Release 4 New Features!
PDF
e13406_WSHIM.pdf
PDF
Oracle performance management_implementation_and_user_guide
PDF
Instalacion de apex
PDF
toaz.info-oracle-enterprise-manager-13cpdf-pr_d27a8dfef1d5b8f2ea644bed2462172...
PPT
Less08 users
PDF
Oracle® database 2 days security guide e10575
PPTX
MDM-SGG_Business_User_Guide_v2_2_0_2.pptx
PPTX
MDM-SGG_Business_User_Guide_v2_2_0_2.pptx
PDF
Sales userguide121asnug
PDF
Oracle® Trading Community Architecture
PDF
The Ultimate Guide to Upgrade ocp java 6, 7 &amp; 8 to java se 11 developer ...
PDF
Oracle database 12c 2 day + real application clusters guide
Fusion hcm roles information
Oracle database 12c application express administration guide
Kscope Not Your Father's Enterprise Manager
Oracle database 12c 2 day + application express developer's guide
Orac appl express guide release 4
Ora db 2 day+ app express dev guide
Oracle EM12c Release 4 New Features!
e13406_WSHIM.pdf
Oracle performance management_implementation_and_user_guide
Instalacion de apex
toaz.info-oracle-enterprise-manager-13cpdf-pr_d27a8dfef1d5b8f2ea644bed2462172...
Less08 users
Oracle® database 2 days security guide e10575
MDM-SGG_Business_User_Guide_v2_2_0_2.pptx
MDM-SGG_Business_User_Guide_v2_2_0_2.pptx
Sales userguide121asnug
Oracle® Trading Community Architecture
The Ultimate Guide to Upgrade ocp java 6, 7 &amp; 8 to java se 11 developer ...
Oracle database 12c 2 day + real application clusters guide

More from Anil Pandey (20)

PDF
26 bg2020
PDF
National health policy_2017
PDF
Class 3-computer-pt3-rev-ws-56
PDF
Class 3-social-pt3-rev-ws-for-uploading
PDF
Class 3-science-pt3-rev-ws-for-uploading
PDF
Class 3-math-pt3-rev-ws-for-uploading
PDF
Class 3-hindi-pt3-rev-ws-for-uploading
PDF
Class 3-english-pt3-rev-ws-for-uploading
PDF
As onew816a
PDF
Art of indexing_in_o8i
PDF
Apps session wait_tables
PDF
Application sql issues_and_tuning
PDF
Appliance whitepaper 8_i
PDF
Appd2 cg
PDF
816isdfo
PDF
35 dbatune3
PDF
PDF
9i lin relnotes
PDF
9i hp relnotes
PDF
8 isecurity database
26 bg2020
National health policy_2017
Class 3-computer-pt3-rev-ws-56
Class 3-social-pt3-rev-ws-for-uploading
Class 3-science-pt3-rev-ws-for-uploading
Class 3-math-pt3-rev-ws-for-uploading
Class 3-hindi-pt3-rev-ws-for-uploading
Class 3-english-pt3-rev-ws-for-uploading
As onew816a
Art of indexing_in_o8i
Apps session wait_tables
Application sql issues_and_tuning
Appliance whitepaper 8_i
Appd2 cg
816isdfo
35 dbatune3
9i lin relnotes
9i hp relnotes
8 isecurity database

Recently uploaded (20)

PDF
Why TechBuilder is the Future of Pickup and Delivery App Development (1).pdf
PDF
Odoo Companies in India – Driving Business Transformation.pdf
PPTX
Oracle E-Business Suite: A Comprehensive Guide for Modern Enterprises
PDF
System and Network Administration Chapter 2
PDF
System and Network Administraation Chapter 3
PDF
Claude Code: Everyone is a 10x Developer - A Comprehensive AI-Powered CLI Tool
PDF
Addressing The Cult of Project Management Tools-Why Disconnected Work is Hold...
PDF
Softaken Excel to vCard Converter Software.pdf
PPTX
ManageIQ - Sprint 268 Review - Slide Deck
PDF
Digital Strategies for Manufacturing Companies
PPTX
Operating system designcfffgfgggggggvggggggggg
PDF
Flood Susceptibility Mapping Using Image-Based 2D-CNN Deep Learnin. Overview ...
PPTX
Introduction to Artificial Intelligence
PDF
Navsoft: AI-Powered Business Solutions & Custom Software Development
PDF
Understanding Forklifts - TECH EHS Solution
PPTX
CHAPTER 2 - PM Management and IT Context
PPTX
Lecture 3: Operating Systems Introduction to Computer Hardware Systems
PPTX
Online Work Permit System for Fast Permit Processing
PDF
2025 Textile ERP Trends: SAP, Odoo & Oracle
PDF
medical staffing services at VALiNTRY
Why TechBuilder is the Future of Pickup and Delivery App Development (1).pdf
Odoo Companies in India – Driving Business Transformation.pdf
Oracle E-Business Suite: A Comprehensive Guide for Modern Enterprises
System and Network Administration Chapter 2
System and Network Administraation Chapter 3
Claude Code: Everyone is a 10x Developer - A Comprehensive AI-Powered CLI Tool
Addressing The Cult of Project Management Tools-Why Disconnected Work is Hold...
Softaken Excel to vCard Converter Software.pdf
ManageIQ - Sprint 268 Review - Slide Deck
Digital Strategies for Manufacturing Companies
Operating system designcfffgfgggggggvggggggggg
Flood Susceptibility Mapping Using Image-Based 2D-CNN Deep Learnin. Overview ...
Introduction to Artificial Intelligence
Navsoft: AI-Powered Business Solutions & Custom Software Development
Understanding Forklifts - TECH EHS Solution
CHAPTER 2 - PM Management and IT Context
Lecture 3: Operating Systems Introduction to Computer Hardware Systems
Online Work Permit System for Fast Permit Processing
2025 Textile ERP Trends: SAP, Odoo & Oracle
medical staffing services at VALiNTRY

A85248

  • 1. Oracleâ Enterprise Manager Administrator’s Guide Release 2.2 September 2000 Part No. A85248-01
  • 2. Oracle® Enterprise Manager Administrator’s Guide, Release 2.2 Part No. A85248-01 Copyright © 1996, 2000, Oracle Corporation. All rights reserved. The Programs (which include both the software and documentation) contain proprietary information of Oracle Corporation; they are provided under a license agreement containing restrictions on use and disclosure and are also protected by copyright, patent, and other intellectual and industrial property laws. Reverse engineering, disassembly, or decompilation of the Programs is prohibited. The information contained in this document is subject to change without notice. If you find any problems in the documentation, please report them to us in writing. Oracle Corporation does not warrant that this document is error free. Except as may be expressly permitted in your license agreement for these Programs, no part of these Programs may be reproduced or transmitted in any form or by any means, electronic or mechanical, for any purpose, without the express written permission of Oracle Corporation. If the Programs are delivered to the U.S. Government or anyone licensing or using the programs on behalf of the U.S. Government, the following notice is applicable: Restricted Rights Notice Programs delivered subject to the DOD FAR Supplement are "commercial computer software" and use, duplication, and disclosure of the Programs, including documentation, shall be subject to the licensing restrictions set forth in the applicable Oracle license agreement. Otherwise, Programs delivered subject to the Federal Acquisition Regulations are "restricted computer software" and use, duplication, and disclosure of the Programs shall be subject to the restrictions in FAR 52.227-19, Commercial Computer Software - Restricted Rights (June, 1987). Oracle Corporation, 500 Oracle Parkway, Redwood City, CA 94065. The Programs are not intended for use in any nuclear, aviation, mass transit, medical, or other inherently dangerous applications. It shall be the licensee's responsibility to take all appropriate fail-safe, backup, redundancy, and other measures to ensure the safe use of such applications if the Programs are used for such purposes, and Oracle Corporation disclaims liability for any damages caused by such use of the Programs. Oracle® is a registered trademark, and Oracle7, Oracle8, Oracle8i, Oracle Expert, Oracle Trace, Net8, PL/SQL, SQL*, SQL*Net, and SQL*Plus are trademarks or registered trademarks of Oracle Corporation. All other company or product names mentioned are used for identification purposes only and may be trademarks of their respective owners. Windows, Windows NT, Visual C++, and OLE are trademarks of Microsoft Corporation. Netscape, Netscape Certificater Server, Netscape FastTrack Server, Netscape Navigator, Netscape ONE, SuiteSpot, and the Netscape N and Ship’s Wheel logos are registered trademarks of Netscape Communications Corporation in the United States and other countries. OraTcl - Copyright 1993 Tom Poindexter and US West Advanced Technologies, Inc. Permission to use, copy, modify, and distribute the software and its documentation for any purpose and without fee is hereby granted, provided that the copyright notice appear in all copies. Tom Poindexter and U S WEST make no representations about the suitability of this software for any purpose. It is provided as is without express or implied warranty. By use of this software the user agrees to indemnify and hold harmless Tom Poindexter and U S WEST from any claims or liability for loss arising out of such use.
  • 3. Contents Send Us Your Comments ................................................................................................................... xi Preface........................................................................................................................................................... xiii iii Part I Oracle Enterprise Manager Framework 1 Console Enterprise Manager Console ............................................................................................................... 1-2 Components..................................................................................................................................... 1-2 Navigator .....................................................................................................................................1-2 Group ...........................................................................................................................................1-2 Jobs ..............................................................................................................................................1-3 Events ..........................................................................................................................................1-3 Console Menus ...................................................................................................................................... 1-4 Context-Sensitive Menus................................................................................................................. 1-4 File Menu......................................................................................................................................... 1-5 View Menu ...................................................................................................................................... 1-5 System Menu................................................................................................................................... 1-5 Tools Menu...................................................................................................................................... 1-6 Database Applications .................................................................................................................1-6 Service Management ...................................................................................................................1-6 Help Menu ....................................................................................................................................... 1-7 Managing Enterprise Manager Administrators ................................................................................ 1-8 Managing Administrator Accounts ................................................................................................. 1-9
  • 4. iv Creating or Editing an Administrator Account.............................................................................. 1-10 Reassigning Object Ownership...................................................................................................... 1-11 Administrator Preferences ............................................................................................................. 1-11 General........................................................................................................................................... 1-12 Notification .................................................................................................................................... 1-12 Filters .........................................................................................................................................1-13 Email ..........................................................................................................................................1-15 Paging ........................................................................................................................................1-17 Paging Status Codes for Numeric Pages ...................................................................................1-18 Email/Paging Message Body Definition ...................................................................................1-19 Paging Server .............................................................................................................................1-20 Schedule......................................................................................................................................... 1-22 Permissions .................................................................................................................................... 1-23 Preferred Credentials ..................................................................................................................... 1-25 Setting Administrator Credentials .............................................................................................1-26 Saving Logon Information as a Preferred Credential .................................................................... 1-27 Saving the Contents of a List......................................................................................................... 1-27 Configuring and Starting the Paging Service................................................................................... 1-28 Setting Up Paging.......................................................................................................................... 1-29 Adding a Paging Server ................................................................................................................. 1-30 Adding Paging Carrier................................................................................................................... 1-31 Specifying Paging Notification Preferences.................................................................................. 1-32 Other Paging Server Operations .................................................................................................... 1-33 Removing a Paging Server ........................................................................................................1-33 Viewing Information on Paging Server .....................................................................................1-33 Pinging a Paging Server ............................................................................................................1-33 Querying Status of the Paging Service ......................................................................................1-34 Stopping the Paging Service ......................................................................................................1-34 Removing a Paging Carrier .......................................................................................................1-34 Editing a Paging Carrier ............................................................................................................1-35 Viewing Information about a Paging Carrier ............................................................................1-35 Testing a Paging Carrier ............................................................................................................1-35 Creating Enterprise Manager Reports ............................................................................................. 1-35 Enterprise Report versus Database Configuration/Status Reports ................................................ 1-36 Enterprise Report (General Systems) ........................................................................................1-36
  • 5. Database Configuration/Status Report ......................................................................................1-36 Requirements................................................................................................................................. 1-37 Launching the Report Wizard ....................................................................................................... 1-37 Creating Enterprise Reports ......................................................................................................1-37 Creating DBA Studio Reports ...................................................................................................1-38 v 2 Navigator Navigator Pane...................................................................................................................................... 2-2 Populating the Navigator Tree......................................................................................................... 2-2 Expanding Objects in the Navigator................................................................................................ 2-2 Viewing Specific Tree Objects........................................................................................................ 2-4 Launching Tools.............................................................................................................................. 2-4 Navigator Menu .................................................................................................................................... 2-5 Discovering Services ............................................................................................................................. 2-7 Adding a Service .........................................................................................................................2-8 Refreshing a Service ....................................................................................................................2-9 Removing a Service ....................................................................................................................2-9 Pinging the Intelligent Agent........................................................................................................... 2-9 Determining Node Properties ........................................................................................................ 2-10 Manipulating Objects in the Navigator ............................................................................................ 2-10 Administering Objects................................................................................................................... 2-10 Copying Navigator Objects ........................................................................................................... 2-10 Apache Web Servers........................................................................................................................... 2-11 Discovering Apache Web Servers................................................................................................. 2-11 Determining the Status of Apache Web Server............................................................................. 2-11 Paging/Email Blackout....................................................................................................................... 2-12 Specifying Total Paging/Email Blackout ...................................................................................... 2-12 Defining a Paging/Email Blackout ................................................................................................ 2-12 Making a Copy of an Existing Blackout Schedule........................................................................ 2-14 Turning Blackout Schedules On and Off ...................................................................................... 2-14 Deleting Paging/Email Blackout Periods ...................................................................................... 2-14 Viewing Blackout Periods............................................................................................................. 2-14 Removing a Node from the Navigator .............................................................................................. 2-15 Node Removal Failure........................................................................................................................ 2-15
  • 6. 3 Groups vi Group Pane............................................................................................................................................ 3-2 Group Menu .......................................................................................................................................... 3-3 Managing Groups ................................................................................................................................. 3-4 Creating a Group.............................................................................................................................. 3-4 Group General Page ....................................................................................................................3-5 Group Permissions Page ..............................................................................................................3-6 Manipulating Group Views ............................................................................................................. 3-7 Monitoring Status ............................................................................................................................ 3-7 Expanding Objects........................................................................................................................... 3-8 Groups .........................................................................................................................................3-8 Databases and Other Discovered Services ..................................................................................3-8 Launching Tools from a Group ....................................................................................................... 3-8 Adding Objects to a Group .............................................................................................................. 3-9 Deleting Objects from the Group Pane............................................................................................ 3-9 Modifying a Group ........................................................................................................................ 3-10 Removing Groups.......................................................................................................................... 3-10 Example: Creating a Group ........................................................................................................... 3-11 4 Jobs Job Process ............................................................................................................................................ 4-2 Job Tasks ......................................................................................................................................... 4-2 Writing SQL*Plus Scripts ...........................................................................................................4-3 Job Credentials................................................................................................................................. 4-4 Submitting Jobs ............................................................................................................................... 4-5 Cancelling Jobs................................................................................................................................ 4-5 Job Pane................................................................................................................................................. 4-6 Active Job Pane ............................................................................................................................... 4-7 Context-sensitive Menu options ..................................................................................................4-8 History Page..................................................................................................................................... 4-9 Job Menu ............................................................................................................................................. 4-10 Job Library..................................................................................................................................... 4-11 Creating, Modifying, or Viewing a Job............................................................................................. 4-12 Creating a New Job........................................................................................................................ 4-12 Modifying a Saved Job .................................................................................................................. 4-13
  • 7. Viewing Job Details ...................................................................................................................... 4-14 General Page.................................................................................................................................. 4-14 Job Task Page ................................................................................................................................ 4-15 Job Parameters Page ...................................................................................................................... 4-17 Job Schedule Page ......................................................................................................................... 4-17 Job Permissions Page .................................................................................................................... 4-18 Job Progress Page .......................................................................................................................... 4-19 Job Output Dialog Box ..............................................................................................................4-20 Example: Creating a Job................................................................................................................ 4-21 Oracle Job Tasks................................................................................................................................. 4-23 Oracle Database Tasks .................................................................................................................. 4-24 Enterprise Manager Wizard Database Tasks ............................................................................4-24 Operating System or Node Tasks .................................................................................................. 4-27 Tcl Script Examples ..................................................................................................................4-29 Listener Tasks................................................................................................................................ 4-30 vii 5 Events What’s New in Events........................................................................................................................... 5-2 Event System Overview........................................................................................................................ 5-4 Using Events.................................................................................................................................... 5-4 Creating Events ...........................................................................................................................5-5 Registering Events .......................................................................................................................5-6 Event Occurrences........................................................................................................................... 5-7 Event Notifications ......................................................................................................................5-7 Notifying Administrators ............................................................................................................5-8 Interpreting Events ......................................................................................................................5-8 Correcting Problems...................................................................................................................... 5-10 Event Categories and Types............................................................................................................... 5-10 Fault Management Event Tests ..................................................................................................... 5-11 Space Management Event Tests.................................................................................................... 5-11 Resource Management Event Tests............................................................................................... 5-12 Performance Management Event Tests ......................................................................................... 5-12 Unsolicited Event Tests................................................................................................................. 5-12 Registering Interest in an Unsolicited Event .............................................................................5-12 Setting the Parameters Property Sheet for Unsolicited Events ................................................5-13
  • 8. viii Raising an Unsolicited Event Test ............................................................................................5-14 Raising Unsolicited Events Via Enterprise Manager Jobs ........................................................5-15 Unsolicited Event Caveats .........................................................................................................5-21 Event Pane ........................................................................................................................................... 5-21 Alerts Page..................................................................................................................................... 5-22 Viewing Alerts ...........................................................................................................................5-23 History Page................................................................................................................................... 5-23 Registered Page ............................................................................................................................. 5-23 Event Menu ......................................................................................................................................... 5-24 Context-Sensitive Menus............................................................................................................... 5-25 Event Library Dialog ..................................................................................................................... 5-26 Editing an Event ........................................................................................................................5-26 Oracle Event Tests .....................................................................................................................5-26 Event Viewer ....................................................................................................................................... 5-27 General........................................................................................................................................... 5-27 Log................................................................................................................................................. 5-28 Notification Details........................................................................................................................ 5-28 Creating, Modifying, and Registering an Event .............................................................................. 5-29 Modifying a Registered Event ....................................................................................................... 5-30 Event General Page........................................................................................................................ 5-31 Event Tests Page............................................................................................................................ 5-33 Event Parameters Page .................................................................................................................. 5-34 Parameters .................................................................................................................................5-35 Event Permissions Page................................................................................................................. 5-35 Event Progress Page ...................................................................................................................... 5-37 Example: Creating and Registering an Event................................................................................ 5-37 Administrator Event Notification .................................................................................................. 5-40 Oracle Event Tests .............................................................................................................................. 5-40 Database Fault Management Event Tests...................................................................................... 5-41 Node Fault Management Events.................................................................................................... 5-41 Listener Fault Management Events ............................................................................................... 5-42 Data Gatherer Fault Management Events...................................................................................... 5-42 Numeric Pager Job/Event Ids ........................................................................................................ 5-42 General Event System Troubleshooting Procedures ..................................................................... 5-43 Obtaining Enterprise Manager Repository Status .....................................................................5-43
  • 9. Event System Features and Requirements ....................................................................................... 5-43 ix Part II The Database Administration Tools 6 DBA Management Pack DBA Studio ............................................................................................................................................ 7-2 Common Features of DBA Management Pack Functionality .......................................................... 7-3 Tree Views and Property Sheets...................................................................................................... 7-3 Multi-Column Lists ......................................................................................................................... 7-3 Database Version Awareness .......................................................................................................... 7-3 Database Reports ............................................................................................................................. 7-3 Logging of Database Changes......................................................................................................... 7-3 Showing Object DDL ...................................................................................................................... 7-3 Show SQL ....................................................................................................................................... 7-4 Show Dependencies......................................................................................................................... 7-4 Right-Mouse Commands................................................................................................................. 7-4 Font Settings.................................................................................................................................... 7-4 Advanced Mode............................................................................................................................... 7-4 DBA Management Pack Functionality and Wizards ........................................................................ 7-5 Instance Management...................................................................................................................... 7-6 Database Operations ....................................................................................................................7-7 Stored Configurations .................................................................................................................7-8 Sessions .......................................................................................................................................7-8 In-Doubt Transactions .................................................................................................................7-9 Resource Consumer Groups ........................................................................................................7-9 Resource Plans ............................................................................................................................7-9 Resource Plan Schedule ..............................................................................................................7-9 Schema Management..................................................................................................................... 7-10 Tree List by Schema ..................................................................................................................7-11 Editing an Object .......................................................................................................................7-12 Creating Objects ........................................................................................................................7-12 Security Management.................................................................................................................... 7-13 User Operations .........................................................................................................................7-14 Role Operations .........................................................................................................................7-15 Profile Operations .....................................................................................................................7-15
  • 10. x Storage Management ............................................................................................................ ........ 7-16 Controlfile Operations ...............................................................................................................7-17 Tablespace Operations ...............................................................................................................7-18 Datafile Operations ....................................................................................................................7-18 Rollback Segment Operations ...................................................................................................7-18 Redo Log Group Operations .....................................................................................................7-18 Archive Log Operations ............................................................................................................7-18 Replication Management ............................................................................................................... 7-18 JServer Management ..................................................................................................................... 7-19 Cache Management ....................................................................................................................... 7-19 SQL*Plus Worksheet..................................................................................................................... 7-20 Wizards .......................................................................................................................................... 7-20 A Enterprise Manager Event Handler How the Event Handler Works............................................................................................................ A-2 How to Set Up the Event Handler ....................................................................................................... A-3 Defining Event Filters........................................................................................................................... A-4 Filter Syntax..................................................................................................................................... A-4 The Event Logger Templates........................................................................................................... A-5 The Command Executor Templates ................................................................................................ A-8 Starting up and Running the Event Handler.................................................................................. A-10 Stopping the Event Handler ......................................................................................................A-12 Troubleshooting Tips..................................................................................................................... A-12 Tracing........................................................................................................................................... A-14 Sample Filters and Templates:....................................................................................................... A-15 Filters: .......................................................................................................................................A-15 Templates .................................................................................................................................A-15 Known Issues....................................................................................................................................... A-16 Differences between Solaris and Windows NT................................................................................. A-17 B Keyboard Shortcuts Index
  • 11. Send Us Your Comments xi Oracle Enterprise Manager Administrator’s Guide, Release 2.2 Part No. A85248-01 Oracle Corporation welcomes your comments and suggestions on the quality and usefulness of this document. Your input is an important part of the information used for revision. n Did you find any errors? n Is the information clearly presented? n Do you need more information? If so, where? n Are the examples correct? Do you need more examples? n What features did you like most? If you find any errors or have any other suggestions for improvement, please indicate the document title and part number, and the chapter, section, and page number (if available). You can send com-ments to us in the following ways: n FAX: (650) 506-7200 Attn: Oracle System Management Products n Postal service: Oracle Corporation Oracle System Management Products Documentation Manager 500 Oracle Parkway, 50p5 Redwood Shores, CA 94065 USA If you would like a reply, please give your name, address, telephone number, and (optionally) elec-tronic mail address. If you have problems with the software, please contact your local Oracle Support Services.
  • 12. xii
  • 13. Preface xiii This chapter describes the purpose and organization of this guide. The following information is discussed: n Purpose of this Guide n Audience n How this Guide Is Organized n How to Use This Guide n Conventions Used in This Guide n Product Documentation n Related Publications
  • 14. Purpose of this Guide xiv This guide describes Oracle® Enterprise Manager, Release 2.2: Oracle’s system management Console, common services, and integrated platform graphical tools. Oracle Enterprise Manager is bundled with the DBA Management Pack, which is an integrated set of standard database administration applications to help automate and simplify the common daily tasks of administrators. These supplemental applications focus on specific areas of database administration, helping administrators with their daily and routine tasks of managing databases and other services and keeping them operational. From the client interface, the Oracle Enterprise Manager Console, you can do the following: n Centrally administer, diagnose, and tune multiple databases n Manage non-database Oracle products and services n Effectively monitor and respond to the health of your Oracle family of products and third-party services 24 hours a day n Schedule jobs on multiple nodes at varying time intervals n Monitor networked services for events n Customize your display by organizing databases and other services into logical administrative groups While using Enterprise Manager products, you should refer to the online help for specific information on the displayed dialog box, menu, or window. You can display the online help by pressing F1 or selecting a Help button if present. For an overview of the Oracle Enterprise Manager system, see the Oracle Enterprise Manager Concepts Guide.
  • 15. xv Audience This guide is written for those who wish to use Oracle Enterprise Manager to perform system administration tasks. This guide assumes you are familiar with the administrative tasks you wish to perform. If you are not, refer to the Oracle server documentation set. The Oracle server documentation set contains specific and thorough descriptions of the database administration tasks you can perform with Enterprise Manager applications. In addition, the Oracle server documentation set provides recommendations on how to administer your database optimally. If you have not yet read the introductory chapters of the Oracle server administrator’s guide, we recommend that you do so. These chapters describe the specific responsibilities of a database administrator. You should also be familiar with the operation of your specific Microsoft Windows or UNIX system. See the documentation for your Windows or UNIX system, if necessary.
  • 16. How this Guide Is Organized xvi This guide is divided into chapters, as described below. Part I: Oracle Enterprise Manager Framework Chapter 1, "Console" This chapter describes the Enterprise Manager Console, its basic configuration and functions, as well as system adminstrative functions such as paging, email, and managing administrators. Chapter 2, "Navigator" This chapter explains the Navigator component of the Enterprise Manager Console, associated menus, and managing object within the Navigator such as discovering services, managing web servers, and generating reports. Chapter 3, "Groups" This chapter explains the Group component of the Enterprise Manager Console and how using Groups can simplify administering a your enterprise. Chapter 4, "Jobs" This chapter explains how to use the Job Scheduling component of Enterprise Manager to automate administrative tasks. Chapter 5, "Events" This chapter explains how to use the Event Management component of Enterprise Manager to monitor managed nodes and services. Part II: The Database Administration Tools Chapter 6, "DBA Management Pack" This chapter introduces the DBA Management Pack, which is an integrated set of standard database administration applications to help automate and simplify the common daily tasks of administrators. It also describes the user interface elements used in the database administration applications. How to Use This Guide The Oracle Enterprise Manager Administrator’s Guide has been designed to be used closely with the Oracle Server documentation set. While this guide describes how to use Enterprise Manager to perform database administration tasks, the Oracle Server
  • 17. documentation set describes the reasons for and the implications of performing these tasks. Consequently, you should refer to the Oracle Server documentation set while using Enterprise Manager to perform your administrative tasks. For an overview of the Enterprise Manager system, see the Oracle Enterprise Manager Concepts Guide. After reading this manual, you may choose to proceed directly to those chapters that are relevant to the tasks you plan to perform using Enterprise Manager. Before using the database administration applications, you should read Chapter 6, "DBA Management Pack". This chapter provides an overview of the organization and user interface elements of the applications. While using the Enterprise Manager products, you should refer to the online help for specific information on the displayed dialog box, menu, or window. You can display the online help by pressing F1 or selecting a Help button if present. xvii
  • 18. Conventions Used in This Guide xviii The following sections explain the conventions used in this guide. Examples This guide contains code examples. Note that the text of examples appears in a different font than the text of the guide. This is an example of a SELECT statement: SELECT * FROM emp Examples in this guide follow these case conventions: n Keywords, such as CREATE and NUMBER, appear in uppercase. Keywords have special meanings. When you specify them, they can be in uppercase or lowercase, but they must be used exactly as they appear in the code example. n Names of database objects and their parts, such as emp and empno, appear in lowercase. However, in the text of this guide, names of database objects and their parts appear in uppercase. n Parameters act as place holders in examples. They appear in lowercase. Parameters are usually names of schema objects, Oracle datatypes, or expressions. When you see a parameter in a syntax diagram, you should substitute an object or expression of the appropriate type. Note that parameter names appear in italics in the text of this guide. Command Syntax n Italics is used for variables, such as oem_tool n | denotes alternative choices n {param1 | param2 | ... } signifies that one of the parameters in {} must be used n [ ] identifies optional parameters Special Text Special text is provided to alert you to particular information within the body of this guide and within other manuals. Note: This indicates important information related to Enterprise Manager. Additional Information: Where necessary, this refers you to your operating system-specific Oracle documentation for additional information.
  • 19. xix Attention: This highlights information that is important when performing the described task. Suggestion: This signifies suggestions and practical hints that can be helpful when using Enterprise Manager. Warning: This indicates information that you should be aware of before you perform the action described in the current section. Product Documentation The Oracle Enterprise Manager product documentation includes the following: n The Oracle Enterprise Manager Readme provides important notes regarding the updates to the software, documentation, and late-breaking news. n The Oracle Enterprise Manager Configuration Guide provides information about configuring Oracle Enterprise Manager components. n The Oracle Enterprise Manager Concepts Guide provides an overview of the Enterprise Manager system. n The Oracle Enterprise Manager Administrator’s Guide describes the components and features of the Oracle Enterprise Manager system. n The Oracle Enterprise Manager Messages Manual describes the Oracle Enterprise Manager error messages and methods for diagnosing the messages. n The Oracle Intelligent Agent User’s Guide provides information on configuring and troubleshooting the Intelligent Agent. The guides are available on the CD in HTML and Adobe Acrobat (PDF) formats for viewing with a web browser. In addition to the Enterprise Manager documentation, extensive online help is provided for Oracle Enterprise Manager components.
  • 20. Related Publications xx The Oracle Enterprise Manager Administrator’s Guide refers to important information in related publications. Depending on the version of the Oracle database, you would refer to the Oracle7 or Oracle8i documentation. The related books referred to in this guide are listed below: n For general information about the Oracle8i and how it works, see Getting to Know Oracle8i and Oracle8i Concepts. n For information about administering Oracle8i, see the Oracle8i Administrator’s Guide. n For information on Oracle’s SQL commands and functions, see the Oracle8i SQL Reference. n For information about Oracle messages and codes, refer to Oracle8i Error Messages. n For information about the Oracle networking system, see your network-specific documentation. n For information about the Oracle8i for other platforms, see your platform-specific documentation. n For information on Oracle Parallel Server, refer to the Oracle8i Parallel Server Setup and Configuration Guide, which provides essential information for preparing Oracle8i for use with Oracle Parallel Server and Oracle Enterprise Manager. The "Introducing Oracle Parallel Server" chapter provides a conceptual and component overview of Oracle Parallel Server. This information will help you prepare and plan your Oracle Parallel Server installation and configuration in an Oracle8ienvironment. Oracle Corporation also publishes several files that are available on your distribution media. These files are usually named README, RELNOTE, BUGHST, and RESTRICT and have extensions such as .WRI, .DOC, and .TXT. Read these files to learn about changes to the software or documentation that has not been described in the guides. The exact names and locations of the files mentioned above may vary, depending on your operating system.
  • 21. Part I Oracle Enterprise Manager Framework n Chapter 1, "Console" n Chapter 2, "Navigator" n Chapter 3, "Groups" n Chapter 4, "Jobs" n Chapter 5, "Events"
  • 23. 1 Console This chapter introduces the Oracle Enterprise Manager Console and provides an overview of its components. The following topics are included in this chapter: Console 1-1 n Enterprise Manager Console n Console Menus n Managing Enterprise Manager Administrators n Configuring and Starting the Paging Service n Creating Enterprise Manager Reports
  • 24. Enterprise Manager Console Enterprise Manager Console The Console is the primary interface used for all Oracle Enterprise Manager operations. It provides menus, toolbars, and the framework to access Oracle tools and utilities available through other vendors. The graphical configuration of the Console and the tools available are determined by the optional products installed and user preferences. See Figure 1–1, "Console Window" for an illustration of a Console screen. Components The Console includes viewing panes for the Navigator, Group, Jobs, and Events systems. Navigator The Navigator displays a hierarchical list of all the services in a network, providing a direct view of services such as databases, groups, listeners, and nodes, plus the objects that they contain. The Navigator shows all the network services with their relationships to other objects. Through the Navigator, you can also launch administration tools for managing objects such as database users and tablespaces. You can also perform many administration tasks in the Navigator, such as creating, editing, or dropping tablespaces. See Chapter 2, "Navigator" for information. Group The Group system allows you to organize managed services into logical groups that you can then manage collectively with a graphical display. With the Group system, you can create, save, modify, and view groups. To create a group of services, drag and drop objects from the Navigator into the Group view. See Chapter 3, "Groups" for information. 1-2 Oracle Enterprise Manager Administrator’s Guide
  • 25. Enterprise Manager Console Jobs Jobs are standard tasks, such as executing a SQL script or backing up a database, that can be automated through Oracle Enterprise Manager. The Job system allows you to manage and schedule jobs and remote operations for the services of your network. Jobs can be scheduled at various times, such as daily or weekly, and at single or multiple destinations. See Chapter 4, "Jobs" for more information. Events The Event system allows you to monitor and display the status of events—such as a loss of service—occurring on the managed services in your network system. See Chapter 5, "Events" for more information. Console 1-3 Figure 1–1 Console Window
  • 26. Console Menus Console Menus The Console menu bar provides access to the following menus: Figure 1–2 Console Menu Bar The File, View, System, Tools, and Help menus are described in this section. n See "Navigator Menu" on page 2-5 for information about the Navigator menu. n See "Group Menu" on page 3-3 for information about the Group menu. n See "Job Menu" on page 4-10 for information about the Job menu. n See "Event Menu" on page 5-24 for information about the Event menu. When using the Console menus, note that: n Some menus include other menus. For example, when you select the Database Applications from the Tools menu, a sub-menu containing several options displays. n Menu options vary depending on the objects selected or the active window in the Console. The Tools menu items vary depending on the components that have been installed. Context-Sensitive Menus You can click the right mouse button on objects in some windows of the Console to display a context-sensitive, or short-cut, menu. This menu usually contains a subset of the options that are available through a menu in the main menu bar. For example, if you click the right mouse button on a group in the Navigator pane, a menu appears with the menu options from the Group menu. Note: See "Discovering Services" on page 2-7 for information on context-sensitive menu options in the Navigator. 1-4 Oracle Enterprise Manager Administrator’s Guide
  • 27. Console Menus Console 1-5 File Menu The File menu items allow you to exit the system. View Menu The View menu customizes the Console layout, allowing you to show or hide toolbars or windows. You can also use the window palette located in the upper-left corner of the Console to access the View menu options. At least one window must be visible in the Console. Show/Hide Navigator Pane Hides or shows the Navigator pane. Show/Hide Job Pane Hides or shows the Job Scheduling pane. Show/Hide Event Pane Hides or shows the Event Management pane. Show/Hide Group Pane Hides or shows the Group pane. Show/Hide Toolbar Hides or shows the Oracle Enterprise Manager toolbar. System Menu The System menu provides options to set up administrator and system configurations. Preferences... Displays the Edit Administrator Preferences property sheet, which allows the current administrator to change preferences, including permissions and login credentials. See "Administrator Preferences" on page 1-11 for more information. Manage Administrators Displays the Administrator Manager Accounts property sheet for adding, modifying, and removing administrators. This option is only available to Super Administrators. See "Managing Enterprise Manager Administrators" on page 1-8 for more information.
  • 28. Console Menus Configure SMTP Gateway The System menu contains the Configure SMTP Gateway option. Use the Configure SMTP Gateway option to specify the SMTP gateway that is used for the SMTP E-mail system. E-mail notification will not function correctly until the SMTP gateway is set properly. This menu option is only available to super administrators. Add Services to tnsnames.ora Updates the local network configuration file (tnsnames.ora) with discovered services information. You should run this after a Discovery operation so that any Value-Added Applications, such as Oracle Parallel Server Manager or Replication Manager, can access the discovered services. Font Settings Changes the font settings for the Console and DBA Studio. Font settings in pop-up menus will not change even if you have specified to change the font settings. Generate Enterprise Report Allows you to create an HTML-based Enterprise Report containing information such as event alerts, scheduled jobs, groups, and discovered services for all managed nodes in your enterprise. For more information, see "Creating Enterprise Manager Reports" on page 1-35. Tools Menu The Tools menu allows you to execute database applications and other utilities that have been installed on your system. The menu options in the Tools menu depend on your installed Oracle Enterprise Manager configuration. Database Applications This menu option lists the database administration functions that you can execute from the Console. Examples include schema, instance, and security management. Service Management This menu option lists integrated applications such as the Oracle Application Server Manager. Other optional applications may also be available from this menu. 1-6 Oracle Enterprise Manager Administrator’s Guide
  • 29. Console Menus Console 1-7 Help Menu From the Help menu, you can access the Enterprise Manager online help system. You can also access Enterprise Manager’s Quick Tours. Enterprise Manager comes with a variety of Quick Tours, each providing a comprehensive overview for Enterprise Manager and specific integrated applications. Enterprise Manager version information is also available.
  • 30. Managing Enterprise Manager Administrators Managing Enterprise Manager Administrators Enterprise Manager, Release 2.2 is a multi-administrator system: every person who is administering systems using Enterprise Manager has his or her own administrator account which he or she uses to log into the Console or stand-alone application. The installation of Enterprise Manager creates a single super administrator named sysman. The super administrator sysman creates administrators using the Manage Administrators item in the System menu. In addition to an administrator name and password, each account can be tagged as a "Super Administrator" account or an account to which the administrator has access to only jobs and/or events. Differences between the two types of accounts are as follows: n Super Administrators automatically have full privileges for all objects in the system. Most Super Administrators also have a separate account for daily operations but use their Super Administrator account for special operations only available to Super Administrators, such as starting and stopping the Management Server, creating new Enterprise Manager Administrators, configuring paging servers, or checking other administrator’s schedules. Using the sysman account for daily administration work is not recommended. The Super Administrator account is similar to root on UNIX or Administrator on Windows NT and is a user which cannot be deleted or renamed. It is a user that can perform any task and therefore should be used only for setting up the environment. After the necessary DBA accounts are created, the Super Administrator account ’ SYSMAN’ should not be used anymore. n Regular Administrators can have full access to all other Console operations but they will only see or be able to modify those jobs, events, or groups to which they have access. Typically, all administrators share a single Enterprise Manager, Release 2.2 repository, which allows administrators to share information. Although you can set up multiple repositories, administrators using different repositories will not have access to each other’s information; there is no sharing of data between repositories. Administrative data stored in the repository is filtered based on administrator permissions. Preferred Credentials must be set up for each administrator account. When an administrator connects through the Navigator or stand-alone application, the preferred credentials used are those defined explicitly for that administrator. 1-8 Oracle Enterprise Manager Administrator’s Guide
  • 31. Managing Enterprise Manager Administrators Console 1-9 Managing Administrator Accounts Enterprise Manager administrators are created, edited, and deleted with the Manage Administrators option of the Console System menu. The Manage Administrators option displays the Manage Administrator Accounts dialog (Figure 1–3, "Manage Administrator Accounts"). The Manage Administrators option is only available to Super Administrators. Super Administrators have full privileges for all objects and can create, edit, and delete other administrators. The Super Administrator sets up the administrator name and initial password and determines whether an administrator is a Super Administrator or regular administrator. The Super Administrator also determines whether the administrator has access to the job and event systems. In this dialog, you can: n Click the Add button in the Manage Administrator Accounts dialog to display the Create Administrator Account dialog. The Administrator Account dialog allows you to add a new administrator. See "Creating or Editing an Administrator Account" below for more information. n Select the Delete button to delete an administrator. If the administrator is the owner of any objects, you need to reassign object ownership otherwise the objects are deleted with the administrator. See "Reassigning Object Ownership" on page 1-11 for more information.
  • 32. Managing Enterprise Manager Administrators Figure 1–3 Manage Administrator Accounts Creating or Editing an Administrator Account In the Manage Administrators dialog, enter a unique administrator name and password for the Enterprise Manager administrator. Note that the administrator name is not the same as a database username. Figure 1–4 Create Administrator Account Check the access available to the administrator: Super Administrator Allows the administrator to add other administrators, as well as access to all created objects, e.g., jobs, events, and groups. Access to Job System Allows the administrator access to the Job system, but does not automatically give access privileges for specific jobs. 1-10 Oracle Enterprise Manager Administrator’s Guide
  • 33. Managing Enterprise Manager Administrators Access to Event System Allows the administrator access to the Event system. After an administrator has been created, the administrator can log in to the Enterprise Manager Console and set up administrator preferences. If you select the Edit button, you will get the Preferences window, as described in "Administrator Preferences" on page 1-11. You can then edit the preferences for the selected administrator. Console 1-11 Reassigning Object Ownership If you delete an administrator who owns any object, the Object Ownership Management dialog appears. See Figure 1–5, "Object Ownership Management". The dialog allows you to reassign the objects to another Enterprise Manager administrator. If you do not reassign the objects, the objects are deleted. Figure 1–5 Object Ownership Management Administrator Preferences The Edit Administrator Preferences property sheet is displayed with the Preferences option of the System menu. This property sheet allows you to configure the preferences for an Enterprise Manager administrator. The pages in the property sheet are: n General n Notification n Schedule
  • 34. Managing Enterprise Manager Administrators n Permissions n Preferred Credentials General The General Preferences page allows a Super Administrator to change an administrator’s password and access privileges. Figure 1–6 Administrator General Preferences Notification The Notification page allows you to set up paging and email notification methods for the administrator. This page consists of a hierarchical tree list and a right-side modal area that changes according to the object selected in the navigator. The tree list consists of four top-level objects: n Filters (Selected by default) n Email n Paging n Paging Servers 1-12 Oracle Enterprise Manager Administrator’s Guide
  • 35. Managing Enterprise Manager Administrators Note: If you plan to use the Enterprise Manager Paging Server for notification, you need to configure the paging and modem settings for your system before you set up administrators. To configure the modem for the system, access the Modems option in the Control Panel. Before using mail, specify the SMTP Gateway for Email with the Configure SMTP Gateway option of the Console System menu. Console 1-13 Figure 1–7 Administrator Notification Preferences Filters Notification filters allow each administrator to specify when to send an email notification as opposed to a page notification as a result of a job or event status change. n Event Notification Filter: The Event Notification Filter allows you to filter email/pages sent to an administrator according to the event’s level of severity. Filtering is set at the user level by checking or unchecking the Email/Page options on this property sheet page. You can select any combination of the following levels of event severity. For example, you can set filtering so that an
  • 36. Managing Enterprise Manager Administrators administrator is notified via email if there is a warning and notified via the paging system if there is an alert. Selecting all levels of severity provides no filtering. n Alert n Warning n Clear n Node Down n Reassign Job Notification Filter The Job Notification Filter allows you to filter email/pages sent to an administrator according to job status. As with the Event Notification Filter, filtering is set at the user level by checking or unchecking the desired option. Selecting all job statuses provides no filtering. n Start n Complete n Fail n Delete (Job removed) 1-14 Oracle Enterprise Manager Administrator’s Guide
  • 37. Managing Enterprise Manager Administrators Console 1-15 Email This page allows you to specify notification parameters for email. Figure 1–8 Administrator Notification Preferences: Email n Receiver’s Email: Enter the email address of the administrator to whom the mail is being sent. n Subject Prefix: Enter an optional prefix that is appended to the E-mail subject. That allows administrators to quickly identify messages from Enterprise Manager in their mail. n Limit message length: Allows you to specify the maximum message body length of an E-mail notification. By default, this length is unlimited. n Current Definition: Displays the current settings for format and content of E-mail notifications. To set or change the default parameters, expand the Email object in the tree list. You can select format and content options for the Subject line and Message Body. You can further expand the Message Body object to specify options at the Per Event Test level. n Test: Click the Test button to check the validity of E-mail configuration. A message displays to inform you of the status of the test email.
  • 38. Managing Enterprise Manager Administrators Email Subject This page allows you to select the content and format of the email subject line. By default, Type, Name, and Status are selected. You use the left/right arrows to move items back and forth between the Available and Selected lists. Once an item has been selected, you can control the order in which the item appears by selecting it in the list and using the up/down arrows (located to the immediate right of the Selected list) to reposition the item within the list. Note: The following information also applies to inserting content into the Email/Paging message body. n Available: Lists available content. n Selected: Lists currently selected content and the order in which the content should be displayed. n Use Abbreviated Format: For Type (Job or Event), Status, and Target Type, you can select the Use Abbreviated Format option. When selected abbreviations are used in the Subject line. The following abbreviations are used by the system: Service Type n DB for Database n LSR for Listener n N for Node Status n ST for Started n CO for Completed n F for Failed n D for Deleted n W for Warning n A for Alert n C for Cleared n NU for Node Unreachable n R for Reassign 1-16 Oracle Enterprise Manager Administrator’s Guide
  • 39. Managing Enterprise Manager Administrators Timestamp Format This option is available if Timestamp is chosen from the Selected list. You use the pull-down menu to select one of the pre-defined formats. Do not include titles When selected, classification titles such as Status, Service Name, and Timestamp are omitted from the message. Console 1-17 Paging This page allows you to specify notification parameters for paging. Figure 1–9 Administrator Notification Preferences: Paging n Carrier: After a paging server is specified by a super administrator and the name of the paging carrier service and the corresponding paging carriers have been configured, select the name of the paging carrier service from the pull-down list. n PIN: Enter the PIN for your paging carrier. This entry is only required for alphanumeric pagers.
  • 40. Managing Enterprise Manager Administrators n Limit message length: Allows you to specify the maximum message length of paging notifications. By default, this length is set to 256 characters. n Current Definition: Displays the current settings for format and content of paging notifications. To set or change these parameters, expand the Paging object in the tree list. You can select format and content options for the Message Body. You can further expand the Message Body object to specify options at the Per Event Test level. n Test: Click the Test button to check the validity of the paging configuration. For alphanumeric pagers, enter the PIN number. For numeric pagers 700, is sent. Click on the Send button to send a test page to the specified pager. A message informs you of the status of the test page. If the test fails, check the log file. If tracing is enabled for paging, you can also view the paging trace log file in the ORACLE_HOMEsysmanlog directory on the machine which has the paging server. Paging Status Codes for Numeric Pages Numeric pages need to be interpreted as follows: For job notifications, you will receive a 3 digit number which indicates the job status. For event notifications you will receive the status code. The event status and job status codes are listed as follows: 100 = Job Started 200 = Job Completed 300 = Job Failed 400 = Job Deleted 500 = Event Cleared 600 = Event Warning 700 = Event Alert 800 = Event Node Down 900 = Event Unknown 1000 = Event Assignee Changed 1-18 Oracle Enterprise Manager Administrator’s Guide
  • 41. Managing Enterprise Manager Administrators Email/Paging Message Body Definition This page allows you to select the content and format for the body of the email or page message. By default, Name, and Status are selected. You use the left/right arrows to move items back and forth between the Available and Selected lists. Figure 1–10 Administrator Notification Preferences: Email/Paging Body Expanding the Message Body object in the navigator and selecting per Test allows you to use a subset of the following option settings on a per test basis. See "Email Subject" on page 1-16 for more information on manipulating message content. Console 1-19 n Available: Lists available content. n Selected: Lists currently selected content. n Use Abbreviated Format: For Type (Job or Event), Status, and Service Type, you can select the Use Abbreviated Format option. When selected abbreviations are used in the Subject line. The following abbreviations are used by the system: Service Type n DB for Database n LSR for Listener n N for Node
  • 42. Managing Enterprise Manager Administrators Status n ST for Started n CO for Completed n F for Failed n D for Deleted n W for Warning n A for Alert n C for Cleared n NU for Node Unreachable n R for Reassign Timestamp Format This option is available if Timestamp is chosen from the Selected list. You use the pull-down menu to select one of the pre-defined formats. Do not include titles When selected, classification titles such as Status, Service Name, and Timestamp are omitted from the message. Append job output When selected job output is appended to the end of the notification. For instances where job output is large, you may want to specify a limit to the message length. If the job output pushes the notification length past the specified limit, then the job output will be truncated, not the message itself. Paging Server This page lists all available paging servers currently recognized by Enterprise Manager. 1-20 Oracle Enterprise Manager Administrator’s Guide
  • 43. Managing Enterprise Manager Administrators Console 1-21 Figure 1–11 Administrator Notification Preferences: Paging Server The multi-column list consists of two columns: The name of the paging server and whether the paging server is currently being used. Below the list are three icons that allow you to perform the following operations: n Ping a paging server to see if it can be contacted. n Add a new paging server to the list. n Remove a server from the list. Except for the Add Paging Server icon, the icons are grayed out unless a specific paging server is selected from the list. For information on how to add a paging server, see "Setting Up Paging" on page 1-29 and "Adding a Paging Server" on page 1-30.
  • 44. Managing Enterprise Manager Administrators Schedule Use this property sheet page to indicate when you want to be paged and/or e-mailed. Determine the day, hour, and the method of notification. You will receive notifications only on the objects you have permission to access. Figure 1–12 Administrator Notification Schedule An administrator can be notified by email, paging, or both email and paging. Paging is recommended for urgent jobs, events, or critical systems. To determine notifications: 1. Select None, Pager, Email, or Email and Pager at the bottom of the dialog. 2. Click in the appropriate day/hour to set the notification method for that time period. 3. Repeat steps 1 and 2 for each notification method. If you want to set the same notification an entire day or an hour of the day, click on the heading for that row or column. For example, if you want to set up paging notification for Saturday, click on the Sat heading after you have selected Pager at the bottom of the screen. You can also drag the cursor to "paint" across multiple cells. 1-22 Oracle Enterprise Manager Administrator’s Guide
  • 45. Managing Enterprise Manager Administrators Console 1-23 Permissions Use this property sheet page to determine the default permissions you want to assign to other administrators for the objects you create. This allows other Enterprise Manager administrators to share objects, such as events and jobs, that you have created. If you work on a team, this page lets you assign access privileges to all the members of the team at one time. When an object is created by an administrator, that administrator is the owner and automatically has full permissions. The owner’s permissions cannot be modified. Figure 1–13 Administrator Default Permissions Access-control permissions apply to event, group, and job objects. When these objects are created, the default permissions are assigned to other Enterprise Manager administrators according to the selections in this page. These initial permissions can be overridden with the Permissions page of the object’s property sheet. For more information, see the following sections: n "Group Permissions Page" on page 3-6 n "Job Permissions Page" on page 4-18 n "Event Permissions Page" on page 5-35
  • 46. Managing Enterprise Manager Administrators Note: Changing your default permissions does not retroactively change permissions on existing objects. The levels of permission that you can assign to an Enterprise Manager administrator are: None This permission does not allow the administrator to view this object anywhere. View This permission allows the administrator to view the object, inspect object properties, view job/event status and outputs, and receive notifications if the object is an event. Modify This permission allows the administrator to edit the object’s properties except those reserved for Full permission. Full This permission allows the administrator to delete the object, modify permissions for other administrators, and change the ownership of the object. Notify This permission allows the administrator to receive enhanced notifications on the objects. Notify permission cannot be assigned if the administrator’s permission level is set to None. 1-24 Oracle Enterprise Manager Administrator’s Guide
  • 47. Managing Enterprise Manager Administrators Note: Individual instances of an Oracle Parallel Server are listed. Oracle recommends that all instances of a Parallel server use the same preferred credentials as the Oracle Parallel Server. Important: Changes to the Preferred Credentials will not be automatically propagated to previously registered jobs and events. In order to update these jobs and events with the new preferred credentials, you must de-register and subsequently re-register the jobs and events. Console 1-25 Preferred Credentials The Administrator Preferred Credentials property sheet page displays a list of services in the network, along with the service type and the administrator name for accessing the service. The property sheet page is accessed with the Administrator Preferences option of the System menu. Each row in the list of the property sheet includes: n Service Name n Service Type (such as database, listener, or node) n Credentials (Check mark indicating you have already specified connection information. The check mark is either grey (credential set in a previous session) or green (credential set in the current session). You can click on a column heading to sort on that column. See Figure 1–14, "Administrator Preferred Credentials"for an illustration of the property sheet. Also, the Intelligent Agent authenticates the user name and password for all jobs and many events that it runs. These credentials are used when you access a network service in the Navigator or Group, and when running jobs and registering events. If you do not set the preferred credentials correctly, jobs and events may fail. See "Job Credentials" on page 4-4 and "Registering Events" on page 5-6 for more information. Oracle recommends that if some services of a particular type require the same credentials, use the <DEFAULT> credentials selection for that service type to have those credentials used by all services of that type.
  • 48. Managing Enterprise Manager Administrators For example, if Administrator_1 has a username and password of foo/bar on all the databases that he manages, the administrator needs to enter foo/bar as his credentials in the <DEFAULT> database entry. All database administration tasks will use these <DEFAULT> credentials. Furthermore, if the administrator has just one database which requires different credentials from foo/bar, he can enter different credentials for that database by selecting that specific database. For NT users, you must set the preferred credentials for the node (where the NT Intelligent Agent resides) to be the same as the user that is set up to "Logon as a batch job." Figure 1–14 Administrator Preferred Credentials Setting Administrator Credentials Select any row to update the credential fields for the object identified in the row. Username Enter the username. This field is required if a password needs to be entered. Password Enter the password associated with the username. 1-26 Oracle Enterprise Manager Administrator’s Guide
  • 49. Managing Enterprise Manager Administrators Confirm Password Confirm the password. Role (Database only) Select the role from the pull-down list. You need to login with the SYSDBA or SYSOPER role to start up or shut down a database. Changes to the credentials are recorded when you move to another line. When you are finished, save all your updates by clicking the OK button at the bottom of the property sheet. Console 1-27 Saving Logon Information as a Preferred Credential Another convenient way to specify Preferred Credentials for discovered services is to select the Save as Preferred Credential option when manually connecting to a service from the Console or integrated application. For example, you attempt to access a newly discovered database from the Console Navigator. Enterprise Manager displays the Connect Information dialog so that you can log in to the database. You type in the requisite information and check the Save as Preferred Credential option. Click OK to log on to the database and save the logon information as a Preferred Credential for this service. Saving the Contents of a List Save list allows you to extract information from a multi-column list (such as the Job or Event History panes) and save it in a variety of formats (text, HTML, or Comma-Separated-Values). For example, you can select one or more entries in the Event History pane. By selecting the Report Event History from the Events Menu, you can save the list information (Event, Target, Target Type, Severity, Date/Time, Assigned To, Owner) to an HTML file. The dialog consists of the following elements: File Name The name and directory to which you want to save the file information. Browse Displays the File Save to dialog. Choose the desire location and file name. Format Select HTML (table), Text row, or comma-separated-values (used by spreadsheets or other applications).
  • 50. Configuring and Starting the Paging Service View Active only when HTML is selected as the file format, allows you to view the generated HTML table through the default browser for your system. Rows n All (total number) rows – Export all rows in the multi-column list. n Selected (number of rows selected) rows – Export only selected rows in the multi-column list. Configuring and Starting the Paging Service If you want to be notified via paging in Oracle Enterprise Manager, you must explicitly install the Oracle Enterprise Manager Paging Server. This paging service is not installed as part of the base Oracle Enterprise Manager installation; it is installed through a Custom installation type. Refer to the installation guide provided with the database release for more details. Note: The Paging Server is only available on Windows NT or Windows 2000, but the ability to configure it is available on both Unix and Windows platforms. Only one paging service installation is required if you wish to utilize paging for notification purposes within Oracle Enterprise Manager. The paging service supports either numeric or alphanumeric pagers and utilizes the following paging service protocols (for alphanumeric pagers only). n TAP (Telocator Alphanumeric Protocol) n GSM (Global System for Mobile Communications) n FLEXTD To use alphanumeric paging, you need a phone number to call for the modem at the paging service provider and the pin number for your pager. Contact your paging service provider for the phone number to call. It is the number for the modem for sending pages. Your paging provider may also have a feature for sending email to your pager. If you have that feature, you can configure an administrator's preferences for 1-28 Oracle Enterprise Manager Administrator’s Guide
  • 51. Configuring and Starting the Paging Service notification to use email, and specify your pager as the email receiver. This method will also work with many providers for sending notification to a cell phone. Configuration of the paging service is not automatic. Follow the steps below to configure paging. Note: You must have a modem installed on the Windows NT or Windows 2000 machine that you are running the paging service. Console 1-29 Setting Up Paging On the machine from which you want to run the paging service, follow these instructions: 1. Install a modem. 2. Specify modem settings. a. Go to Start > Settings > Control Panel > Modems. b. Specify how your calls are dialed by clicking Dialing Properties from the Modems Properties page and then setting the following parameters: * From what area code you are dialing * From what country you are dialing * How you access an outside line. If you are not required to dial a number to access an outside line, leave this field blank. c. Set the Maximum Speed parameter by clicking Properties from the Modems Properties page. Oracle recommends setting this parameter to 9600K Baud; however, you should find the baud rate setting optimal for your system. Note: A baud rate higher than 9600 may result in the loss of data with the paging service carrier. The baud rate of 9600 for your modem is only a recommendation. You must find the baud rate setting which is optimal for your system.
  • 52. Configuring and Starting the Paging Service 3. Install the Oracle Enterprise Manager Paging Server. Refer to the installation guide provided with the database release for information. 4. Start the Paging Service. a. Go to Start > Settings > Control Panel > Services. b. Select the Oracle<ORACLE_HOME_NAME>PagingService and click Start. You can also start the paging service by typing the following at a command prompt oemctrl start paging Adding a Paging Server Note: Only Super Administrators can add a paging server; this functionality is not available to regular administrators. 1. From the Enterprise Manager Console, select Preferences from the System menu. The Edit Administrator preferences property sheet appears. Click the Notification tab to access the Notification page. 2. From the Notification page, highlight Paging Servers from the tree list. 3. Right-click Paging Servers to obtain the pop-up menu and choose the Add item or click the Add Server icon on the detail view to the right. 4. When the Add Paging Server dialog appears, enter the name of the machine on which the paging server runs. For example, pjlee-pc. 5. Press the OK button. If the Console is unable to find the paging server with the given hostname, an error appears, saying "VD-4362: Could not add paging server, as paging server <hostname> could not be reached." If the paging server is found, a new paging server object is added under the "Paging Server" object in the tree list. The new paging server will have no paging carrier. You must add at least one paging carrier in order for paging to function. 1-30 Oracle Enterprise Manager Administrator’s Guide
  • 53. Configuring and Starting the Paging Service Note: Only Super Administrators can add a new paging carrier; the functionality is not available to regular administrators. Console 1-31 Adding Paging Carrier 1. From the Notification page, highlight Paging Carriers from the tree list. 2. Right-click Paging Carriers to obtain the pop-up menu and choose the Add Carrier item or click the Add Carrier icon on the detail view to the right. 3. When the Add New Paging Carrier dialog appears, fill in the fields. Once defined, you can view the paging carriers by expanding the appropriate paging server and carrier objects in the tree list. n Name Paging carrier name. Field accepts alphanumeric characters and underscores. n Type Type of paging carrier. Enterprise Manager supports alphanumeric or numeric. n Protocol TAP, FLEXTD, or GSM. Protocol selection is only available if the carrier type is Alphanumeric. n Connection Properties * Country Code: The country code used to dial the pager if the call is international. * Area Code: Area code used the by country in which the pager is located. * Number: Local dialing number of the pager. * Suffix: Permits identification of voice messages from a paging carrier and allows the person being paged to choose from several options when using a touch tone phone. For example, commas can be used as pauses. The Suffix field accepts the following characters: integers, commas, pound sign, and the star (asterisk).
  • 54. Configuring and Starting the Paging Service Note: This option is only available if the paging carrier type is set to Numeric. n Dialing Properties * Timeout (in seconds): Maximum dialing time allowed for a successful page. * Delay (in seconds): Time delay before dialing. 4. Press the OK button. Specifying Paging Notification Preferences While the Super Administrator configured the paging server and its carrier(s), all administrators who want page notifications must specify their own notification preferences by following the steps below: 1. Log on to the Console. a. Go to System > Preferences > Notification. Then highlight Paging on the tree list to view Paging Preferences on the detail view to the right. b. Select a paging service carrier from the drop down list. c. Enter the Pin number for your alphanumeric pager. If you have a numeric pager, leave this field blank. d. Test the paging notification by clicking the Test button. 2. Set your notification schedule. If you neglect to do so, you will not receive page notifications. a. Within the Console go to System > Preferences > Schedule b. Choose when you want to be notified by paging. If you do not select any days/hours to be notified by paging, you will never receive a page. Refer to the Oracle Enterprise Manager Administrator’s Guide for instructions on how to set up the notification schedule. 1-32 Oracle Enterprise Manager Administrator’s Guide
  • 55. Configuring and Starting the Paging Service Note: Only Super Administrators can remove a paging server; the functionality is not available to regular administrators. Note: Only Super Administrators can view information on a paging server; the functionality is not available to regular administrators. Console 1-33 Other Paging Server Operations Removing a Paging Server 1. From the Notification page, highlight the paging server object you want to remove from the tree list. 2. Right-click the paging server object to obtain the pop-up menu and choose the Remove item or click the Remove Server icon on the detail view to the right. A warning dialog appears, saying "Remove Paging Server <servername>?" 3. Click "yes". The Console will check if anyone is currently using any carrier from the paging server. If not, all paging carriers will be removed, and the paging server will be removed as well. Otherwise an error dialog appears, saying "The paging server cannot be removed because at least one carrier is being used. Viewing Information on Paging Server From the Notification page, left-click the paging server object. The detail view to the right will show information about that paging server such as the paging carrier names, the pager types, the protocol, and whether or not they are in use. Pinging a Paging Server Note: Only Super Administrators can ping a paging server; the functionality is not available to regular administrators.
  • 56. Configuring and Starting the Paging Service To check the status of the paging server, follow the steps below: 1. From the Notification page, highlight the paging server you want to ping. 2. Right-click the paging server object to obtain the pop-up menu and choose the Ping item or click the Ping Server icon on the detail view to the right. Querying Status of the Paging Service To check the paging status, right-mouse click the carrier name to access the Ping Paging Service item in the context-sensitive menu. Stopping the Paging Service Stop the paging service from the Windows NT or Windows 2000 Services Control Panel. You can also stop paging service by typing oemctrl stop paging Removing a Paging Carrier Note: Only Super Administrators can remove a paging carrier; the functionality is not available to regular administrators. 1. From the Notification page, highlight the paging carrier object you want to remove from the tree list. 2. Right-click the paging carrier object to obtain the pop-up menu and choose the Remove item or click the Remove Carrier icon on the detail view to the right. A message appears, saying "Remove Paging carrier <carrier name>?" 3. Click "yes." The Console checks if anyone is current using the carrier. If not, it will be removed and the notification tree updated. 1-34 Oracle Enterprise Manager Administrator’s Guide
  • 57. Creating Enterprise Manager Reports Note: Only Super Administrators can edit a paging carrier; the functionality is not available to regular administrators. Console 1-35 Editing a Paging Carrier 1. From the Notification page, select the paging carrier object. The paging carrier information appears in the detail view to the right. 2. Make the changes. 3. Click the OK button. The Console will validate all the carrier information, update the notification tree. All administrators who have selected to use this carrier will automatically inherit the new changes. If the validation fails, an error dialog appears stating which entry failed to validate and what type of input is expected. When you click the "OK" button in the error dialog, all the paging carrier’s entries are set back to their original values. Viewing Information about a Paging Carrier From the Notification page, select the paging carrier object. The paging carrier information appears in the detail view to the right. Testing a Paging Carrier 1. Right-click the paging carrier object and choose the "Test" menu item. A dialog appears, asking for the PIN. 2. Enter the PIN if your pager is an alphanumeric pager and click "OK" to continue. If it is a numeric pager, leave this field blank. Creating Enterprise Manager Reports The Report Wizard allows you to generate pre-defined reports for all managed targets. The Enterprise Manager Job system is used to schedule and execute the task of generating the actual report. For this reason, the prerequisites for successful Job system operation apply to correct functioning of the Report Wizard: node preferred credentials must be set, network communication between the Management Server and the agent/managed target, the Management Server must be operational.
  • 58. Creating Enterprise Manager Reports IMPORTANT: You must be running an Intelligent Agent version 8.1.7 in order to generate a report. If you are running an earlier version of the Intelligent Agent, you need to apply an Agent update patch. The patch consists of a TAR file containing the necessary images and the HTML templates needed to generate the reports. See the README.agent.reports file located in your ORACLE_ HOME/sysman/admin directory for installation instruction. The patch file (agent_reports.tar) is also located in this directory. Enterprise Report versus Database Configuration/Status Reports Oracle Enterprise Manager allows you to generate two types of reports: Enterprise Reports and Database Configuration/Status Reports. Enterprise Report (General Systems) The Enterprise Report provides an overview of the information contained within the Enterprise Manager repository. This report covers the includes the following information: n The setup and configuration of the environment Including the administrators, the discovered agent, the job and event library, and the available Data Gatherer collections. n The current state of environment This topology overview provides details on the state of all services known in the repository such as outstanding alerts, job information and basic configuration of the service. An Enterprise Report cannot be customized. Database Configuration/Status Report A Database Configuration/Status Report may contain schema, instance, storage, and security information, depending on what options you select in the Generate Report dialog. This report can either be generated immediately, locally on the client machine, or it can be scheduled as a job. If you schedule a Database Configuration/Status Report, information from the Enterprise Report is included in a single report. If an Enterprise Report has been 1-36 Oracle Enterprise Manager Administrator’s Guide
  • 59. Creating Enterprise Manager Reports previously generated, and you then create a Database Configuration Report, database configuration information is added to the existing Enterprise Report. Note: Although the Report Wizard is available to all administrators, the Report Wizard’s Schedule button is enabled for super administrators only Console 1-37 Requirements The following general requirement must be met to generate a report: n Enterprise Manager Repository views: All the HTML reports are based on these repository views, which are created on top of the repository, are generated by default by the Enterprise Manager Configuration Assistant starting from Oracle Enterprise Manager Release 2.2. n Enterprise Manager Release 2.2 or higher since it will have the ability to schedule the reports as a job n Intelligent Agent version 8.1.7 or higher Launching the Report Wizard The Report Wizard can be launched in two ways, each generating a different type of report. n By choosing Enterprise Report from the System main menu to create an Enterprise Report (user must have ‘super administrator’ privileges). n By choosing Reports from the Navigator main menu and clicking Schedule from the Generate Report dialog to create a Database Configuration or Database Status Report. (available to all administrators). Creating Enterprise Reports To create an Enterprise Report, perform the following steps: 1. Choose "Report" from the Console Navigator menu to display the Reports Wizard. The wizard allows you to schedule the job for execution. Depending on the size of the Enterprise Manager repository and the need for up-to-date information, you can change the scheduling interval of the reports. During the creation of the job, the wizard will ask for two parameters:
  • 60. Creating Enterprise Manager Reports n The node which will generate the reports. To minimize network traffic and make the setup easy and convenient, use the Intelligent Agent on the machine with the web server to generate the report. The generated HTML files will therefore be usable by the web server immediately. n The output directory where to place the reports. The reports are first generated in the $TEMP directory. To avoid partial updates and partially refreshed information, either copy the entire set of HTML files from the TEMP directory to their final destination after successful completion or remove all files if the job cannot complete successfully. 2. After the job has completed once, add the output directory where the HTML resides to your web server configuration so that it can be recognized as a virtual directory. Creating DBA Studio Reports From DBA studio reports, specific database reports can be scheduled as a job. This job follows the same conventions and has the same requirements as the system reports. If there is no job currently scheduled for the system reports, the DBA Studio reports will generate this job and schedule it, together with the job to generate the database report. If DBA Studio finds the job for the system reports, it will use the settings of this job (the Intelligent Agent to be used to generate the report, and the output directory) for its job definition. The database reports can be scheduled in two ways. From the Console 1. Select a database in the Navigator tree. 2. Connect to that database. 3. From the Navigator menu, select "Report." From DBA studio (using the Management Server) 1. Select a database in the Navigator tree. 2. Connect to that database. 1-38 Oracle Enterprise Manager Administrator’s Guide
  • 61. Creating Enterprise Manager Reports 3. From the Object menu, select "Report" or right-click and select the "Report" item Console 1-39 from the context-sensitive menu.
  • 62. Creating Enterprise Manager Reports 1-40 Oracle Enterprise Manager Administrator’s Guide
  • 63. 2 Navigator The Navigator graphically displays network objects and allows you to administer the objects. The Navigator tree displays a direct view of the network’s nodes and services, the objects they contain, and the relationships among objects. The topics discussed in this chapter include: Navigator 2-1 n Navigator Pane n Navigator Menu n Discovering Services n Manipulating Objects in the Navigator n Apache Web Servers n Paging/Email Blackout n Removing a Node from the Navigator n Node Removal Failure
  • 64. Navigator Pane Navigator Pane The Navigator pane provides: n Identification of the objects or services on nodes in the managed environment. n Views of the objects in a network environment and the relationships among the objects. By expanding an object, you can display any objects it contains. n Methods of accessing and launching administration tools on the objects. n A source of objects with which to populate groups. n A source of objects upon which to launch DBA tools and other integrated applications. n A source of objects for copying with the drag and drop method. The Navigator window can be hidden or shown by selecting Show Navigator Pane in the Console View menu. You can also hide or show the pane by clicking on the Navigator icon in the Console toolbar. Populating the Navigator Tree The Navigator tree is populated with objects by selecting Discover Nodes from the Navigator menu. The types of services in the network may include, but are not limited to: n Databases n Groups n Listeners n Nodes n Web Servers Expanding Objects in the Navigator Each object type in the Navigator tree is identified by an icon and name. If there is a ’+’ or ’-’ to the left of an object’s icon and name, the object is a container that can be expanded to display other objects. A container that is represented by a folder icon is a logical grouping, or collection, of one specific type of object, such as databases. Other containers are objects that hold multiple types of objects. See Figure 2–1, "Navigator Menu and Window" for an illustration of a Navigator pane. 2-2 Oracle Enterprise Manager Administrator’s Guide
  • 65. Navigator Pane The top-most object in the Navigator tree is the network container. The network folder can contain: Navigator 2-3 n Databases folder n Groups folder n Listeners folder n Nodes folder n Folders for additional services discovered. You can expand tree containers to view the objects and relationships in the environment. For example, you can expand a node to view the databases and listeners on the node. If you expand a database, you can access common administration areas such as schema, instance, and security. When a connection is made to a database, an icon displays on the database in the tree. See "DBA Studio" on page 6-2 for more information on integrated database administration tools that are accessible from specific Navigator objects.
  • 66. Navigator Pane Figure 2–1 Navigator Menu and Window Viewing Specific Tree Objects In large, complex environments you may not want to view the entire network system in one tree. The Navigator has been designed to be highly flexible for viewing objects. With the Split View menu option, you can split the Navigator tree into views that are displayed in separate pages in the Navigator window. Simply click on the tab of a page to move the page and its contents to the front of the Navigator window. Launching Tools To launch a database tool in the context of a database or database object, select the object in the Navigator tree that you want to access. You can then execute a tool from the Tools menu or with the Related Tools option of the right-mouse menu. You are connected to the database according to the preferred credentials that have been set up for the database. If connection to the database fails for any reason, the Database Connect Information dialog box displays. At that point, you can enter the 2-4 Oracle Enterprise Manager Administrator’s Guide
  • 67. Navigator Menu requisite information and optionally save that information as a preferred credential. See "Preferred Credentials" on page 1-25 for information. Navigator 2-5 Navigator Menu The Navigator menu allows you to manage objects in the Navigator pane. The menu options are enabled according to the object selected in the Navigator tree. Usually the Create, Create Like, Edit, and Remove menu options are available when an object is selected. See Figure 2–1, "Navigator Menu and Window" for an illustration of the Navigator menu. Clicking on an object in the Navigator with the right mouse button, displays a context-sensitive menu of all the options you can use to manipulate the object, as well as related tools. For information on operations for an object type, see the chapter in this guide that discusses the specific application that manipulates the object type. See Chapter 6, "DBA Management Pack" for an overview of the database application tools. Create Allows you to create an object of a specified type. Create Like Allows you to create a copy of the selected object in the Navigator. Edit Allows you to alter or edit the object selected in the Navigator. Remove Allows you to delete all occurrences of the selected object in the Navigator. If you remove a node from the Navigator tree, the node and all its services are removed from the Navigator tree. If you remove a database, listener, or other service object from the Navigator tree the object appears again in the Navigator tree when the node that contains the service is rediscovered. Discover Nodes Discovers services on a node in the network. You can also display the status of network services. See "Discovering Services" on page 2-7 for more information. Refresh All Nodes Refreshes services for all discovered nodes.
  • 68. Navigator Menu Paging/Email Blackout Allows a super administrator to specify paging and email blackouts for specified targets and/or services that have been previously discovered in the Navigator. Paging/email blackouts allow a super adminstrator to schedule deactivation of enhanced notification (email/paging), thus preventing Enterprise Manager administrators from being flooded with emails and pages if a managed target/service is brought down. Ping Agent Attempts to contact the Intelligent Agent on a specified node. If it fails, either the node is down or the Intelligent Agent isn’t running. If either of these is true, no Job or Event notification will come through. Split View Creates a new view page in the Navigator window that contains only the currently selected object, such as a single folder, group, or user. This feature allows you to create separate views that display specific objects. For example, to create a new view that only contains the DEMO database: 1. Select the DEMO database in the tree. 2. Select the Split View menu option to create a separate view page in the Navigator pane. 3. Click on the tab of the page to move the page and its contents to the front of the Navigator pane. Remove Split View Removes the current split view from the Navigator. Make sure the view that you want to delete is at the front of the Navigator pane. Find Locates discovered databases within the Navigator Tree. It is available when you select a Database or Node icon on the tree. Report Allows you to generate an HTML database configuration, status, or Enterprise Manager Repository report. Application SQL History Displays SQL statements produced by DBA Studio. This option allows you to view the last 100 SQL statements (maximum) executed by the application you are using (i.e., DBA Studio, Schema Management, and others) against the selected database. 2-6 Oracle Enterprise Manager Administrator’s Guide
  • 69. Discovering Services SQL Logging Allows you to log SQL in a permanent status. The SQL Logging function allows you to specify the SQL logging file information and options. When you are connected to the Management Server, you can query the log. You must be logged in as super-administrator in order to enable and disable SQL Logging. View SQL Log Allows you to view the contents of a SQL log. All normal users can view the their own SQL logs. If you are logged in as super-administrator, you can view the SQL logs of any user. You must be logged in as super-administrator to purge a log file. Navigator 2-7 Discovering Services The Navigator provides service discovery functions for identifying network services and populating the Navigator tree through the Discovery Wizard. Figure 2–2 Discovery Wizard The Discovery Wizard searches the network for the nodes you specify. If that node has an Oracle Intelligent Agent running, it will be added to the Enterprise Manager Console Navigator for management along with any services running on that node. You will be able use these services as targets in jobs, events, and groups.
  • 70. Discovering Services If there is no Oracle Intelligent Agent running, you may perform a manual configuration. This allows you to define an Oracle database on that node so that it appears in the Console Navigator. While manual configuration permits database access from the Navigator, its use is not recommended since Enterprise Manager services, such as jobs and events, will not be available. Figure 2–3 Discovery Wizard: Manual Configuration When refreshing an existing node, the Discovery Wizard verifies and updates the list of services on a node that had been previously discovered. If the node was previously Manually Configured, the Discovery Wizard will check if that node now has an Oracle Intelligent Agent and if so, provide that information with the option to discover using that Intelligent Agent, or to update the previous configuration. Note: Services on the machine where the Management Server is running are automatically discovered when you start the Console and connect to the Management Server. Adding a Service To discover new services, choose Discover Nodes from the Console Navigator menu to call up the Discovery Wizard. Any services running on that node will, if successfully discovered, appear in the Navigator. The Discovery Wizard guides you 2-8 Oracle Enterprise Manager Administrator’s Guide
  • 71. Discovering Services through the service discovery process. For more information on service discovery and refresh, refer to Oracle Enterprise Manager online help. Refreshing a Service Refreshing a node verifies and updates the list of services on a node that has been previously discovered. You can refresh the discovery of a node by selecting a node from the Navigator, clicking the right mouse button, and choosing Refresh Node from the context-sensitive menu. To refresh an existing service, choose Refresh Nodes from the Console Navigator menu to call up the Refresh Wizard. The Refresh Wizard performs a "rediscovery" of any node selcted in the Console Navigator. This menu option is greyed out until a specific node is selected from the Navigator Nodes folder. Removing a Service Select a node or service from the Console Navigator. Using the right-mouse button, choose Delete from the context-sensitive menu. Navigator 2-9 Pinging the Intelligent Agent Pinging the Intelligent Agent on a monitored node allows you to check whether the Management Server can communicate with the Intelligent Agent on a monitored node. Proper Intelligent Agent operation is required for successful service discovery. If discovery is successful, the discovered node and services appear in the Navigator tree. If discovery has failed, an error message displays. The following are common problems if the service discovery has failed: n The node must have an Oracle Intelligent Agent started and running. n TCP/IP network protocol must be used. n If a database has not been discovered, make sure an entry for the database is in the tnsnames.ora file on the node where the Intelligent Agent is running. On a UNIX platform, check the oratab file. n If a database has not been discovered, you may need to stop and restart the Intelligent Agent if the database was not configured or installed when the Intelligent Agent was last started. When the Intelligent Agent starts, database entries are written to the services.ora file in the ORACLE_ HOME/network/agent directory (Unix example).
  • 72. Manipulating Objects in the Navigator Determining Node Properties Since Enterprise Manager allows you to manage a heterogeneous environment, there will be situations where you may need to determine operational properties of that node (network name, operating system and version, and Intelligent Agent version). For example, you may want to find out which version of the Intelligent Agent is running on each node within your enterprise to determine which nodes require Intelligent Agent updates. To determine node properties: 1. Select the desired node in the Navigator. 2. Using the context-sensitive menu (right mouse button), choose Properties. A popup window displaying the node name, operating system and version (Intelligent Agent version 8.1.7 is required to determine operating system information), and Intelligent Agent version, 3. Click OK to dismiss the popup. Manipulating Objects in the Navigator The Navigator interface provides easy manipulation of the services and objects in your managed network from the Enterprise Manager Console. From the Navigator, you can apply some or all functions available from the Console and any integrated applications to selected objects. Administering Objects To administer an object, select the object in the Navigator tree and choose the administration task from the Navigator menu, or use the menu options available when you click the right mouse button on the object. The menu options available vary according to the object selected. See "Navigator Menu" on page 2-5 for more information. When you create or edit an object, the property sheet for that object displays. For information on the property sheets, see the chapter on the DBA tool that administers the object. Copying Navigator Objects You can drag and drop some objects in the navigator to make copies of the object in different locations. For example, you can drag and drop a database user or role from one database to another to add that user or role to another user. However, if you drag and drop a group that resides within another group to a different group, it will move the group instead of copying it. 2-10 Oracle Enterprise Manager Administrator’s Guide
  • 73. Apache Web Servers Important: When running on UNIX, if the web server is listenting on a port number less than 1024, the administrator must have root privileges in order to submit startup or shutdown jobs to the server. Navigator 2-11 Apache Web Servers Apache web server management allows you to discover and monitor the server’s operational status via the Event system. Additional functionality (extra job tasks and event tests) are available when the e-Business Management Tools (part of the Diagnostics Pack) are installed. Discovering Apache Web Servers You discover a web server as you would any other managed service from the Enterprise Manager Console. See "Discovering Services" on page 2-7. The discovery process does not require the web server to be running. Once discovered, you set the server access authorization through the Enterprise Manager Preferred Credentials (Node). See "Preferred Credentials" on page 1-25. Determining the Status of Apache Web Server Select Edit Web Server from the context-sensitive menu to display the Edit Web Server General Page. Information displayed pertaining to the selected web server includes: n Server Name: Server’s Internet host name. Example: xyz-machine.your_ company.com. If this machine does not have a registered DNS name, an IP address will appear. n Port: The network port to which the web server listens. n Version: Apache server version number. n Server Root Directory: The top-level directory where all web server-related files (configuration, error, and log files) are stored. n Configuration File Location: Location of the web server configuration file. n Status URL: The location of the Apache-generated HTML page that provides the current server statistics in an easily readable form.
  • 74. Paging/Email Blackout Paging/Email Blackout Paging/Email Blackout allows an administrator with super administrator privileges to suspend paging and email notifications for specified targets and/or services that have been previously discovered in the Navigator. Paging/email blackouts deactivate enhanced notification (email/paging), thus preventing Enterprise Manager administrators from being flooded with emails and pages if a managed target/service is brought down. For example, if a target is brought down on a regular basis for scheduled maintenance, a super administrator administrator can schedule a paging/email blackout for that target to prevent enhanced notification during the maintenance period. Specifying Total Paging/Email Blackout Total paging/email blackout specifies that a blackout be started immediately with an indefinite duration. The super administrator must manually turn off Total Paging/Email before any new blackout schedules can take effect or existing blackout schedules resume. To specify a total paging/email blackout: 1. Choose Paging/Email Blackout from the Navigator menu. 2. Check Total Paging/Email Blackout. 3. Click OK. Note: You can also access Total Paging/Email Blackout menu item from a target’s context-sensitive menu in the Enterprise Manager Navigator. Defining a Paging/Email Blackout To define a paging/email blackout for a specific node: 1. Select a target from the Navigator and then choose Paging/Email Blackout from the Navigator menu. Optionally, you can select an object in the Navigator and access Paging/Email Blackout through the context-sensitive menu. 2. Click Create. The requisite naming and scheduling UI are displayed. Important: Be sure that Total Paging/Email Blackout is not checked for either the specific service or its parent target. 2-12 Oracle Enterprise Manager Administrator’s Guide
  • 75. Paging/Email Blackout 3. Specify a Blackout Name. All Blackout names for this node/service must be unique. Note: the Target name reflects the node/service selected in the Navigator and is not editable from this dialog. Navigator 2-13 4. Select an Occurrence Select the frequency that you want the paging/email blackout to occur. The choices are Once, On Interval, On Day(s) of Week, and On Date(s) of Month. n Once—schedules the blackout only one time beginning and ending on the dates and times you choose. n On Interval—allows you to schedule a specific time interval between paging/email blackout periods. The interval can be a combination of hours and minutes, or number of days. Select the value you want to change and click on the scroll buttons. You can also type in a new value. Select an Effective Period in which your blackout schedule will be valid. n On Day(s) of Week—allows you to schedule the blackout on one or multiple days (Sunday, Monday, etc.) of the week. Click on the days of the week to select the days you want the blackout period scheduled and set a start time or duration. Select an Effective Period in which your blackout schedule will be valid. n On Day(s) of Month—allows you to schedule the blackout on one or multiple days (1 - 31) of the month. Click on the dates of the month to select the dates you want the blackout period scheduled and set a start time or duration. Select an Effective Period in which your blackout schedule will be valid. 5. Click OK. Important: When selecting On Day(s) of Month or On Day(s) of Week , be aware that each day terminates at 12:00 A.M. This is important when scheduling paging/email blackout periods that span the day change (12:00 A.M.). For example, if you wish to schedule a blackout that begins on Tuesday at 10:00 P.M and lasts for six hours, you must define two blackout periods: n Tuesday from 10:00 P.M. to 11:59 P.M. n Wednesday from 12:00 A.M. to 4:00 A.M.
  • 76. Paging/Email Blackout Making a Copy of an Existing Blackout Schedule To schedule a paging/email blackout schedule for a node that is identical to that of another managed node: 1. Choose Paging/Email Blackout from the Navigator menu. Optionally, you can select an object in the Navigator and access Paging/Email Blackout through the context-sensitive menu. 2. Select a Blackout Schedule entry from the Blackout Name list. 3. Click Create Like. A new entry is created in the list prefixed by "Copy of." 4. Modify the blackout period parameters (such as Blackout Name) as desired and click OK. Turning Blackout Schedules On and Off Once you have defined one or more paging/email blackout periods for a node/service, they persist in the Blackout Name list associated with the node/service until deleted. You can turn paging/email blackout on or off by checking the box located to the left of the individual blackout name. You can edit the Occurrence parameters to reflect the present date and time. Paging/email blackouts are set ON by default. Deleting Paging/Email Blackout Periods 1. Choose Paging/Email Blackout from the Navigator menu. Optionally, you can select an object in the Navigator and access Paging/Email Blackout through the context-sensitive menu. 2. Select the desired Blackout Name. 3. Click Delete. Viewing Blackout Periods Once you have defined blackout periods on multiple nodes, you can view them by selecting the desired target in the Console Navigator and choosing Paging/Email Blackout from the Navigator menu. If you select a high-level folder from the Navigator, such as Databases, Groups, or Nodes, rather that an individual target, all blackout periods defined in the container type are displayed. 2-14 Oracle Enterprise Manager Administrator’s Guide
  • 77. Node Removal Failure Navigator 2-15 Removing a Node from the Navigator Before removing a discovered node from the Enterprise Manager Navigator, you must remove all jobs and events submitted against that node. If the Intelligent Agent is down when you attempt to remove the node, and jobs and events have not been cleared previously, Enterprise Manager will allow you to remove the node. However, when the Intelligent Agent is restarted and the node re-discovered, the Intelligent Agent will be out of sync with the Oracle Management Server. The following example illustrates how this situation can occur. 1. You register an event with the Intelligent Agent on a managed node. 2. The Intelligent Agent goes down. 3. You remove the node from the Navigator without removing the event. 4. The Intelligent Agent is started and the node is rediscovered. 5. The Console Event window is clear. 6. You attempt to register the same event with the managed node. 7. Enterprise Manager displays a message stating the event is already registered even though it is not. The Intelligent Agent remembers the current status of jobs and events through a series of generated files. Oracle Intelligent Agents 8.0.6 (Oracle 8.0) and higher and Intelligent Agents 8.1.6 (Oracle 8.1) and higher automatically synchronize with the Oracle Management Server by removing old Intelligent Agent overhead files. For older versions of the Intelligent Agent, you must remove these files manually. To manually remove the Intelligent Agent overhead files: 1. Stop the Intelligent Agent (if it is currently running). 2. Go to the Intelligent Agent directory ($ORACLE_HOME/network/agent or $ORACLE_HOME/net80/agent (Windows NT)) 3. Delete files with the following extensions: .q, .jou, .inp 4. Restart the Intelligent Agent. Node Removal Failure Typically, node removal from the Navigator fails because of problems encountered by the Management Server. The following are the most probable causes.
  • 78. Node Removal Failure n The Management Server encountered an error condition while accessing the repository. Check the Management Server log for detailed error messages. (ORACLE_HOME/sysman/log/oms.log). If problem resolution is not obvious from the error messages, contact Oracle Support. n The Management Server could not open a database session to the repository. Ensure that the repository is up and running. You may have to shut down other Enterprise Manager applications that may be connected to the repository. Check the Management Server log for more detailed error messages. n Different DNS servers may resolve node names in different ways. For example, if a Management Server is running on a machine whose DNS server resolves a particular node as "A", the Management Server discovers the node as "A". Next, the Management Server is run on another machine whose DNS server resolves the same node as "B". If you switch back to running the Management Server on the first machine (originally resolved the node as "A"), attempting to remove the node from the Console Navigator will now fail since the repository entries will be out of sync. The solution is to run the Management Server on the machine from which you last discovered the node. In the example above, you would need to run the Management Server on the second machine (resolved the node as "B") and then remove the node from the Navigator. Always ensure that the DNS setup is consistent for all nodes where the Management Server is run. 2-16 Oracle Enterprise Manager Administrator’s Guide
  • 79. 3 Groups The Group system lets you organize the objects you manage into logical categories for more efficient management and administration. You can organize groups based on any criteria you determine, such as function, department, geographical location, or number of administrators. You can then place the groups on a map or graphical view of the network making it easy to locate, diagnose, and act on encountered conditions. The system also lets you assign jobs to groups and monitor their status. The Groups system is especially useful for managing environments with many databases and services. The topics discussed in this chapter include: Groups 3-1 n Group Pane n Group Menu n Managing Groups
  • 80. Group Pane Group Pane The Group pane provides an area for constructing a graphical custom view of the network environment. When all four panes are displayed, the Groups pane is located in the upper right corner of the console. See Figure 3–1, "Navigator and Group Panes" for an illustration of a Group pane. The Group pane can be hidden or shown by selecting Show/Hide Group pane in the Console View menu. You can also hide or show the pane by clicking on the Show/Hide Group Display button above the Console toolbar. Note that groups are also displayed in the Navigator pane. To display the members of a group in this pane, expand the group by clicking the "+" symbol next to the group name. Figure 3–1 Navigator and Group Panes 3-2 Oracle Enterprise Manager Administrator’s Guide
  • 81. Group Menu Groups 3-3 Group Menu The Group menu options allow you to perform such actions as create, modify, and remove groups. Create Group Adds a new group to the selected group. See "Adding Objects to a Group" on page 3-9 for more information. Create Group Like Copies an existing group. Edit Group Modifies an existing group. See "Modifying a Group" on page 3-10 for more information. Remove Group Removes an existing group from the current group, or deletes the group from the entire system. See "Removing Groups" on page 3-10 for more information. Remove Item From Group Deletes the selected item from the group pane. You can also delete an object from the group by selecting the object and pressing the Delete key. See "Removing Groups" on page 3-10 for more information.
  • 82. Managing Groups Managing Groups A group is a collection of objects, such as databases, listeners, or nodes, that share a common location or function. You can create, modify, and remove groups to further organize your network view. Different types of objects, like databases and listeners, can be grouped together. Groups appear in two places: the Navigator and the Group pane. A group is represented on the Navigator by an icon and a name. You can double-click on the group’s icon to expand the group, and view and update the group’s members and sub-groups. The Group pane gives you a more graphical view of the objects in the group and their individual status. You can also add background maps to the Group pane to better visualize locations of particular objects. Grouping nodes or services can simplify tasks that are applied to all members of the group. For example, in order to execute a SQL script on all the databases in the CHI_MAIL group, you can use the Job Scheduling services to schedule a job on the group. The job that executes the SQL script is scheduled on all the databases in the group. The job will not be applied to any other objects in the group. Creating a Group Note: Jobs and events applied to an object before it joins a group will not be applied to the group retroactively. You must re-apply any jobs or events you want to apply to the entire group. Important: If you submit a job or event against a group that contains a mixture of manually configured and discovered targets, the job or event will only be submitted against the discovered targets. If all the targets in a group are manually configured, then the job/event submitted against that group will fail. To create a group, select the Create Group menu item to display the Create a Group property sheet. The property sheet contains the General and Permissions pages (see Figure 3–2 and Figure 3–3). After you have completed the property sheet pages, 3-4 Oracle Enterprise Manager Administrator’s Guide
  • 83. Managing Groups click the OK button to save the group. The new group appears under Groups in the Navigator. The Group pane will remain empty. The new group is empty until you add objects to it. Dragging an object from the Navigator menu copies and pastes it into a group. Note that this action does not remove the object from the Navigator. In fact, you can add an object to any number of groups, and still be able to manipulate it individually, as well. To add an object to a group, select it and drag it over to the Group pane, or drag it over to a group folder in the Navigator pane. To add an existing group to the new group, or to another existing group, drag and drop the group from the Navigator into the group folder or the Group pane. An icon representing the object or group appears in the Navigator and in the Group pane. Groups 3-5 Figure 3–2 Create Group General Page Group General Page Group Name Enter a unique name for the new group in the Group Name field of the dialog box. Use a background image when viewing this group Check this option if you want to display an image in the background of the group pane. Sample files are provided in the oracle_ homeclassesoraclesysmanresourcesimages directory on the machine where the Management Server is located. If you want to use your own images, Oracle recommends that you add them to this directory.
  • 84. Managing Groups The sample images included are: n asia.gif n europe.gif n japan.gif n usa.gif n world.gif Do not specify a directory for graphics located in this directory. Specify only the file name, such as usa.gif. You can use .GIF or .JPG graphic files. If you check the box, enter the file name of the image in the Bitmap Relative URL field. When an image is added to a group, the file name is stored in the repository. Icons Determine whether you want to display large or small icons in the group. Group Permissions Page Determine the permissions that you want to assign to the group with the Permissions Page. This allows other users to view or modify the group. Any permissions assigned on this page over-write any user default permissions. See "Permissions" on page 1-23 for an explanation of the permissions that can be assigned. Figure 3–3 Group Permissions Page 3-6 Oracle Enterprise Manager Administrator’s Guide
  • 85. Managing Groups Groups 3-7 Manipulating Group Views Groups are populated by dragging and dropping databases, groups, nodes, listeners or any other discovered services from the Navigator into the Group pane. You can create, update, and save any number of groups. In addition, you can add a graphic as a background to the group for visual identification or to graphically show the location of nodes. For example, you can use a group drawing of a city or state for the background of your group. Double-clicking on a group in the Navigator pane opens the hierarchical list of its members. You can display groups in the Group pane by selecting the group name from the pull-down list in the Console toolbar. Monitoring Status The Group system provides an efficient way to monitor the alerts reported by the event system. If the object or group has events registered against it, a flag showing the state of the event condition is displayed. If an object in a group has more than one event registered against it, the flag will represent the most severe alert condition. n If the flag is green, there are no problems on the monitored objects. n If the flag is yellow, there is a condition detected that should be checked. n If the flag is red, there is a severe problem detected by an event and the object requires immediate attention. n If the flag is gray, the status of the object is unknown. For example, the UpDown event is registered to a database but the node is unavailable. The gray flag will only display if an up/down test is explicitly registered for the object. n If there is no flag, then the object is not being monitored. Note that groups within groups do not show a status monitor when the event is clear (green). n If there is a yellow hexagon, there is an error state (yellow hexagon). An error state indicates there is a problem with the evaluation of the event condition, as opposed to a threshold being met. Examples of error states are: registering an Archive Full event against a database in non-archivelog mode, registering an event that monitors segments but specifying a filter that excludes all available segments. Groups inherit the worst state of any of the members. If one service in a group is down, the group displays a grey flag.
  • 86. Managing Groups Note: For status monitors to display on a group or object, an Intelligent Agent must be running on the node where the object is located. See Chapter 5, "Events" for more information on events. Expanding Objects Some group objects, such as database objects and defined group objects, can be expanded in the Group pane by double-clicking on the object’s icon. You can double-click on some objects to open property sheets. The property sheets allow you to both view and alter the properties of the objects. You can double-click on databases to display property sheets. See Figure 3–1, "Navigator and Group Panes" for an illustration of an expanded node in the Group pane. Groups When you double-click on a group icon, the group expands to display the objects in the group. You can drag and drop objects from the Group, the Navigator, and other groups to add them to the group. You can delete objects from the group by selecting them and pressing the Delete key, or clicking the right mouse button and selecting Remove. Databases and Other Discovered Services When you double-click on a database or other discovered service, you connect to that service. The instance property sheet displays if that service is a database. If the connection to the database fails for any reason, the Login Information dialog box displays. See "Preferred Credentials" on page 1-25 for information on preferred credentials. Launching Tools from a Group You can launch a database tool using an object in the group. Select a database icon in the Group pane, then select a DBA tool from the Tools menu or launch palette. You are connected to the database according to the user credentials that have been set up for the system. See "Preferred Credentials" on page 1-25 for more information on user credentials. 3-8 Oracle Enterprise Manager Administrator’s Guide
  • 87. Managing Groups Groups 3-9 Adding Objects to a Group To add objects to a group, drag and drop the object from its location on the Navigator to the group—either the group folder on the Navigator or the group shown in the Group pane. Note: Only one copy of an item can exist in the group. When you add objects in a group, the updates are reflected in every occurrence of the group. Any updates to a group are automatically saved as the updates are made. Deleting Objects from the Group Pane To delete objects in a group pane: 1. Double-click on a group icon in a group to expand the group. 2. Select an object in the group and press the Delete key to delete an object from a group. To delete objects from a group in the Navigator: 1. Expand the group in the tree. 2. Select an object in the group and press the Delete key to delete an object from a group. Note: When you delete objects from a group, the updates are reflected in every occurrence of that group. Any updates to a group are automatically saved as the updates are made.
  • 88. Managing Groups Modifying a Group You can modify the properties of a group. 1. Select a group in the Navigator. 2. Select the Edit Group menu item to display the Edit Group dialog box. The name of the group is automatically entered in the name field. The name cannot be modified. 3. Modify the properties for the group. 4. Click the OK button when you have finished. Removing Groups There are two ways to remove a group: n Remove the group from within another group. This does not affect the existence of the group in the system or in any other groups. n Remove the group completely (delete). This removes the group from every group where it has been copied. After you select a group, there are four ways to remove it: n Delete the group completely by selecting Remove Group from the Group menu. n Delete the group completely by choosing a group (that is not inside another group) and selecting the Remove menu item from the group’s context menu. n Delete the group completely by choosing a group (that is not inside another group) and selecting the <DELETE> key. n Remove a sub-group from within another group by selecting Remove Item from the Group menu. This will remove the sub-group from the selected group, but will not affect the sub-group’s existence in other groups. n Remove a sub-group from within another group by selecting the Remove menu item from the group’s context menu. This will remove the sub-group from the selected group, but will not affect the sub-group’s existence in other groups. n Remove a sub-group from within another group by selecting the <DELETE> key. This will remove the sub-group from the selected group, but will not affect the sub-group’s existence in other groups. 3-10 Oracle Enterprise Manager Administrator’s Guide
  • 89. Managing Groups Groups 3-11 Example: Creating a Group The following example illustrates how to create a new database group. 1. Select Create Group from the Group menu to display the Create a Group dialog. 2. Enter a name for the new group in the Group Name field. 3. Check the Use Background Image box to add a graphic to the background. Enter a graphic name, or select one of the supplied images from the drop-down list. 4. Choose small icons for the group. 5. Set the permissions so all Enterprise Manager administrators can view but not modify the group. 6. Click on the Create button to create the new group. A folder for the new group appears in the Navigator. 7. Select the new group from the pull-down group list over the Group pane to display the group. 8. Expand the Databases branch of the Navigator. 9. Drag a database into the Group pane. 10. Drag and drop a listener into the new group folder in the Navigator. The new group can be added to other groups by dragging and dropping the group from the Navigator.
  • 90. Managing Groups 3-12 Oracle Enterprise Manager Administrator’s Guide
  • 91. 4 Jobs The Job system allows you to automate standard and repetitive tasks, such as executing a SQL script or executing an operating system command. With the Job system, you can create and manage jobs, share jobs with other administrators, schedule execution of jobs, and view information about the jobs. Jobs can be scheduled on a single node or multiple nodes in the network, provided that the node has an Intelligent Agent running on it. The topics discussed in this chapter include: Jobs 4-1 n Job Process n Job Pane n Job Menu n Creating, Modifying, or Viewing a Job n Oracle Job Tasks
  • 92. Job Process Job Process The Job process includes: 1. Creating a job. This involves: a. Determining the type and destination of the job. b. Determining the tasks. c. Determining task dependencies of the job. d. Determining the parameters for each task. e. Scheduling the times that the job executes. f. Assigning permissions to other administrators for notification purposes. 2. Submitting a job to the selected destinations in the network system. 3. Viewing the job history to review the results of the job. Job Tasks The Job system provides a variety of predefined job tasks, or you can submit your own tasks by executing a SQL*Plus script or running an operating system program. Job tasks are implemented in the Tool Command Language (Tcl) scripts with Oracle extensions (OraTcl) to include database-specific commands. You can write your own Tcl script and submit it with the Run Tcl job task. For more information on custom job scripts, see the Oracle Intelligent Agent User’s Guide. The tasks are grouped by the destination (target type) of the task: n Databases n Nodes n Listeners Note: All target types include Node tasks. The tasks allow you to perform such operations as: ¥ Execute operating system commands or shell scripts. ¥ Execute SQL and DBA commands. 4-2 Oracle Enterprise Manager Administrator’s Guide
  • 93. Job Process n Perform database administration tasks such as starting up and shutting down Jobs 4-3 Oracle databases. n Start up and shut down Listeners. See the online help for Oracle job tasks and "Oracle Job Tasks" on page 4-23 for information on Oracle predefined job tasks and their parameters. You can combine two or more tasks into one job, called a composite job. Composite jobs consist of separate tasks that are constructed such that some tasks may or may not execute upon completion of another task. For example, if a composite job consists of two tasks, starting up a database and then running a SQL script, you can specify that the script be run only if the database was successfully started. Here, you specify a dependency between the two tasks that determine whether the next task is executed. The Job system allows you to specify one of three dependencies for any task: Always (default), Only on Success, or Only on Failure. You can create jobs that can be used as fixit jobs that are to be run when a condition is signalled by the Event system. Fixit jobs are not scheduled. See Chapter 5, "Events" for information on monitoring events in the system. Note: You need to set up a password file to perform administration tasks, such as start up or shut down, on a remote database. See the "Configuring a Remote Database for Backup or SYSDBA Administration" in the Oracle Enterprise Manager Configuration Guide for more information. Writing SQL*Plus Scripts Creating your own job tasks using the SQL*Plus command language allows you to automate any number of complex database operations via the Job system and Intelligent Agent(s). The success or failure of a given SQL*Plus script is determined by the exit condition returned when the script completes. Because a SQL*Plus script can return an error condition that may not be recognized by the Intelligent Agent, such as a non-ORA error message, your job task can appear to complete successfully even though a command issued from within your script has failed. To avoid this situation, you must specify an operational clause when using a SQL*Plus EXIT command in your script. For example: > EXIT sql.sqlcode > EXIT warning > EXIT 666 Using the EXIT command without specifying an operational clause (default) commits and exits with a value of SUCCESS. By explicitly defining the conditions
  • 94. Job Process under which your script terminates, the Intelligent Agent can ascertain whether your job has succeeded or failed. For more information on SQL*Plus and the SQL*Plus command language, see the SQL*Plus User’s Guide and Reference. Job Credentials Jobs are normally run with the preferences of the administrator who submitted the job. This ensures that jobs cannot be used to perform functions the administrator could not perform if logged into the machine directly. For example, to write a job output file to the ORACLE_HOME/network/agent/ directory, the administrator must have permissions to write to that directory on that node. Because jobs are categorized by the type of service they act on, the job system knows what credentials to pass to the Intelligent Agent. The Job system uses Enterprise Manager System Preferences (Preferred Credentials) to determine what preference information needs to be passed. When a job runs on a node, the job system passes the administrator preferences for the node. When a job runs on a service, such as a database, the job system also passes the administrator preferences for the service. See "Preferred Credentials" on page 1-25 for information on administrator preferences. Important: You must set up valid user credentials for the nodes on which you want to run jobs. Node credentials are required for all jobs. If credentials are not set up correctly for an Windows NT node, you may get the "Failed to Authenticate User" error message. Make sure the Windows NT node account specified in your preferred credentials possesses the "log in as batch jobs" user right. See the Enterprise Manager Configuration Guide or your Windows NT documentation for instructions on creating NT user accounts. Administrator preferences for nodes and/or services are given the following prioritization: 1. Preferred Credential Overrides (Highest Priority) 2. Preferred Credentials for the selected node or service. 3. Default Service 4. Null Credentials (Lowest Priority) Note: Jobs and events will fail. 4-4 Oracle Enterprise Manager Administrator’s Guide
  • 95. Job Process Jobs 4-5 Submitting Jobs The Job system is simple to use because the task of scheduling and managing jobs is centralized in the Enterprise Manager Console. The administrator only needs to submit a job once, regardless of the number of destinations on which the job will run. When you submit a job, the Management Server sends the job information to the appropriate Intelligent Agents on the destinations you selected. The Intelligent Agents are responsible for executing the job on the specified schedule and returning job status messages to the Console through the Management Server. Once submitted, jobs will run regardless of whether you are logged in or not. Note: There is usually a slight delay between submitting the job and the notification by the Intelligent Agent. To schedule a job, you do not have to connect at the time of job creation to the node on which the job will be run. You only need to submit the job from the Console and specify the destinations on which it should run. The destinations can include nodes, databases, listeners, user-defined groups that have been created with the Group system, or any other discovered services. The Job system of Enterprise Manager allows you to efficiently run jobs on multiple remote nodes by transferring job information to the Intelligent Agents servicing the nodes. When a job is executed, it is run by the Intelligent Agent on that node, thus minimizing network traffic between the remote node and the Console and Management Server. In addition, jobs can be run on multiple nodes simultaneously because there is an Intelligent Agent residing on each node. Jobs can only be run on nodes where an Intelligent Agent is running. If you send a job to a group, the job is only scheduled on the nodes in the group where the Intelligent Agent is running. When you submit a job to one or more remote sites, it is possible that any one of those site may be down. If a site or its Intelligent Agent is down, the Management Server queues any job requests that could not be delivered to the site. Once the site can be contacted, the Management Server submits the queued job to the Intelligent Agent, which in turn executes the job on the node. Cancelling Jobs You can cancel a job by selecting the desired job from the Job Active window and choosing Remove Job from the Job menu. Care should be taken when cancelling a job. Cancelling a job that is currently running will interrupt the job process and terminate the job. Problems can arise when the job is composed of multiple job tasks with sequential dependencies.
  • 96. Job Pane Job Pane You can view the different pages of job information by selecting the page tabs in the Job pane. The pages in the Job pane are: ¥ Active ¥ History You can switch between the pages by clicking the tab of each page. The rows in both pages can be sorted on any column by clicking the column heading. The Job pane can be hidden or shown by selecting Job in the Console View menu. You can also hide or show the pane by clicking the Job system icon in the Console toolbar. Figure 4–1 Job Pane in the Console 4-6 Oracle Enterprise Manager Administrator’s Guide
  • 97. Job Pane Jobs 4-7 Active Job Pane The Active pane contains a summary of the active jobs on the network. These are jobs that you have submitted to the job system and are not yet completed. Each row is an execution of a particular job scheduled on a specific destination. While a job may execute multiple times, the job listed in the Active page is the one that is currently scheduled or running. You can use the Edit Job menu option to display the details of the selected job. When selecting a job from the Active pane, the only job attribute you can modify is the job permission. See "Creating, Modifying, or Viewing a Job" on page 4-12 You can double-click on a job listed in the Active page to view the job details. Name Name of the job. Destination Destination of the job. Destination Type database, listener, node. Owner Administrator submitting the job. Status Status of job is one of the following: n Submitted: The job has been submitted to the job destination running an Intelligent Agent. n Scheduled: The job has been successfully delivered to the Intelligent Agent and is scheduled for execution. Note: Under certain circumstances, a job will remain in a Submitted state. The most likely cause would be the Intelligent Agent on the node to which you are trying to submit the job is down, or the node is not connected to the network. n Started: The job execution has started. After the job executes, the job execution is displayed in the Job History page. If this is the last scheduled execution of the
  • 98. Job Pane job, the job is removed from the Active Jobs page. Otherwise, the job remains in the Active Jobs page and has the status of Scheduled. Unless you view the Active Jobs page at the exact time that the job is executing, you would not see the Running status. n Pending Deletion: The job has been selected for deletion. When the deletion is successful, the job is removed from the Active Jobs page and added to the Job History page. n Fixit: The fixit job has been submitted. n Fixing: The fixit job is executing. A fixit job remains in the Active Jobs page until it is deleted. Date/Time This is the time the Intelligent Agent returns after the job has been scheduled by the Intelligent Agent. Context-sensitive Menu options The following options are available by selecting a job and clicking the right mouse button. Edit/View Job Displays the property sheet for the selected job. Only the permissions, notifications, and owner can be changed. Create Like Displays a copy of the selected job. You can edit the property sheet and submit this job. Copy to Library Copies the selected job to the Job Library if it does not already exist there. Remove Job Delete the selected job. If the job has not been saved to the Job Library, a warning dialog appears indicating that you are about to perform a remove operation. You may wish to copy the job to the job library before removing it. 4-8 Oracle Enterprise Manager Administrator’s Guide
  • 99. Job Pane Jobs 4-9 History Page Job History contains a list of previous job executions. These are jobs that have been submitted to an Intelligent Agent and have executed successfully or unsuccessfully. You cannot modify these jobs. n Job Name is the name of the job. n Destination of the job. n Owner of the job. n Destination type n Status of job is one of the following: n Completed: The job has executed successfully. n Failed: The job execution has failed. n Deleted: The job has been deleted. n For the other status categories, see "Active Job Pane" on page 4-7. n Finish Time is the time when the job finished, failed, or was deleted. Refresh History Icon Refreshes the job history list. Job history is refreshed each time you move from the Active tab to the History tab. However, to refresh the job history list while currently viewing the History pane, you must click the Refresh History icon located at the bottom left of the Job pane. Clear All History Icon Clears all entries in the Job History list. You can double-click on a job listed in the Job History page to display the Job property sheet and view the Job Output dialog box, if output exists for the job. If no output is produced by a job, a message displays that states that there is no output for the job. If the output includes only blank spaces, the dialog box is blank. Context Menu options The following options are available by selecting a job and clicking the right mouse button. View Job Displays the property sheet for the selected job.
  • 100. Job Menu Create Like Displays a copy of the selected job. You can edit the property sheet and submit this job. Copy to Library Copies the selected job to the Job Library if it does not already exist there. Remove Job Delete the selected job. If the job has not been saved to the Job Library, a warning dialog appears indicating that you are about to perform a remove operation. You may wish to copy the job to the job library before removing it. You can save the jobs from the History page to a file, then clear the jobs from the History page. This prevents the History page from being overloaded with obsolete jobs that occurred in previous days. Choose the Report Job History option from the Job menu to save the history to a report. This report is a file on the machine where the Enterprise Manager Console is running. You can create a new job similar to a job in the History page with the Create Like option. See "Creating, Modifying, or Viewing a Job" on page 4-12 for more information. Job Menu The Job menu allows you to create, modify, save, submit, and manage jobs. The menu options are enabled depending on the items selected in the Job pane. See Figure 4–1, "Job Pane in the Console" for an illustration of the Job menu. Create Job Allows you to create a new job. See "Creating, Modifying, or Viewing a Job" on page 4-12 for more information. Create Job Like Allows you to create a new job like the selected job in the Job pane. See "Creating, Modifying, or Viewing a Job" on page 4-12 for more information. Edit Job Allows you to modify the job selected in the Job pane. The property sheet is the same as the property sheet for creating a new job, however, you can only modify job permissions. See "Creating, Modifying, or Viewing a Job" on page 4-12 for more information. 4-10 Oracle Enterprise Manager Administrator’s Guide
  • 101. Job Menu Copy to Library Copies the selected job to the Job Library if it does not already exist there. View Job Displays the property sheet for the selected job in the Job pane. The property sheet is in read-only format. Active jobs can be removed but not modified. See "Creating, Modifying, or Viewing a Job" on page 4-12 for more information. Remove Job Removes the selected job from the Active or History page of the Job pane. When you delete a job, there is usually a slight delay while the request is processed. See "Cancelling Jobs" on page 4-5 for specifics on job cancellation. Job Library Displays the Job Library dialog. See "Job Library" on page 4-11 for more information. Clear History Clears the jobs listed in the Job History page. Refresh History Refreshes the job history list. Job history is refreshed each time you move from the Active tab to the History tab. However, to refresh the job history list while currently viewing the History pane, you must select this menu item. Remove Job from History Clears the selected job listed in the Job History page. Report Job History/Active Jobs Generates an HTML-based report summarizing the History or Active Job pane, depending on which pane is active when this menu item is selected. By default, the report is saved to the ORACLE_HOME/sysman/reports directory. Jobs 4-11 Job Library The Job Library dialog contains a list of the jobs that you have created and saved. In the dialog, you can view summary information about a job: n Job Name is the name of the job. n Description is the user-supplied description of the job. n Owner is the administrator that is assigned as the owner of the job.
  • 102. Creating, Modifying, or Viewing a Job These jobs can be submitted to the job system with the Submit button. You can use the Edit button to modify a job selected in this page. You can also double-click on a job listed in the Job Library page to edit the job. You can create a new job based on an existing job with the Create Like button. Creating, Modifying, or Viewing a Job When you create, modify, or view details of a job, similar property sheets display. See Figure 4–3, "Job Tasks Page" for an illustration of a Job property sheet. The property sheets contains: n General Page n Task Page n Parameters Page n Schedule Page n Permissions Page n Progress Page (this page only appears when a job is selected from the Active or History pane) Creating a New Job Attention: When submitting a job that consists of multiple tasks, an error may occur if the string of arguments that was sent is longer than the internal buffer. If that error occurs when submitting a job, divide the tasks among multiple jobs and resubmit the jobs. 1. Select Create Job from the Job menu to display the Create Job property sheet. 2. Complete the pages of the Create Job property sheet. 3. Determine whether the job is ready to submit. a. Select the Submit option and click Submit to send the job to the Intelligent Agents at the selected destinations. The job appears in the Active page. - OR - b. Select the Add to Library option and click Add. The job appears in the Job Library. You can modify or submit a saved job at a later time. 4-12 Oracle Enterprise Manager Administrator’s Guide
  • 103. Creating, Modifying, or Viewing a Job Jobs 4-13 - OR - c. Select the Submit and Add to Library option and click Submit and Add to send the job to the Intelligent Agents at the selected destinations and save the job to the job library. The job appears in the Active page and the Job Library. You can modify or submit a saved job at a later time. Note: There is usually a slight delay between the time you submit the job and Intelligent Agent notification. Modifying a Saved Job Note: For submitted jobs in the Active Jobs page, you can only modify permissions or notifications. If you want to change other job attributes, you need to first delete the job from the Active pane, then re-submit the job with the necessary changes. It is more convenient to save the job definition first in the Job Library, them make the necessary changes. 1. If you have not already done so, copy the job to the Job Library using the Copy to Library menu option. 2. Select Job Library from the Job menu. The Job Library dialog appears. 3. Select the job from the library. 4. Click Edit. The Job property sheet appears. 5. Update the pages of the Job property sheet and determine whether the job is ready to submit. a. Select the Submit option and click OK to submit the job to the Intelligent Agents at the selected destinations. The job appears in the Active window. - OR - b. Select the Save to Library option and click OK. The job appears in the Job Library. You can modify or submit a saved job at a later time. - OR - c. Select the Submit and Save to Library option and click OK to submit the job to the Intelligent Agents at the selected destinations and save the job to the job library. The job appears in the Active window and the Job Library. You can modify or submit a saved job at a later time.
  • 104. Creating, Modifying, or Viewing a Job Viewing Job Details To view the details of a particular job, double-click on a job in the Active or History Job pane. The Job property sheet for that job appears. General Page The General page allows you to determine job name, description, type, fixit job status, and destinations. Figure 4–2 Job General Page Job Name Enter the name of the new job. Description Enter the optional description of the job. Fixit Job Check this box if you want to use this job as a fixit job to correct an event condition. The fixit job must be submitted to the destination where the event is being monitored. A fixit job cannot be scheduled. 4-14 Oracle Enterprise Manager Administrator’s Guide
  • 105. Creating, Modifying, or Viewing a Job The fixit job can be selected from the Fixit Job list in the Event Parameters page after it has been successfully submitted to an Intelligent Agent. See "Creating, Modifying, and Registering an Event" on page 5-29 for more information. Destination Type Select the destination type from the pull-down list: Database, Listener, Node, Group, or other service that is integrated into the Console. Job destinations Select the destinations of the job in the Available Destinations list and click the < (Add) button to move the destination to the Selected Destinations list. The destinations are determined by the Destination Type. The destinations include databases, listeners, nodes, and groups or other discovered services of these objects. Note: Only network objects that have been discovered correctly and have an Intelligent Agent running are included in the list of available destinations. See "Discovering Services" on page 2-7 for more information. Jobs 4-15 Job Task Page The Task page allows you to choose the tasks that you want the job to perform. Available Tasks Tree list of available job tasks. Tasks vary depending on the Destination Type selected on the General page. Select a task and click on the < (Add) button to include the task in the job. You can add multiple tasks to the job from the Available Tasks scrolling list. See the online help for Oracle job tasks and "Oracle Job Tasks" on page 4-23 for information on Oracle predefined job tasks and their parameters. Job Tasks Tasks currently selected for the current job. You can remove tasks from this list by selecting the task and clicking on the >> (Remove) button. Up/Down Arrows Use the arrow buttons to change the order of the tasks or to make a task conditional on a previous task. Select a task in the Selected Tasks list and click on the up or down arrow button to position the task.
  • 106. Creating, Modifying, or Viewing a Job Figure 4–3 Job Tasks Page Conditions for running a task Select a task in the Job Tasks window and select from the following: n Always - The task is always executed regardless of the failure or success of other tasks. n Only on success of - The task is only executed if the task selected in the list is successful. n Only on failure of - The task is only executed if the task selected in the list has failed. Note: If any task does not execute, control moves to the next task on the same level as the task that did not execute. Important: You can add up to five job tasks per job. Adding more than five tasks will generate an error message stating the maximum number of input files have been exceeded. 4-16 Oracle Enterprise Manager Administrator’s Guide
  • 107. Creating, Modifying, or Viewing a Job Stopping Jobs Normally, a job stops when all tasks have been executed. In some cases, you may want the job to stop before completing the task sequence, which might be the case when one task in the sequence fails. To handle situations like this, you can include the Halt Job task as part of a composite job to stop execution at any point within the task sequence. You specify the Halt Job task dependency as you would any other task. Jobs 4-17 Job Parameters Page On the Parameters Page, you specify parameter settings for the selected job tasks. To set the parameters for a task, select the task in the Selected Tasks list. The parameters for the selected task are displayed on the right side of the Parameters Page. Selected Tasks Select the task for which you want to set parameters. Task Parameters Specify the parameters for the selected task. You can enter values in the entry boxes or select values from the pull-down lists. The parameters vary according to the job task. See the online help for Oracle job tasks and "Oracle Job Tasks" on page 4-23 for information on Oracle predefined job tasks and their parameters. For some jobs, you can override the preferred credentials for connecting to the service. This allows you to enter a username and password. See "Job Credentials" on page 4-4 and "Preferred Credentials" on page 1-25 for information on administrator preferences. Job Schedule Page The Schedule page allows you to schedule the execution of the job task. Run Job Select the frequency that you want the task executed. The choices are Immediately, Once, On Interval, On Day of Week, and On Date of Month. Start Execution Choose the first date and time that you want the task executed. This is the starting time for any task scheduled on an interval.
  • 108. Creating, Modifying, or Viewing a Job Stop Execution Choose the last date and time that you want the task executed. This option does not apply if you chose the Immediately or Once execution options. Note: When scheduling a job, the Intelligent Agent time zone (the local time zone of the destination where the job will be executed) is used. Job Permissions Page Determine the permissions that you want to assign to the job with the Permissions Page. This allows other administrators to view or modify the job. Notifications can be assigned with this page. The levels of permission that you can assign to an Enterprise Manager administrator are: None Does not allow the administrator to view this job anywhere. View Allows the administrator to view the job and inspect job properties. Modify Allows the administrator to suspend and resume the job. The administrator will also be able to edit the job’s properties except those reserved for administrators with Full permission. Full Allows the administrator to delete the job from the Active or History pages of the Job window, modify permissions for other administrators, and change the ownership of the job. Notify Allows the administrator to receive enhanced notifications (paging and email) for the job. Notify permission cannot be assigned if the administrator’s permission level is set to None. 4-18 Oracle Enterprise Manager Administrator’s Guide
  • 109. Creating, Modifying, or Viewing a Job Note: All administrators possessing at least the View permission will receive notifications through the Console when a job is executed. Any permissions assigned on this page supersede any administrator default permissions. See "Permissions" on page 1-23 for more information. Show Notification Schedule Show Notification Schedule displays when administrators are scheduled to receive notifications. To remove an administrator from receiving an enhanced notification, display the context menu (press the right mouse button) on any time block. The context menu provides options for adding and removing recipients of the notifications. Administrators that appear via the Add Recipient and Remove Recipient menu options are those whose schedules match the selected time slot. Jobs 4-19 Job Progress Page The Job Progress page is available for jobs in the Active and History pages of the Job window. The Progress page provides a log of the job’s activities. The Progress page contains all status changes that have been received for a specific job. Each row in the page summarizes a status change of the job. If you display the Progress page for an execution in the History page, the page typically displays Submitted, Scheduled, Started, and Completed or Failed statuses for that execution. If you display an execution from the Active Jobs page, the Progress page displays only those status changes that have been received. When you display the Progress page, the page displays the statuses only for the destination and execution time of the job occurrence selected. To view the status changes associated with other destinations or execution times, select other destinations or execution times from the Destination or Execution pull-down lists. You can also select <All> in either list to view all statuses. If the job has been Deleted on a destination, the Deleted status always displays at the top of the Progress Page. The following options are available on the Progress page:
  • 110. Creating, Modifying, or Viewing a Job Destination Select the destination of the job occurrences you want to view from the pull-down list. Select <All> for all destinations. The list of job occurrences changes according to the selection. Execution Select the execution time of the job occurrences you want to view from the pull-down list. Select <All> for all executions. The list of job occurrences changes according to the selection. Save List Select the Save List button to save the list of job occurrences as a local file using the standard Windows file dialog box. Notification Details This option displays the notifications for this job. Show Output If output exists for the selected occurrence of a job, you can display the output in the Output dialog box. You can also double-click on a selected job to display output. The columns in the Progress page contain the following information: Status See "Active Job Pane" on page 4-7 and "History Page" on page 4-9 for information on the status of a job. Destination This is the destination of the specific occurrence of the job. Date/Time This is the time the Management Server was notified by the Intelligent Agent that a status change had occurred. Job Output Dialog Box The Output dialog box is displayed by double-clicking on an entry in the Progress page, or selecting an entry and clicking on the Show Output button, if enabled. This dialog displays any output, including error messages, as a result of the execution of an occurrence of a job. If no output is produced by a job, a message displays stating there is no output for the job. If the output includes only blank spaces, the dialog box is blank. With the Output dialog box displayed, the following options are available: 4-20 Oracle Enterprise Manager Administrator’s Guide
  • 111. Creating, Modifying, or Viewing a Job Close Select the Close button to exit the dialog box after viewing it. Print Select the Print button to print the contents of the dialog box. Save As Select the Save As button to save the contents of the dialog box to a text file. Changing the Maximum Limit for Job Output Because the output of some jobs may be quite large, Oracle Enterprise Manager provides you with the option of specifying the maximum size for any job output returned by the Intelligent Agent. If the job output exceeds the maximum limit, any output generated beyond this maximum is truncated. By default, the maximum job output size is set to 128K (smallest allowable value). The largest permissible value is two megabytes. You can set this parameter (oms.vdg.joboutput.maxsize) in the following file: $ORACLE_HOME/sysman/config/omsconfig.properties Jobs 4-21 Example omsconfig.properties entry: oms.vdg.joboutput.maxsize=128K Units must be specified in kilobytes (K) or megabytes (M). Example: Creating a Job This example illustrates how to complete the General, Tasks, Parameters, and Schedule Pages when creating a job. It also describes how to save and submit a job. 1. Select Create from the Job menu to create a new job. The Create Job property sheet displays. 2. Enter a name for the new job in the Job Name field of the General Page. You may also enter a description for the job in the Description field. 3. Select Database from the Destination Type pull-down list. 4. Do not check the Fixit Job box for this job. You can create jobs that are used specifically as fixit jobs. Fixit jobs can be run automatically in response to an event occurrence. See "Event Parameters Page" on page 5-34 for information on fixit jobs with events.
  • 112. Creating, Modifying, or Viewing a Job 5. Select a destination from the Available Destinations list, then click on the << (Add) button to add the destination to the Selected Destinations list. These are destinations where an Intelligent Agent is running. The Job Credentials must be set up correctly for these destinations. See "Job Credentials" on page 4-4 for more information. 6. Repeat the previous step for another destination. You are choosing the destinations where the job will be run. 7. Click on the Task Page tab of the Create Job property sheet. 8. Select Run SQL*Plus Script from the Available Tasks list, then click the << (Add) button to add the task to the Selected Tasks list. For this example, add only the Run SQL*Plus task. You can specify multiple tasks for a job and make a task conditional on a previous task. 9. Make sure the task is set to run Always. If you specified multiple tasks for this job, you could make a task conditional on a previous task. 10. Click on the Parameters Page tab of the Create Job property sheet to set the parameters: n Enter “SELECT * FROM dba_users;” in the Script Text box. n Do not check the Override Preferred Credentials box. If you do not override the credentials, the information that is set up with the administrator Preferred Credentials property sheet is used. See "Job Credentials" on page 4-4 for permissions needed to run job tasks. This particular job task requires database credentials that permit access to the data dictionary views. Make sure the Preferred Credentials for the chosen target have this. 11. Click on the Schedule Page tab of the Create Job property sheet to schedule the execution of the job. 12. Select the On Interval under Run Job to execute the job on a specific interval. 13. Set the Start Execution Date of the job to 1/1/2001. Select the month value in the Start Execution Date field and enter 7. You can also click the up and down arrows to change the value when a number is selected. 14. Repeat the process in the previous step for the day and year values of the Start Execution Date. 15. Change the Start Execution Time to 12:00 AM. Use the same procedure that you used to set the date. 16. Check the End Execution box to set a final execution date for this job. 4-22 Oracle Enterprise Manager Administrator’s Guide
  • 113. Oracle Job Tasks 17. Set the End Execution Date of the job to 1/3/2001. Set the End Execution Time Note: If you have a domain user set up, you must set the domain password to be the same as the local password in order for scheduled jobs to run when they are submitted using the domain user account. (Windows NT only) Jobs 4-23 of the job to 12:00 AM. 18. The Time Zone should be set to Intelligent Agent (currently static text). This job will execute at the local time zone where the Intelligent Agent is located. This is the time zone of the destination. 19. Select the Every ... Days button to set the job frequency for day interval. Click on the up arrow to change the value to 3 days. 20. Click on the Permissions Page tab of the Create Job property sheet to assign permissions on this job for other administrators. 21. Allow all other Enterprise Manager administrators to view and receive notifications for this job. 22. Click the Submit and Add to Library button to save the new job in the Job Library and submit the job to the selected destinations. 23. If you want to modify this job later, select the job in the Job Library dialog and choose the Edit option. You can also double-click on the job. A submitted job is sent to the Intelligent Agents at the selected destinations. The Intelligent Agent for a destination begins processing the job, the job appears in the Active Jobs page in the Job window. If the job is processed successfully, the job will start executing on 1/1/2001 at 12:00 AM. After an execution of a job, it is moved to the Job History page of the Job window. You can view the progress of the job and any output in the Job Progress Page. Oracle Job Tasks This section lists the Oracle predefined job tasks and parameters for: n Oracle databases n Operating systems or hosts (Nodes) n Listeners
  • 114. Oracle Job Tasks This information is entered in the Job Task Page and Job Parameters Page of the Create Job property sheet. The name and the parameters are listed for each task. Oracle Database Tasks These are the tasks that can be run on databases and database groups. In addition, you can run operating system or host job tasks. n Run SQL*Plus Script n Run DBA Script n Shutdown Database n Startup Database Note: You need to set up a password file to perform administration tasks on a remote database. See the Oracle Enterprise Manager Configuration Guide for more information. Enterprise Manager Wizard Database Tasks Specific database job tasks are used by the Enterprise Manager data and backup management wizards that are accessed through the Console Navigator popup and main menus. The job tasks are: n Analyze n Import n Export n Load n Backup n Recovery Since these job tasks are used only by their respective wizards, the tasks will not have directly editable parameters. To modify parameters for any Wizard database task, click on the Load Wizard button located on the Parameters page of the Job property sheet to activate the associated Wizard. For more information about these wizards and associated job tasks, see the Enterprise Manager online help. Run SQL*Plus Script This job executes a SQL*Plus script, allowing any legal SQL or PL/SQL scripts to be run, including all SQL*Plus formatting commands. You can copy and paste the text 4-24 Oracle Enterprise Manager Administrator’s Guide
  • 115. Oracle Job Tasks of the script into the Script Text box of the Parameters page (Create Job property sheet), or simply type SQL commands in the Script Text box. Parameters: 1. SQL Parameters. Enter one or more arguments that you want the script to use. 2. Override Preferred Credentials. You can use the preferred credentials that have been set up for the database, or you can enter a username and password. If you check the box to override the credentials, then you need to enter: a. User Name. Username for accessing the database. b. Password. Password for the username. Note: See "Preferred Credentials" on page 1-25 for more information. 3. Script Text. You can copy and paste your script into the Script Text box. Hint: If you need to determine whether a SQL error has occurred during the running of a SQL script, include "WHENEVER SQLERROR EXIT SQL.SQLCODE" at the beginning of the script. If a SQL error occurs, the job status is set to failed. Jobs 4-25 Run DBA Script This job executes a Server Manager line mode script that contains DBA commands. Parameters: 1. Override Preferred Credentials. You can use the preferred credentials that have been set up for the database, or you can enter a username and password. If you check the box to override the credentials, then you need to enter: a. User Name. Username for accessing the database. b. Password. Password for the username. c. Connect As. Select the role you want to connect as from the pull-down list. Note: See "Preferred Credentials" on page 1-25 for more information. 2. Script Text. You can copy and paste your script into Script Text box. Shutdown Database This job task shuts down an Oracle database instance. Parameters: 1. Mode:
  • 116. Oracle Job Tasks n Immediate n Abort 2. Connect As: n SYSDBA n SYSOPER 3. Override Preferred Credentials. Check the box if you want to override the preferred credentials that have been set up for the database. If you check the box to override the credentials, then you need to enter: a. User Name. Enter the username for accessing the database. b. Password. Enter the password for the username. Note: See "Preferred Credentials" on page 1-25 for more information. Startup Database This job task starts up an Oracle database instance. Parameters: 1. Startup State. Select the start up state from the pull-down list: n Startup instance, mount, and open database n Startup instance and mount database n Startup instance only 2. Parameter File. Enter the initialization parameter filename you want to use for the database. This file is located on the node where the Intelligent Agent and database reside. For example with a database on a Unix platform: /private/oracle/admin/ora8db/myinit.ora If you do not enter a filename, the default platform-specific initialization file is used. 3. Override Preferred Credentials. Check the box if you want to override the preferred credentials that have been set up for the database. If you check the box to override the credentials, then you need to enter: a. User Name. Enter the username for accessing the database. b. Password. Enter the password for the username. 4-26 Oracle Enterprise Manager Administrator’s Guide
  • 117. Oracle Job Tasks Jobs 4-27 Note: See "Preferred Credentials" on page 1-25 for more information. 4. Mount Mode. Select the mount option from the pull-down list: n Exclusive n Normal n Parallel 5. Connect As. Select the connecting role from the pull-down list: n SYSDBA n SYSOPER 6. Restrict Connections. Check this box if you want to start the database in Restricted mode. 7. Force Startup. Check this box if you want to start up the database with the Force option. Refer to the Oracle 8i Administrator’s Guide for more information on startup options. Halt Job Normally, a job stops when all tasks have been executed. In some cases, you may want the job to stop before completing the task sequence, which might be the case when one task in the sequence fails. To handle situations like this, you can include the Halt Job task as part of a composite job to stop execution at any point within the task sequence. You specify the Halt Job task dependency as you would any other task. Operating System or Node Tasks These are the tasks that can be run on the host's operating system. n Broadcast Message n Run OS Command n Run Tcl Script n Halt Job Broadcast Message This job allows you to submit a message to the selected destinations using the platform-specific mechanism. To send the message to a destination, you may need to have permissions on specific directories. For example, you may need permissions
  • 118. Oracle Job Tasks on /dev/console (system console device) to send a message to a Unix destination. Note: On a Windows platform, this task sends the message to ALL users on the network. To send a message to specific users, use the Run OS Command task to execute the net command with the send option. See the Windows online help for information on net command line arguments. You can also enter net send /help at the MSDOS command prompt. Parameters: Message Text. Enter the message text that you want sent to the selected destinations. Run OS Command This is a generic method of running any program or script that is executable on that host, provided your credentials allow you to do that. Parameters: 1. OS command or shell script name. The command or script must be accessible from the node where the Intelligent Agent and database reside. You may have to include the path for the Intelligent Agent to locate and execute the command or script. For example: ls 2. One or more arguments to the command. For example: -l /export/oracle Run Tcl Script This job executes a Tcl script. This is a generic method of running any Tcl script that is executable on that host, provided the preferred credentials allow that. See "Preferred Credentials" on page 1-25 for more information. Parameters: 1. Parameters. One or more command-line arguments that you want the script to use. The arguments must be delimited by quotes. Note: Multiple parameters, such as "one two three", are treated as only one parameter. To ensure that the parameters entered in the field are treated as separate arguments and to ensure that the Tcl script functions in future releases, include the following at the beginning of the Tcl script: set argc [llength $argv] 4-28 Oracle Enterprise Manager Administrator’s Guide
  • 119. Oracle Job Tasks Jobs 4-29 if { $argc == 1} { set argv [lindex $argv 0]} 2. Script Text. Copy and paste the Tcl script into the Script Text box. Tcl Script Examples For information on writing Tcl job tasks, see the Intelligent Agent User’s Guide. For information on Tcl, see "Tcl and the Tk Toolkit," by John K. Outsterhout, published by Addison-Wesley Publishing Company, 1994. For examples of Tcl job scripts, review the scripts located in ORACLE_HOMEnetworkagentjobsoracle subdirectories on the machine where an Intelligent Agent has been installed. Do not edit these Tcl scripts. The following is an example of a Tcl script (Unix platform) that logs on to a database and runs a SQL statement: set argc [llength $argv] if {$argc == 1} {set argv [lindex $argv 0]} set connect_str [lindex $argv 0] set sql_statement [lindex $argv 1] set lda [oralogon $connect_str] set cur1 [oraopen $lda] orasql $cur1 $sql_statement set result_row [orafetch $cur1] while {$oramsg(rc) == 0} { puts $result_row set result_row [orafetch $cur1] } oraclose $cur1 oralogoff $lda When the script is executed with the Run Tcl Script task, the following are examples of command line arguments that should be entered in the Parameters field: "scott/tiger@or817.world" "select * from emp" The following is an example of a Tcl script (Unix platform) that displays the contents of a file if it exists and triggers a third-party event if it does not exist: set argc [llength $argv] if {$argc == 1} {set argv [lindex $argv 0]} set myfile [lindex $argv 0] append mymessage "File not found:" $myfile if {[file exists $myfile]} { catfile $myfile } else {
  • 120. Oracle Job Tasks puts $mymessage orareportevent /user/host/file/alert $oramsg(nodename) 1 $mymessage } When the script is executed with the Run Tcl Script task, the following is an example of a command line argument that should be entered in the Parameters field: "/export/oracle/network/agent/dbsnmp.ver" Note: When orareportevent is used to trigger a third-party event with a job script, you need to create and register an event that has the "Unsolicited events" box checked. See "Event General Page" on page 5-31 for more information. Listener Tasks These are the tasks that can be run on Listeners. In addition, you can run operating system or host job tasks. n Shutdown Listener n Startup Listener Shutdown Listener This stops the Listener. The preferred credentials for the node must have a user that has system administration privileges. See "Preferred Credentials" on page 1-25 for information on user preferences. Parameters: Password. Enter a password for the listener if you choose to override the default password. Startup Listener This can be invoked to start the Listener. The preferred credentials for the node must have a user that has system administration privileges. See "Preferred Credentials" on page 1-25 for information on user preferences. Parameters: None 4-30 Oracle Enterprise Manager Administrator’s Guide
  • 121. Oracle Job Tasks Jobs 4-31 Important: See "Numeric Pager Job/Event Ids" on page 5-42 for specific ids.
  • 122. Oracle Job Tasks 4-32 Oracle Enterprise Manager Administrator’s Guide
  • 123. 5 Events The Event system allows you to monitor your network for specific conditions, such as loss of service or lack of storage, that may occur in your managed environment. You select tests to run on managed targets (databases, nodes, listeners, or other services), then set the threshold parameters for which you want to be notified. You can share events with other administrators, in addition to being able to notify specific administrators when an event condition occurs. For some event tests, you can also choose to execute a fixit job that automatically corrects the problem. The following topics are discussed in this chapter: Events 5-1 n Event System Overview n Event Categories and Types n Event Pane n Event Menu n Creating, Modifying, and Registering an Event n Oracle Event Tests n Event System Features and Requirements
  • 124. What’s New in Events What’s New in Events This section discusses the enhancements to the Events System in Enterprise Manager 2.2. n New operating system event tests These event tests monitor operating system-specific metrics for Solaris, HP-UX, Compaq Tru64, IBM AIX and Windows NT. These new events require an 8.1.7 or higher Intelligent Agent. As with other Advanced Events, these events are available with the Oracle Diagnostics Pack. n Support for duplicate events Duplicate events can now be registered against 8.1.7 or higher Agents. Duplicate events are those that contain the same event tests and parameters against the same target. For example, 2 or more administrators can create their own events that register the same Tablespace Full event with the same parameters against the same tablespace. You cannot, however, have duplicate event tests within the same Event. For example, if you create an Event called "Database Availability", it cannot have 2 or more of the same Database Up/Down event test against the same database A. Refer to the Enterprise Manager release notes for details on duplicate events with earlier versions of Enterprise Manager and the agents. n Improved Node Up/Down Monitoring The Node Up/Down event test is enhanced to distinguish between situations where the target node is unreachable, the agent is down, or the agent is not responding. n Enhanced Monitoring for Target Subcomponents For Events that monitor targets with multiple subcomponents, (e.g. a group of tablespaces), notifications will now be sent each time the status of any subcomponent changes, even if it does not change the overall severity of the Event. For example, you register a Tablespace Full event for tablespaces A, B, C. If tablespace A becomes full, the event triggers an Alert. If tablespace B also becomes full, then even though the event is still in Alert due to tablespace A, another notification will be sent due to tablespace B becoming full. n Error State for Events 5-2 Oracle Enterprise Manager Administrator’s Guide
  • 125. What’s New in Events When there are problems evaluating an event (e.g. an archive full event against a database that is NOT running in archivelog mode), then an alert may be sent indicating the event is in error. This error state is denoted by a yellow hexagon. In most cases, events in error are due to user errors and can thus be corrected. Some examples of error situations are: Events 5-3 n registering an Archive Full event against a database running in noarchivelog mode n registering an event that monitors segments but specifying a filter that excludes all available segments n registering an event that needs to connect to the database but providing the wrong database credential Refer to "Interpreting Events" on page 5-8 for more information. n Enhanced Datablock Corruption event When registered against 8.1.7 or higher Agents, the Datablock Corruption event test will now also monitor for ORA-1157 (cannot identify/lock data file string – see DBWR trace file) and ORA-27048 (skgfifi: file header information is invalid) errors. n Enhanced User-Defined SQL Test The User-Defined SQL event test can support pl/sql functions. This means you can select from a pl/sql function and have the return value evaluated against a specified threshold. The actual pl/sql function needs to be defined separately. n Enhancements to the Event Handler To simplify setup and configuration, the Event Handler is now solely available as an external service of the Management Server. Error handling has also been improved. n Context-Sensitive Help for Event Tests When creating/editing events, this feature will allow users to select an individual event test and press the F1 key or click the Help button to access online help for that particular event.
  • 126. Event System Overview Event System Overview The Event system allows you to efficiently monitor a large system. Using the Event system and Intelligent Agents, you can effectively monitor any number of databases, nodes, or other services 24 hours a day, and be alerted when a problem or specific condition is detected. You can also pinpoint only the services you wish to monitor. The Event system can be extended to include other third-party applications that detect events independent of the Intelligent Agents. In the Event system, event settings are stored based on the administrator registering the event. This allows administrators of large systems to customize their event systems to their preferences and tasks. Administrators receive messages for events for which they have been selected to receive notifications by other administrators. The Event system includes the following processes: 1. Creating an event by completing the Event property sheet pages. This involves: a. Determining the destination and frequency of the event. b. Selecting the event tests that you want to run. c. Determining the parameters for the event tests. d. Specifying a fixit job to be run when an event triggers. e. Assigning permissions to allow other administrators to share the event. 2. Saving and modifying an event. 3. Registering, or submitting, an event to a destination. 4. Interpreting and correcting an event occurrence. a. Logging information pertinent to your interpretation of the event to the Event log. b. Assigning the Event to a different administrator if appropriate. Using Events You need to create and register events, which are simply a group of event tests that you want to run on your managed systems. Oracle Enterprise Manager includes a variety of predefined event tests that you can use when creating events. The event tests are grouped by service type, for instance: n Database n Listener 5-4 Oracle Enterprise Manager Administrator’s Guide
  • 127. Event System Overview Events 5-5 n Web Servers n Concurrent Manager n Node Creating Events You can create events using the predefined event tests that have been installed with Oracle Enterprise Manager. See "Event Categories and Types" on page 5-10 for more information. The events are created with information entered in the Event property sheet. You determine parameters such as the destination that is monitored, the specific tests to perform, the frequency that the event test is executed, and whether other administrators can share the events. See "Permissions" on page 1-23 for more information. Some event tests have parameters with threshold values that you can customize for your system. See "Event Parameters Page" on page 5-34 for more information. To use the Event system, an administrator must have sufficient privileges to access database objects from the Console. Under most circumstances, full DBA privileges are not required, nor would be appropriate to assign full DBA privileges to every administrator. For this reason, the Event Handler role was created. Enterprise Manager Monitor Role Beginning with Oracle 8.0.6 databases and higher, the OEM_MONITOR role is created by the Oracle database creation scripts. This role permits access to database functionality within Enterprise Manager. For example, running events against a database (tablespace full, buffer cache hit ratio) or browsing through the objects in a database via the Console Navigator tree. These types of functionality require database credentials on which to perform these operations. Rather than granting the powerful DBA role to the database credentials, many administrators prefer to provide only the necessary privileges required to do these operations. Granting the OEM_MONITOR role to the database credentials, ensures that the user has the minimum sufficient privileges required for these operations. For database users on 7.3.x databases, you need to define the OEM_MONITOR role manually. Note: You need to create the OEM_MONITOR role using the SYS account.
  • 128. Event System Overview Here are the steps you need to perform: 1. Create a role called OEM_MONITOR drop role OEM_MONITOR; create role OEM_MONTOR: 2. Grant the ’connect’ role to OEM_MONITOR grant connect to OEM_MONITOR; 3. Grant the system privileges ’Analyze any’ & ’Create table’ to OEM_MONITOR grant analyze any to OEM_MONITOR; grant create table to OEM_MONITOR; 4. Create the SELECT_CATALOG_ROLE role as defined in sc_role.sql . 5. Grant the SELECT_CATALOG_ROLE to the OEM_MONITOR role grant select_catalog_role to OEM_MONITOR; You are now ready to grant the OEM_MONITOR role to the database user that will be used as “database preferred credentials” in Enterprise Manager. In addition to granting the OEM_MONITOR role to a user, you must also ensure that the QUOTA for the user account is set to UNLIMITED. The “Continued Row” event test needs to analyze results into a table so it needs both the "analyze any" and "create table" privileges. Note: The "analyze any" privilege is used by the "index rebuild" event to compute statistics. Registering Events Events are registered, or submitted, to specific destinations, such as nodes, listeners, or databases. The status of a registered event is viewed in the Registered page of the Event pane. The event scripts are executed on nodes with the permissions of the Intelligent Agent. However, some of the database event tests, such as Continued Rows, require access to system tables and require additional permissions. You need to set up preferred credentials for the monitored database with an administrator that has system privileges. See "Preferred Credentials" on page 1-25 for more information. The Intelligent Agent is responsible for detecting when a specific event condition has occurred. The Intelligent Agent first notifies a Management Server, which in 5-6 Oracle Enterprise Manager Administrator’s Guide
  • 129. Event System Overview turn notifies interested administrators either through the Oracle Enterprise Manger Console, or by external means such as Email or Paging. The Management Server is responsible for registering event information with the appropriate Intelligent Agents on nodes in the network. You determine the frequency that an Intelligent Agent checks an event. See "Frequency" on page 5-32 for details on setting the frequency interval for an event. An exception to this is the Up/Down (node) event test, which is checked at an interval set by the system itself. See "Fault Management Event Tests" on page 5-11 for more information on this event test. Events 5-7 Event Occurrences When an alert condition occurs, the Intelligent Agent is responsible for notifying the Management Server. Each event is logged in the repository and can be viewed and acknowledged in the Alerts page of the Console. See Figure 5–1, "Event Menu and Pane" for an illustration of the Event pane. Event Notifications Events can consist of multiple event tests. If any one of these tests identify a specified condition, the event is triggered and a notification is sent to the Console. If enhanced notification is configured for your system, paging and/or email notifications are sent. Event notification occurs as follows: n A notification is sent when the threshold of an event test exceeds the level specified by parameter values. If the event does not have parameters, a notification is sent when the event occurs. n If the event test condition remains above the threshold specified, a new notification is not sent. If the condition does not exist when the next test is run, the event clears. Notifications are also sent (email/paging) when an event clears. n If an event test condition changes from warning to critical or critical to warning, a new notification is sent to the Event pane or via E-mail or paging. n If you acknowledge and move an alert to history, a new notification is not sent to the Alerts page unless a moved warning changes to a critical alert.
  • 130. Event System Overview Notifying Administrators Enterprise Manager administrators can be notified in various ways, such as electronic mail or paging, depending on the administrator’s setups and permissions. You need to set up the notification services and determine the administrators that need to be notified for the events. See "Event Permissions Page" on page 5-35 and "Permissions" on page 1-23 to determine the administrators that receive notifications. See "Notification" on page 1-12 and "Schedule" on page 1-22 to determine how and when an administrator is notified. If you plan to notify administrators with email or paging, you need to make sure the following are set up properly: n The settings for the system modem. n The notification schedules for the administrators. n The mail and paging services that are used to contact administrators. n The mail address and paging numbers for each administrator. Interpreting Events An event is composed of one or more event tests. While an individual event test may result in a different status (For example, some clear, some are in alert), there is a general status for the Event. To determine the general severity for the event, the following rules apply in succession: a. If the event includes an UpDown event test, and this test triggers, then the general status of the Event is "Unknown" (gray flag) b. Otherwise, if the event includes a test that reaches an alert state, then the general status of the Event is "Critical" (red flag) c. Otherwise, if the event includes a test that reaches a warning state, then the general status of the Event is "Warning" (yellow flag) d. Otherwise, if the event includes a test that is in error, then the general status of the Event is "Error" (yellow hexagon) e. Otherwise, all tests should be clear, so the general status of the event is "Clear" You can still see the individual status of each event test in the Event Viewer. Event Colors and Icons All events return values and some events produce output messages. The events return different icons depending on the severity of the event. These severity levels are determined by parameter thresholds you set for the event 5-8 Oracle Enterprise Manager Administrator’s Guide
  • 131. Event System Overview tests during event creation. The colors are displayed on the event severity icon that is located: Events 5-9 n Next to the event name listed in the Alerts page. n On the object in the Group pane if it is part of a group. See Chapter 3, "Groups" for information on the Group pane. The colors of the event severity icons are: n Error State (yellow hexagon with an exclamation point) An error state indicates there is a problem with the evaluation of the event condition, as opposed to a threshold being met. Examples of error states are: registering an Archive Full event against a database in non-archivelog mode, registering an event that monitors segments but specifying a filter that excludes all available segments. n Event cleared (green flag) n Warning (yellow flag) n Critical (red flag) n Unknown (gray flag) A gray flag represents an "unknown" state where it is not possible for Enterprise Manager to ascertain the event status because the node is unreachable or the Intelligent Agent is not working. The gray flag will appear on the group pane and as the flag for the event in the Alert tab if your event includes at least one up/down event test (any target: node/database/listener). When the gray flag occurs, it will be set for the Event. When you see the event in the Event viewer, the flag for the up/down event test will be gray, and the flags for the other event tests will remain the color of their original state. If you have a single db up/down event test in an event, it will also turn gray (at the Event level). When you look at the Event in the Event Viewer, you will see two event tests: db up/down and node up/down (which is always added whenever you have any up/down event test). Both these event tests will have gray flags. If you have an event that does not include any up/down event test, then it will remain the same color even though other events are showing gray flags. If an UpDown event test is specified for a particular event, and the node to which the event is assigned goes down, the event will return an "unknown" severity (gray flag). The original event severity will be restored when the node comes back up. At least one UpDown event test (node, listener, database, etc.)
  • 132. Event Categories and Types must be specified for an event in order for the "unknown" severity to be returned. Events not containing an UpDown event test will not provide any node down notification. Note: Some events, such as Probe and User Blocks events, do not return a warning value because the warning threshold parameter is not used. The event has either occurred or not occurred. Correcting Problems When an event occurs, you need to correct the problem. In some cases, you can create a fixit job that responds to specific event conditions. These situations are noted in the online help for Oracle events. In other cases, the solution requires careful attention by a system administrator. For example, space management event conditions may require an administrator to increase space requirements and resource management conditions may require an administrator to adjust initialization parameters. For information on how to correct event conditions, refer to the appropriate documentation. To correct Oracle database problems, refer to the Oracle Server Administrator’s, Tuning, and Reference Guides. For network problems, refer to the Oracle networking guides for your system. Event Categories and Types The Oracle event tests for the database, listener, and node destination types are grouped into categories: n Fault Management event tests n Space Management event tests n Resource Management event tests n Performance Management event tests n Unsolicited events Only the UpDown event tests are included with Oracle Enterprise Manager. These fall under the category of ‘Fault Management event tests’. Additional advanced events for all categories are available with the optional Oracle Diagnostics Pack. Beginning with the Oracle Diagnostics Pack for Enterprise Manager version 2.2, operating system-specific tests are also available for NT and UNIX platforms. 5-10 Oracle Enterprise Manager Administrator’s Guide
  • 133. Event Categories and Types See the online help for Oracle predefined event tests, "Oracle Event Tests" on page 5-40, and the Diagnostic Pack documentation for information on events and their parameters. All the Node events are supported on Unix and Windows NT platforms. For other platforms, see your platform-specific documentation. Events 5-11 Fault Management Event Tests This category of event tests monitors for catastrophic conditions on the system, such as a database, node, or listener is down. Immediate action must be taken by the administrator. Examples of event tests available in this category include: n Alert n UpDown Most of the fault management event tests do not require any threshold values because the event test only checks whether the service is up or down. For the Alert event test, the event test checks whether error messages are written into the database alert log file. The UpDown event tests are provided with the Enterprise Manager base product. These event tests check whether a database, listener, or node is available. With the UpDown event test for databases or listeners, you can use the Startup Database or Startup Listener task as a fixit job to re-start the database or listener. To avoid executing that job when the database or listener is brought down intentionally, you need to remove the event registration. Space Management Event Tests This category of event tests track possible space problems, such as running out of space on a disk or archive device. Examples of space management event tests in this category include: n Disk Full n Archive Full To check for space management events, set a threshold on the free space left. For example, set an alert if the free space on a disk falls below a specific number of bytes. In order to properly choose the threshold value, you need to know the characteristics of the tablespaces. For example, you would want to know whether the tablespaces contain online transaction processing (OLTP) tables or decision support tables. The former usually has a very fast growth rate, while the latter almost never grows.
  • 134. Event Categories and Types Resource Management Event Tests This category of event tests track possible resource problems, such as exceeding datafile or lock limits. Examples of resource management event tests in this category include: n Datafile Limit n Lock Limit To check for resource management events, set a threshold on the percentage of a resource used. For example, you can set an alert if the percentage of the datafile resource used is greater than a specified value. Performance Management Event Tests This category of event test monitors the system for performance problems, such as excessive disk input/output or library cache miss rate. Examples of events in this category include: n Disk I/O n Library Cache To check for performance management events, set a threshold on a system value. For example, you can set an alert if the library cache miss rate is greater than a specific value. The set of threshold values is system specific, depending on the hardware platform, number of users, and other factors. Unsolicited Event Tests Unsolicited event tests are event tests that have been initiated outside the Enterprise Manager Event system. An event is considered unsolicited if it is raised by a process other than the Oracle Intelligent Agent, but is running on the same node as the Intelligent Agent. These events are usually provided by third-party software. Creating an unsolicited event allows you to integrate and monitor third-party events. Essentially, there are two phases to setting up an unsolicited event: n Registering interest in an unsolicited event n Raising the unsolicited event Registering Interest in an Unsolicited Event To register interest in an unsolicited event, check the Unsolicited Event Test box in the Event General page and complete the information in the succeeding property 5-12 Oracle Enterprise Manager Administrator’s Guide
  • 135. Event Categories and Types sheet pages. Select the Unsolicited event in the Test page and complete the Parameters pages. Information on how to fill out the Parameters page is discussed in the next section. After completing the unsolicited event, you can save and submit the event. See "Creating, Modifying, and Registering an Event" on page 5-29 for more information. Setting the Parameters Property Sheet for Unsolicited Events Because unsolicited events originate outside the Event system, you may wish to screen only for specific external events. The Parameters page for the Unsolicited Event Test allows you to filter unsolicited events based upon the following field entries: Events 5-13 n Event Name: Name of the event n Object: Name of the object that the event is monitoring n Severity: Level of severity of the event n Message: Message to be displayed in the Console You can enter a wildcard "*" (no filtering) or a character string in these fields to define the filtering mechanism. Event Name This is the four-part name of the event in the form: /vendor/product/category/name You can enter any character strings but all four parts and the forward slashes (/) are required. The eventname is assumed to be in 7-bit ASCII, so that it never changes regardless of platform or language. The name of the event that fires must match the value specified in this parameter field in order for the unsolicited event to fire. Enter a "*" if you do not want to filter on an event name. Object An object can be any service the unsolicited event is monitoring, such as a database, listener, or node name. Important: The object must be a service that the Intelligent Agent has already discovered. Enter a wildcard character ( "*") if you want to receive unsolicted events from any type of object. Or, you can use the percent sign "%" for partial filtering. For example, ORCL% for events fired on objects whose name starts with "ORCL."
  • 136. Event Categories and Types Severity Enter the numeric severity level (-1, 1, 2) corresponding to the severity of the event. Severity levels map to different flags in the Console Event Pane: Table 5–1 Severity Level/Event Flag Mapping Flag Color Severity Severity Level Green Cleared Severity -1 Yellow Warning Severity 1 Red Critical Severity 2 Message Message is a quoted text string that is displayed in the Console, such as "File not found." If a message filter is specified, then the event is passed only if the message matches what is specified in the message filter. You can specify wildcard characters as part of the filter i.e. Message Filter : ERROR%. In this case the unsolicited event should fire on anything with a message that starts with "ERROR:" Raising an Unsolicited Event Test To raise unsolicited events, users have a choice of a command-line interface (oemevent executable) or an OraTcl verb (orareportevent). The related syntax is as follows: oemevent [event_name] [object_name] [severity] [message] orareportevent [event_name] [object_name] [severity] [message] where event_name is the name of the event that triggered the unsolicited event. object_name is the name of the object that the event is monitoring, severity is the level of severity for the event, and message is the text string displayed in the Enterprise Manager Console. For additional details, please refer to the Intelligent Agent User’s Guide. Note that the severity is specified as a string in oemevent and as an integer in orareportevent. Also, note that the event_name must be a four-part string of the form /a/b/c/d, where the different elements may be used to organize the event test within a hierarchy of event tests. For example, /myevents/node/files/filefound may be an event test you developed. It 5-14 Oracle Enterprise Manager Administrator’s Guide
  • 137. Event Categories and Types relates to nodes, more specifically space on nodes, and it monitors for the existence of a particular file. For an example of using OraTcl to trigger a third-party event, see Tcl Script Examples in the Run Tcl job task. For information on OraTcl and event scripts, see the Oracle Intelligent Agent User’s Guide. Raising Unsolicited Events Via Enterprise Manager Jobs Typically, unsolicited events are evaluated and raised by third-party software. Enterprise Manager allows you to implement unsolicted events through the Job system and Tcl. You create a Tcl job and submit it as a periodic job. The Tcl contains logic to evaluate the underlying test and decide whether it needs to raise the event and at what severity level. Since the job is submitted as a periodic job, the underlying test is evaluated periodically like all regular Enterprise Manager event tests. Using techniques like the ones scribed below, users of Enterprise can implement event monitoring specific to their environments. Example 1: Simple Job Raising an Unsolicited Event It is possible to submit a job with an imbedded OS command task that executes the oemevent program and passes the program all necessary arguments. All users that have registered for the event raised by oemevent, will receive the event notification. The event has to be known to the administrator submitting the job that raises it. However, the job that raises the event may contain enough logic to evaluate the underlying test and decide whether it needs to raise the event and at what severity level. Such a job may be submitted as a periodic job so that the underlying test is evaluated periodically, which is similar to regular OEM event tests. Unsolicited events (their logic actually) are evaluated in their own process and within the proper OS security envelope. For this reason, no longer pose security or robustness threats to the system. What we have introduced here is a procedure where one needs to submit a job in order to monitor for an event. Consider as an example how to implement an event test which triggers when a particular file is found. Lets call this event /myevents/node/files/filefound. The following Tcl script needs to be submitted as the job: # event name set event_name /myevents/node/files/filefound # filename to look for comes at the first (and only) argument set file_name [lindex $argv 0] # check for the file, and if it’s found trigger the event as critical Events 5-15
  • 138. Event Categories and Types if { [file exists $file_name] } { orareportevent $event_name $oramsg(oraobject) 2 "$file_name found" } In order to receive this event, a user needs to register an event with the Unsolicited test selected and configured to filter in events with name /myevents/node/files/filefound. This event should be registered against a node and will trigger against it. The message attached to the event occurrence will contain the values of all parameters passed into orareportevent. Although this event is fairly straightforward, there are two things wrong:: 1. The event does not ever clear – it should, if the file disappears 2. The event will trigger every time the above script is evaluated, even if it has triggered the time before – you will receive the same alert multiple (possibly infinite) times. An event should not trigger unless there is a severity change. Any other scripting language or executable program can also be used to implement the logic of an unsolicited event test. However, Tcl is preferable because it allows platform-independent implementation and the fact that the code may be sent from the Enterprise Manager Console ‘on-demand’ without requiring anything to be installed on the Intelligent Agent side. Example 2: Unsolicited Events with the Proper Lifecycle As with regular Enterprise Manager events, unsolicited events could be triggered only once per condition detected and could clear automatically if the condition that triggers the event is no longer met. Events adhering to this operational pattern are said to have a "proper lifecycle." Typically, scripts that implement unsolicited events are composed of two basic parts: 1. The part that evaluates the event and sets its associated severity 2. The part that handles the event reporting and avoids multiple notifications if the severity does not change The following Tcl script illustrates this two-part script implementation, as well as a technique that allows proper event lifecycle. #--------------------------------------------------------------------- # # Tcl Procedure # orareportevent1 # 5-16 Oracle Enterprise Manager Administrator’s Guide
  • 139. Event Categories and Types # Purpose: # Trigger an unsolicited event only previous state is different # # Arguments: # - event_name: event test to trigger # - severity: new severity # - message: message to be attached to the event report # #--------------------------------------------------------------------- proc orareportevent1 {event_name severity message} { # define a ’lock’ that its contents define the previous event status # and figure out the event state during the previous execution global oramsg append event_lock [tempdir] "/" $oramsg(jobid) ".el" if { [file exists $event_lock] } { Events 5-17 set f [open $event_lock r] gets $f previous_severity close $f } else { set previous_severity -1 } # if event test state has changed, trigger the event at new severity if { $previous_severity != $severity } { orareportevent $event_name $oramsg(oraobject) $severity $message if { $severity == -1 } { rmfile $event_lock } else { set f [open $event_lock w] puts $f $severity close $f } } } #--------------------------------------------------------------------- # # Event Test Name: # /myevents/node/files/filefound # # Purpose: # Monitor for the existence of a particular file # The test triggers at warning level if the file exists, but # at critical level if the file is larger than the specified # value #
  • 140. Event Categories and Types # Arguments: # - filename to look for # - critical file size # #--------------------------------------------------------------------- set event_name /myevents/node/files/filefound set file_name [lindex $argv 0] set critical_filesize [lindex $argv 1] if { [file exists $file_name] } { # if the file exists calculate its size in Kilobytes set file_size [expr [file size $file_name] / 1024] if { $file_size > $critical_filesize } { # if file is larger than the critical value, trigger as critical orareportevent1 $event_name 2 "Size: $file_size Kb" } else { # if file is smaller than the critical value, trigger as warning orareportevent1 $event_name 1 "Filesize: $file_size Kb" } } else { # if file in no longer there, clear the event orareportevent1 $event_name -1 "File does not exist" } Example 3: An Unsolicited Event Script that Accesses the Oracle Database This section contains an example of unsolicited event tests. In this case, the test evaluation involves connecting to an Oracle instance and performing some SQL against it. This example checks the size of a particular table in the database and triggers the event when a set threshold is crossed. There is a warning value and a critical value. The size of the table is measured by counting the number of its rows. #--------------------------------------------------------------------- # # Tcl Procedure # orareportevent1 # # Purpose: # Trigger an unsolicited event only previous state is different # # Arguments: # - event_name: event test to trigger # - severity: new severity # - message: message to be attached to the event report 5-18 Oracle Enterprise Manager Administrator’s Guide
  • 141. Event Categories and Types # #--------------------------------------------------------------------- proc orareportevent1 {event_name severity message} { # define a ’lock’ that its contents define the previous event status # and figure out the event state during the previous execution global oramsg append event_lock [tempdir] "/" $oramsg(jobid) ".el" if { [file exists $event_lock] } { Events 5-19 set f [open $event_lock r] gets $f previous_severity close $f } else { set previous_severity -1 } # if event test state has changed, trigger the event at the new severity if { $previous_severity != $severity } { orareportevent $event_name $oramsg(oraobject) $severity $message if { $severity == -1 } { rmfile $event_lock } else { set f [open $event_lock w] puts $f $severity close $f } } } #--------------------------------------------------------------------- # # Event Test Name: # /myevents/database/space/tablesize # # Purpose: # Monitor the size of a particular database table # The test triggers at warning level when the warning threshold # is crossed and at critical level when the critical threshold # is crossed # # Arguments: # - table name # - critical threshold # - warning threshold # - username/password for conneting to target (optional) # #---------------------------------------------------------------------
  • 142. Event Categories and Types set event_name /myevents/database/space/tablesize set table_name [lindex $argv 0] set critical_threshold [lindex $argv 1] set warning_threshold [lindex $argv 2] if { $argc == 4 } { set connect [format "%s@%s" [lindex $argv 3] $oramsg(oraobject)] } else { set connect [format "%s/%s@%s" $SMP_USER $SMP_PASSWORD $oramsg(oraobject)] } if {[catch {oralogon $connect} lda]} { append msg "Cannot connect to target." "n" $oramsg(errortxt) orafail $msg } if {[catch {oraopen $lda} cur]} { append msg "Cannot connect to target." "n" $oramsg(errortxt) oralogoff $lda orafail $msg } set sql [format "select count(*) from %s" $table_name] if {[catch {orasql $cur $sql}]} { append msg "Cannot execute SQL against the target." "n" $oramsg(errortxt) oraclose $cur oralogoff $lda orafail $msg } if {[catch {orafetch $cur} row]} { append msg "Cannot execute SQL against the target." "n" $oramsg(errortxt) oraclose $cur oralogoff $lda orafail $msg } set current_tablesize [lindex $row 0] if { $current_tablesize > $critical_threshold } { orareportevent1 $event_name 2 "Table:$table_name #rows:$current_tablesize" } elseif { $current_tablesize > $warning_threshold } { orareportevent1 $event_name 1 "Table:$table_name #rows:$current_tablesize" } else { orareportevent1 $event_name -1 "Table:$table_name #rows:$current_tablesize" 5-20 Oracle Enterprise Manager Administrator’s Guide
  • 143. Event Pane Events 5-21 } A number of OraTcl verbs were used in this script. Refer to the Intelligent Agent User’s Guide for details on OraTcl verbs. Note that the preferred credentials, specified in the console, are available to the script writer via the SMP_USER and SMP_PASSWORD Tcl global variables. For jobs against a database, the values of those variables are set to the username and password specified as preferred credentials for that database. Notice that this script allows for an optional overwrite of the preferred credentials via an optional forth input argument. Unsolicited Event Caveats n To monitor for an unsolicited event against multiple targets on the same node (say the event above against multiple databases on the same node), you need to register for the unsolicited event multiple times so that you may have the flexibility of proper filtering. n Unsolicited Events cannot be used with Fixit Jobs. Event Pane The Event pane contains the following pages: n Alerts Page n History Page n Registered Page You can switch between the pages by clicking the tab of each page. The rows in any page can be sorted on any column by clicking the column heading. See Figure 5–1, "Event Menu and Pane" for an illustration of the Event pane. The Event pane can be hidden or shown by selecting Show/Hide Event Display in the Console View menu. You can also hide or show the pane by clicking on the flag icon in the Console toolbar.
  • 144. Event Pane Figure 5–1 Event Menu and Pane Alerts Page The Alerts page displays event tests that have been triggered. Severity Severity of the event occurrence: critical (red flag), warning (yellow flag), clear (green flag), unknown (gray flag), or error state (yellow hexagon). Event Name of the event. Target Target where the event was triggered. Time/Date Time and date of the event occurrence. Assigned To Administrators assigned to work on the event occurrence. 5-22 Oracle Enterprise Manager Administrator’s Guide
  • 145. Event Pane Events 5-23 Owner Administrator who owns the event. Viewing Alerts To view details of an event that has occurred, double-click on the event to display the Event Viewer property sheet. You can enter notes on the nature and progress of the event condition. Note: Comments entered into the log are viewable/editable by admins with the Modify permission. After you have reviewed an event, you can move it to the History page. See "Event Viewer" on page 5-27 for more information. History Page The Event History page displays a history of events that have occurred and have been moved to History by an administrator or cleared by an Intelligent Agent. The Event History page displays the same columns as the Alerts page. The History page is refreshed automatically each time you move between the History page and the Alerts or Registered page. However, to refresh the event history list while currently viewing the History pane, you must click the Refresh History icon located at the bottom left of the event History page. To clear all entries in the History page, click the Clear History icon located next to the Refresh History icon. Registered Page The Registered page displays the events that have been registered, or submitted, to monitor test conditions on any network objects. The Registered page contains the following information: Event Name of the event. Target Target where the event was monitored. Target Type Type of event destination: database, node, listener, web server, Concurrent Manager, Status Current registration status of the event: Registered, Registration Pending, De-Registration Pending, and Registration Failed.
  • 146. Event Menu Owner Administrator who owns the event. Note: Under certain circumstances, an event will remain in a Registration Pending state. There are two probable causes: 1. The Intelligent Agent on the node with which you are trying to register the event is down, or the node is not connected to the network. 2. The node with which you want to register the event was defined manually (without using the Intelligent Agent). Connections to a manually defined node will not allow you to utilize remote management functionality such as Jobs or Events. You must first de-register any jobs or events against the node, remove the node from the Console navigator, and then rediscover the node while it is running a 7.3.4 or later Intelligent Agent. Event Menu The Event menu allows you to set up event and administrator information. This menu also provides options to register, track, and view specific events. Menu options are enabled or displayed according to the items selected in the Event pane. See Figure 5–1, "Event Menu and Pane" for an illustration of the Event menu. Note: When you register or remove an event, there is usually a slight delay while the Intelligent Agent processes the request. Create Event Displays the Event property sheet and allows you to create the definition of a new event. See "Creating, Modifying, and Registering an Event" on page 5-29 for more information. Edit Event Displays the definition of the selected event and allow you to edit the event permissions. Edit Event Occurrence Displays the definition of an existing event. See "Creating, Modifying, and Registering an Event" on page 5-29 for more information. Acknowledge Acknowledges the selected event in the Alerts page. When an event triggers, an entry is added to the Alerts page. In the severity column, a flag of the appropriate color is displayed along with a pair of eyeglasses. The eyeglasses also appear 5-24 Oracle Enterprise Manager Administrator’s Guide
  • 147. Event Menu whenever there is a change in the status of the event (e.g. from ‘warning’ to ‘critical’) If you choose to "acknowledge" this event, then it means you are aware of this event occurrence and hence the eyeglasses will disappear. Copy to Library Copy the selected event in the Event pane to the Event Library. Remove Event Removes the selected event from the Event pane, effectively de-registering the event. This menu option only appears when an event test is selected in the Registered page. Move to History Moves the selected event in the Alerts page to Event History page of the Event pane. Refresh History Updates the History pane with the most recent entries. Clear History Clears the contents of the Event History page. Report Event History Saves the contents of the Event History page to a report. Report Registered Events Creates a report of currently registered events. Report Event Alerts Creates a report of the events that have triggered. Event Library Displays the Event Library dialog. See "Event Library Dialog" on page 5-26 for more information. Events 5-25 Context-Sensitive Menus If you select an item in the Event pane with the right mouse button, the context-sensitive menu for that item appears. This menu is a subset of the Event menu plus selection-specific menu options.
  • 148. Event Menu Event Library Dialog The Event Library dialog displays the events that have been created and saved to the Event Library. The advantage to using the Event Library is that both events and any associated target information can be stored, copied, or modified in the library for future use. When you create an event, you have the option of submitting, saving to the Event Library, or submitting and saving to the Event Library. This dialog contains the following information: Event Name of the event. Owner Administrator who created the event. Editing an Event Select an event and click Edit to display the property sheet for the event. The property sheet allows you to view and modify the events. Editing most event parameters can only be done via the Event Library dialog box. Oracle Event Tests Several predefined event tests have been installed with Oracle Enterprise Manager. These appear in the Tests page of the Event property sheet. You can add these tests to an event. The tests include: n Oracle DB UpDown: checks whether a database is up or down. n Oracle Host UpDown: checks whether a node is up or down. n Oracle Listener UpDown: checks whether a listener is up or down. n Data Gatherer UpDown: checks whether the data gatherer is up or down. Note: Only the UpDown tests are included with Oracle Enterprise Manager. Additional advanced event tests are available with the optional Oracle Diagnostics Pack. To view the specific tests assigned to an event, double-click on the event in the Event Library dialog and view the Test page of the Event property sheet. See the online help for Oracle events, "Oracle Event Tests" on page 5-40, or the Diagnostic Pack documentation for information on Oracle events and their parameters. 5-26 Oracle Enterprise Manager Administrator’s Guide
  • 149. Event Viewer Events 5-27 Event Viewer The Event Viewer property sheet displays details on a selected event in the History or Alerts page. When an event triggers, you select the triggered event and bring it up in the Event Viewer. The Event Viewer contains information on why the event triggered. You can also assign the event to the a particular administrator and put instructions for other administrators via the Log page. You can enter optional comments in the Log page, which is good way to share information about an event with other administrators. Once cleared, events are automatically moved to the History page. The pages of the Event Viewer include: n General n Log n Notification Details General The Event Viewer General page displays statistics and owner information on a selected event. You can display the property sheet for the event with the Show Event Definition option. The following statistics are displayed on the General page: Target Service (database, node, etc.) where the event triggered. Target Type Type of service, such as database, listener, or node. Last Updated Time of last update. Owner Administrator that created the event. Assigned To List of administrators that are receiving notifications for this event. Test Name Event test that was evaluated. Severity Severity of the event occurrence: critical, warning, clear, unknown, or error..
  • 150. Event Viewer Time/Date Time and date of the event occurrence. Message Message generated from the alert. You may position your cursor above the message to see it displayed as balloon text. Log The Event Viewer Log page displays an entry whenever an event is moved to history. An event can be moved manually with the Move to History menu option or automatically when the severity of the event changes. The Log page also allows comments to be entered on a selected event. Any administrator with permissions to modify the event can add comments in this page. You enter comments in the text box and select the Apply or OK button to add the comment. The information displayed in the Log page includes: Type Entry Text input field allowing you to add comments. Entry Comment that has been entered for this event. Author Administrator that entered the comment. Date/Time The date and time when the comment was entered. Notification Details The Event Viewer Notification Details displays details of email and paging notifications sent for a selected event. The information displayed in Details page includes: Severity The severity flag associated with the event occurrence. Administrator Administrator that was notified. 5-28 Oracle Enterprise Manager Administrator’s Guide
  • 151. Creating, Modifying, and Registering an Event Date/Time The date and time of the notification. Method Method of notification: E-mail or page. Notification Status Status of the notification, indicating whether the notification was sent, is pending, or has failed. Message If the notification failed, this message indicates the reason for notification failure. Events 5-29 Creating, Modifying, and Registering an Event Events include the destination type and the event information that you want to monitor. Events can consist of multiple event tests. To create or modify an event: 1. Choose the Create Event option from the Event menu to display the Event property sheet. (you can also display the Event property sheet by opening an event from the Event Library dialog.) 2. Complete or modify the fields in the General, Parameter, and Permissions pages of the property sheet to create a new event. If you modify an event that has been registered, those changes are not used by the registered event. 3. When you have completed the Event property sheet: a. Choose Submit, to register the event against the selected destinations. The new event is not saved to the Event Library. b. Choose Add to the Library (or Save to Library if editing an event from the Library) to save the event to the Event Library. The event will not be submitted to the target destinations at this time. The new event appears in the Event Library dialog. c. Choose Submit and Add to Library (or Submit and Save to Library) to submit the event to the selected destinations and save the event to the Event Library. The new event appears in the Event Library dialog. If you registered an event, the Intelligent Agent for a destination processes the event and the event appears in the Registered page of the Event pane. Each destination service is listed separately with the event.
  • 152. Creating, Modifying, and Registering an Event Note: There is usually a slight delay between the time the event is registered and the actual notification by the Intelligent Agent. When threshold values are exceeded for the tests in an event, the event appears in the Alerts page of the Event pane. This notification changes the color of the severity flag for the event in the Alerts page. If the destination database icon is displayed in the Group pane, the flag on the icon changes color. The colors and their meaning are: n Unknown (gray flag) n Event cleared (green flag) n Warning (yellow flag) n Alert (red flag) n Error (yellow hexagon) Cases where an event notification is Unknown (gray flag) indicate the target or node where the event is registered is unavailable. Warning: Do not register an UpDown event (included in the Oracle DB Fault event) against the database or node where the Repository schema is stored. If the database containing Repository goes down, the Management Server also shuts down. Hence, the Intelligent Agent cannot inform the Management Server that the database is down. The property sheet for creating a new event is the same as the property sheet for modifying an event, except that the event name field is read-only. See Figure 5–2, "Event General Page" for an illustration of the Event property sheet. See "Event Categories and Types" on page 5-10 for more information. Modifying a Registered Event To modify a registered event, perform the following steps: 1. If you need to modify any of the administrator permissions for the event, including enabling or disabling notifypermissions, then you can select the Event from the Registered pane, make the modifications, then click "OK" to accept the changes. If the monitored destinations for the event specify multiple targets, e.g. databases A, B, C, then any changes made to the permissions for the Event will apply to all targets, A, B and C. 5-30 Oracle Enterprise Manager Administrator’s Guide
  • 153. Creating, Modifying, and Registering an Event 2. If you need to modify any other event parameter (destination list, parameter values, etc). then first make a copy of the event to the library if you haven’t already done so. The "Copy to Library" is an option available from the right-mouse context menu of the registered event. Next, de-register the Event(s) you’d like to modify. Then, go to the Event library, and select and edit the event. Finally ’Submit’ the event for registration. Events 5-31 Event General Page On the General page, you determine the event name, destination type, description, fixit job, polling frequency, and whether this event should monitor third-party events. Figure 5–2 Event General Page Event Name: Enter an event name. Destination Type: Select the destination type you want to monitor from the pull-down list. The types include Database, Listener, Node, or other service that is integrated into the Console.
  • 154. Creating, Modifying, and Registering an Event If the selected Destination Type is "Node", then a second pull-down list of operating systems will appear. If you choose ‘All’, then event tests that apply to all types of nodes, i.e. operating systems, will be available. If you choose a particular operating system, (e.g. Solaris), then additional operating-system specific event tests will be available. In general, the selection of the Destination Type determines the list of Available Destinations. If your choose "Node" and a particular operating system, such as Solaris, then the list of available destinations will show all Solaris nodes that are running at least an 8.1.7 Intelligent Agent. Any Solaris nodes that use older agents will not be shown. Event Description: Enter a description or comment for the event Fixit Job A fixit job is designed to correct a problem. For example, you may want the Intelligent Agent to run a job to restart a database when the database instance has shut down unexpectedly. Fixit jobs have been created with the Job system and have been designated as fixit jobs. The jobs must be submitted and running on the same destination that the event is set on. You must select destinations to make fixit jobs available in the pull-down list. See "General Page" on page 4-14 for more information. Fixit job options are: n To choose a fixit job, select an existing fixit job from the pull-down list. n Select <None> if you do not want to use a fixit job. To turn off a fixit job after an event has been registered, you can copy the registered event to Event Library, remove the event registration, edit the event from the Library to remove the fixit job, and re-submit the event for registration. Note: Each event must use a unique fixit job on each destination where the event is registered. Also, when a single Intelligent Agent is monitoring multiple databases at a destination, create a separate event and fixit job for each database. Frequency Determine the frequency that you want the test to be evaluated on the selected destinations. The frequency determines how often the event condition is checked. For example, if the frequency is set to 60 seconds, the event condition is checked every 60 seconds. The frequency should not be less than 60 seconds. To set the frequency: 5-32 Oracle Enterprise Manager Administrator’s Guide
  • 155. Creating, Modifying, and Registering an Event n Enter a value in the frequency field or select a value from the pull-down list. n Select the interval units from the pull-down list. Consider carefully the value for frequency. Some event evaluations may take more time, particularly if there are large numbers of objects to be monitored. The following list covers some of the potentially longer-running database event tests: Events 5-33 n Continued Row* n Index Rebuild* n Chunk Small n Fast Segment Growth n Maximum Extents n Multiple Extents n Tablespace Full n SnapShot Log Full * Continued Row and Index Rebuild are resource expensive because they perform an ANALYZE on the segments they monitor. See "Event Notifications" on page 5-7 for details on the notification frequency. Enable Unsolicited Events Check this box to monitor unsolicited events. See "Unsolicited Event Tests" on page 5-12 for more information. Event Tests Page On the Tests page, you determine the event tests that you want to perform. Event test are arranged hierarchically in a tree list for ease of viewing and selection. As with the Console Navigator, you can expand and compress entries in the tree list.
  • 156. Creating, Modifying, and Registering an Event Figure 5–3 Event Tests Page Available Tests: Select the event tests in the list you want to perform in this event, then click on the << (Add) button to move the events to the Selected Events list. Selected Tests: Select the event tests in the list you want to remove from this event, then click on the >> (Remove) button. Event Parameters Page The parameter settings for the selected event tests are entered in the Parameters page of the Event property sheet. The settings and types of parameters vary according to the event test selected. Some event tests do not have parameters. See the online help for Oracle events and "Oracle Event Tests" on page 5-40 for information on tests and their parameters. 5-34 Oracle Enterprise Manager Administrator’s Guide
  • 157. Creating, Modifying, and Registering an Event Events 5-35 Figure 5–4 Event Parameters Page Parameters The parameters for an event are displayed when the event is selected in the Selected Tests list. The parameters vary according to the event selected. Some events do not have parameters. You can accept the default values or change the values for the parameters. To enter parameter values for an event, you can enter a value directly into a parameter field. Filtering Filtering is used in events such as Chunk Small and Maximum Extents. Examples of filters are = ’SYSTEM’, LIKE ’%SMP%’, and IN (’SYSTEM’, ’TOOLS’). Note that the quotes are single quotes. Use uppercase to match the case of the database object names. If you enter a filter value that does not select any objects or is an incorrect value, the event fails. Event Permissions Page Determine the permissions that you want to assign to the event with the Permissions Page. This allows other administrators to view or modify the event. Notifications are also assigned with this page.
  • 158. Creating, Modifying, and Registering an Event The levels of permission that you can assign to an Enterprise Manager administrator are: None Does not allow the administrator to view this event anywhere. View Allows the administrator to view the event, inspect event properties, and receive notifications. Modify Allows the administrator to modify the event’s log (See "Event Viewer" on page 5-27), and edit the event's properties except those reserved for Full permission. Full Allows the administrator to delete the event, modify permissions for other administrators, and change the ownership of the event. Notify Allows the administrator to receive enhanced event notifications on the objects through paging or email. Other notifications will be routed to that particular administrator’s Console. Notify permission cannot be assigned if the administrator's permission level is set to None. Any permissions assigned on this page supersede any administrator default permissions. See "Permissions" on page 1-23 for more information. Also, the administrator’s notification schedule must be set up in order for them to receive the E-mail/page notification. Enable SNMP Notifications When checked, permits external notification (SNMP traps) for third-party event tests at the destination where the Intelligent Agent is located. Show Notification Schedule Show Notification Schedule displays the notification schedule for the event. The schedule shown on this page is a combined schedule for all administrators that have been given "Notify" privileges for this event. To view administrators assigned to a particular time slot, use the right mouse button to call up the context-sensitive menu, choose the "Remove Recipient" option, and view the list of administrators. To add or remove notifications for an administrator, display the context menu (press the right mouse button) on any time block. The context menu provides options for adding and removing recipients of the notifications. 5-36 Oracle Enterprise Manager Administrator’s Guide
  • 159. Creating, Modifying, and Registering an Event Events 5-37 Event Progress Page The Event Progress page displays when you edit an event from the Registered page of the Events pane. This page provides the current registration status for the event selected: Registered, Registration Failed, or Registration Pending. In addition, the destination and time and date when registration was attempted is shown. When the Progress page is displayed, it shows only the status for the selected event. If the selected event is registered, or had been submitted for registration on other destinations, you can view the status of this event for those destinations by selecting the desired target from the Destination pull-down list. The status of the event displays for that destination. To view the status of this event for all destinations simultaneously, select <All>. The following options are available on the Progress page: Destination (pull-down list) Select the destination of the event you want to view from the pull-down list. Select <All> for all destinations for which this event has either been registered or failed to be registered. Status Status for the event: Registered, Registration Pending, or Registration Failed. Destination Network destination for the event. Date/Time Date and Time the event was submitted for registration. Show Output Displays the Event Status Message dialog. This button is active only when you have selected a failed event registration. Selecting this option will allow you to view the reasons for the failure. Save List Saves the contents of the list to a text file. Example: Creating and Registering an Event In the following example, a new event for monitoring extents in a database is created and registered at several databases. When creating an event, the General, Tests, Parameters, and Permissions Pages are completed to define the event. You
  • 160. Creating, Modifying, and Registering an Event need to register, or submit, an event to run event tests on specific destinations in the network environment. The following example is used for illustrative purposes. When creating actual events, you must enter accurate values for the polling frequency, and parameter values. 1. To create a new event, select Create Event from the Event Menu to display the General Page of the Event property sheet. 2. Enter an event name in the Event Name field, such as Maximum Extents. Provide a descriptive name so the event can be easily identified from the Event pane. 3. Enter a brief description of and comments about the event in the Description field. The event in this example will monitor Maximum Extents. This event is only available with the Oracle Diagnostics Pack. 4. Select Database from the Destination Type pull-down list. 5. Keep the frequency at 60 seconds. 6. Do not select a fixit job (if any are available). These are jobs that have been created with the Job system and have been designated as fixit jobs. 7. Select a database from the Available Destinations list, then click on the << (Add) button. The database is moved to the Selected Destinations list and will be monitored for the events in the event. 8. Repeat the previous step for several additional databases. 9. Click on the Tests page tab to display the Tests page. 10. Select the Maximum Extents event test. This test checks the number of available extents for table, index, cluster, or rollback segments. Because this test accesses system tables, you must set up Administrator Preferred Credentials with an administrator that has system privileges. See "Preferred Credentials" on page 1-25 for more information. Note: The Maximum Extents event test is only available with the optional Diagnostics Pack. The standard Up/Down event tests provided with Enterprise Manager do not require parameter settings. 5-38 Oracle Enterprise Manager Administrator’s Guide
  • 161. Creating, Modifying, and Registering an Event 11. Click on the << (Add) button. The event test is moved to the Selected Tests list Events 5-39 and will be added to the event. 12. Click on the Parameters page tab to display that page. If you had selected several tests, you would need to select a specific test in the Selected Tests list to display the Parameters for the event test. 13. Click on Warning threshold in the scrolling list, to change the value of the parameter. Enter 3 in the text field. 14. Click on Alert threshold in the scrolling list, to change the value of the parameter. Enter 2 in the text field. 15. Do not change the other parameters. Note that the * in the Tablespace name, Segment name, and Segment type parameter fields signifies all existing values. To monitor a specific tablespace, such as USERS, you would enter = ’USERS’ in the Tablespace name field. 16. Click on the Permissions page tab to display that page. Assign permissions to all administrators to allow them to view the event and receive notifications. 17. After you have completed the event property sheet, select the Submit and Add to the Library button at the bottom of the property sheet to submit the event to the selected destinations. 18. If you want to modify the event, you can edit this event in Event Library dialog. In order for new values to affect event monitoring, you need to de-register and then re-register the event. When an event is submitted, each destination is validated and the Intelligent Agent for each destination processes the event. If the registration is successful, the event appears in the Registered page of the Event pane. Each destination database is listed separately with the event. If an event condition occurs or threshold values are exceeded for an event test, a notification is sent to the Alerts page of the Console Event pane. If administrators have been selected to be notified by email or paging, an email or page is sent. The event notification changes the color of the severity flag for the event in the Alerts page. If the destination database icon is displayed in the Group pane, the flag on the icon changes color. The colors and their meaning are: n Unknown (gray flag) n Cleared (green flag) n Warning (yellow flag) n Critical (red flag)
  • 162. Oracle Event Tests n Error ( yellow hexagon) After an event condition is fixed, the event is cleared automatically. There are four event tests that are exceptions to this rule: Alert, Data Block Corruption, Session Terminated, Archiver Hung. Since there is no way to determine automatically that these event conditions have been resolved, these events must be manually cleared. Administrator Event Notification Oracle Enterprise Manager allows you to specify administrators that are notified when a particular event condition occurs. Each administrator can be associated with an email ID and/or a pager number. When using a paging service or email notification, each administrator can be assigned responsibility for specific systems at specific days and times. For more information on setting up Oracle Enterprise Manager administrators, see "Managing Enterprise Manager Administrators" on page 1-8. Oracle Event Tests This section lists the Event system event tests with their parameters and return values. See "Event Parameters Page" on page 5-34 for information on entering parameter values. A list of event tests with numeric pager event Ids is also provided. See "Numeric Pager Job/Event Ids" on page 5-42 for more information. Event tests are specified for database, listener, and node services. The event tests are also divided into fault, space, resource, and performance management categories. Only the UpDown event tests are included with Oracle Enterprise Manager. Additional advanced event tests are available with the optional Oracle Diagnostics Pack. The event test scripts are written in the Tool Command Language (Tcl) enhanced with Oracle Tcl commands (OraTcl). For information on using Tcl and OraTcl to write event scripts, see Oracle Intelligent Agent User’s Guide. Some of the event tests require special tables in the database. For example, the catblock.sql script needs to be run to use the User Blocks event test. Some of the database event tests, such as Chain Row, require access to system tables and require additional permissions. You need to set up preferred credentials for the monitored database with an administrator that has system privileges. See "Enterprise Manager Monitor Role" on page 5-5 and "Preferred Credentials" on page 1-25 for more information. 5-40 Oracle Enterprise Manager Administrator’s Guide
  • 163. Oracle Event Tests Note: If an Up/Down event test (Database Up/down, Listener Up/Down) has been registered on a node, then the UpDown Node event test is implicitly registered and is triggered when the Intelligent Agent is down, or when the Management Server looses contact with the node. Events 5-41 Database Fault Management Event Tests This category of event test tracks severe problems that require immediate attention. UpDown (Database) This event test checks whether the database being monitored is running. If this event test is triggered, other database events are not ignored. Parameters none Action The Startup Database job task can be set up as a fixit job for automatically correcting the problem. Note: If the listener serving a database is down, this event test may be triggered because the Intelligent Agent uses the listener to communicate with the database. Node Fault Management Events This category of events monitors for catastrophic conditions on the system. Immediate action needs to be taken by the administrator. UpDown (Node) This event checks whether the Intelligent Agent on a node can be accessed from the Console via periodic "heartbeating" between the Management Server and the Intelligent Agent. Since this event does not actually register with the Intelligent Agent, no fixit jobs can be associated with it. If the defaults are accepted, this event will trigger within five minutes of the Intelligent Agent becoming inaccessible and will clear within three minutes of the Intelligent Agent becoming accessible again. Parameters none
  • 164. Oracle Event Tests Listener Fault Management Events This category of events monitors for catastrophic conditions on the system. Immediate action needs to be taken by the administrator. SQL*Net UpDown (Listener) This event checks whether the listener on the node being monitored is available. Parameters none Action The Startup Listener job task can be set up as a fixit job for automatically correcting the problem. Data Gatherer Fault Management Events The Oracle Data Gatherer Alert and UpDown events are both Fault Management events for the node destination type. This category of events monitors for catastrophic conditions on the system. Immediate action needs to be taken by the administrator. UpDown (Data Gatherer) This event checks whether the Intelligent Agent data gathering service on a node can be accessed from the Console. If the Intelligent Agent data gathering service is down, this event is triggered. Parameters none Numeric Pager Job/Event Ids The Event Management System provides paging services that notify an administrator with a page when an event has occurred. Alphanumeric pagers provide a brief text message identifying the event. Numeric pagers provide the numeric pager event Ids to identify the event. For job notifications, you will receive a 6 digit number. The first 3 digits indicate the job-id. The last 3 digits indicate job status. For event notifications you will receive the event ID with the status code. 5-42 Oracle Enterprise Manager Administrator’s Guide
  • 165. Event System Features and Requirements For a complete list of pager job/event IDs, see "Paging Status Codes for Numeric Pages" on page 1-18 Events 5-43 General Event System Troubleshooting Procedures The following procedures will assist you and/or Oracle Support if problems are encountered with the Event subsystem. Obtaining Enterprise Manager Repository Status If you need to contact Oracle Support, you must provide specific information on the status of your Oracle Enterprise Manager repository. To assist you, a SQL script has been provided that extracts pertinent Repository data and generates a debug log file. To generate the log file, perform the following procedure: 1. Save oms.log.* for every Management Server connected to the repository. The log files are, by default, located in $ORACLE_HOME/sysman/log. 2. Log on as the repository user and connect to the repository using SQL*Plus. For example: connect <repository name>/<repository password> 3. Run the following SQL script: @$ORACLE_HOME/sysman/admin/evtdbg.sql 4. This SQL script will generate a file called evtdbg.log in the directory where Server Manager or SQL*Plus is invoked. 5. Submit the Management Server log files along with evtdbg.log to Oracle Support. Note: The size of the evtdbg.log file can be quite large. Event System Features and Requirements Because the Enterprise Manager framework is a three-tier system that can manage a heterogeneous environment, it is important to keep in mind various software
  • 166. Event System Features and Requirements version requirements necessary for proper event system operation. The following table lists event system features and associated software version requirements. Table 5–2 Event Features and Their Requirements Feature Name Description Enterprise Manager Version 5-44 Oracle Enterprise Manager Administrator’s Guide Required Agent Management Server/Console Required Works In Browser Advanced Events All events for databases, nodes, listeners. See Enterprise Manager online help for more information. Diagnostics Pack 1.5.5 and highe.r All supported agents, latest recommended For EM 2.x, the Management Server and Console that corresponds with that Pack yes Event Handler Component that allows you to log event information or execute custom commands in response to an event occurrence. See Appendix A, "Enterprise Manager Event Handler" for more information 2.0.4 and higher/ beta n/a 2.0.4 OMS n/a 2.1 and higher / production n/a 2.1 OMS n/a Improved Node Up/Down Monitoring Enhancement to the Node Up/Down event test. Provides more information on whether or not the node is down, the agent is down, etc. 2.2 and higher all supported 2.2 and higher yes User-Defined SQL Test Allows you to write your own custom SQL to monitor database events Diagnostics Pack 2.1 and higher 8.1.6 and higher 2.1 and higher yes Enhanced monitoring for target subcomponents "For events whose targets involve multiple subcomponents (e.g. monitor tablespace full for ALL tablespaces), information on which subcomponent is in alarm is now provided "2.2 and higher 8.1.7 and higher 2.2 and higher yes Context sensitive help for Event tests "In the Parameters tab of the Event dialog, invoking ""Help"" will bring up information pertinent to the current selected event test "2.2 and higher n/a 2.2 and higher yes
  • 167. Event System Features and Requirements Events 5-45 Events with synonymous event tests "Events can be created that have more than one of the same event test (e.g. a ""Tablespace Full"" test for ""SYSTEM"", another ""Tablespace Full"" event test for ""USER"") "2.2 and higher all supported by EM 2.2 2.2. and higher yes Job and Events Notification filters n Filters that apply to both paging & email Allows you to filter pages & emails based on job and event status 2.1 all agents supported by EM 2.1 2.1 yes n Different filters for paging & email Allows separate filters for pages & emails based on job and event status 2.2 and higher all agents supported by EM 2.2 2.2 and higher yes Customization for paging & email messages Allows you to customize the messages for email and pages Diagnostics Pack 2.2. and higher all agents supported by EM 2.2 2.2 and higher yes Advanced O/S event tests New event tests that monitor operating system specific metrics 2.2 and higher 8.1.7 and higher 2.2 and higher yes Concurrent Manager Events Events to monitor error conditions against the Oracle Applications Concurrent Processing Server 2.0.4 and higher 8.1.5 and higher 2.0.4 and higher yes Forms Server Events Events to monitor error conditions against the Oracle Developer Forms Server 2.0.4 and higher (2.0.4 console needs Forms Extensions. 8.0.6 and higher (requires Forms Agent Extensions. 2.0.4 and higher (2.0.4 console needs Forms Extensions. yes Program Filtering in Concurrent Manager Events Allows you to monitor particular Oracle Applications Concurrent Programs. Also allows you to exclude particular Concurrent Programs from being monitored. 2.2 and higher 8.1.7 and higher 2.2 and higher yes Table 5–2 Event Features and Their Requirements Feature Name Description Enterprise Manager Version Required Agent Management Server/Console Required Works In Browser
  • 168. Event System Features and Requirements 5-46 Oracle Enterprise Manager Administrator’s Guide
  • 169. Part II The Database Administration Tools
  • 171. 6 DBA Management Pack The primary database administration components of Oracle Enterprise Manager are contained in the DBA Management Pack, which is a suite of database administration tools and wizards bundled with Oracle Enterprise Manager. This functionality can be accessed with the new DBA Studio tool or launched separately from the Oracle Enterprise Manager Console or operating system. DBA Management Pack features can be used to perform most of your database administration tasks, and support all versions of Oracle databases. DBA Studio or individual DBA Management Pack tools can be launched by either connecting to the Oracle Management Server using Oracle Enterprise Manager’s three-tier framework, or by connecting directly to a database. DBA Management Pack includes the following functionality: DBA Management Pack 6-1 n Instance Management n Schema Management n Security Management n Storage Management n Replication Management n JServer Management n Cache Management n SQL*Plus Worksheet With this functionality you can: n Complete database administration operations quickly and conveniently using a mouse rather than manually entering SQL commands
  • 172. DBA Studio n Concurrently perform multiple tasks in multiple Oracle Enterprise Manager windows n Administer multiple databases simultaneously n Perform database administration tasks from a central location for both local and remote databases running on any Oracle platform in any location worldwide DBA Management Pack also includes wizards for assisting with such tasks as importing, exporting, loading, backing up, and recovering data. This chapter contains the following sections: DBA Studio Topic See Page DBA Studio 6-2 Common Features of DBA Management Pack Functionality DBA Management Pack features can now be accessed from the new DBA Studio, as well as from the Oracle Enterprise Manager Console or operating system. DBA Studio is an interface from which all DBA Management Pack features can be accessed (with the exception of SQL*Plus Worksheet) and can either be run with a connection to an Oracle Management Server, which utilizes Oracle Enterprise Manager’s three-tier framework, or connected directly to a database. With DBA Studio, you can manage database security, schemas, instances, and storage from a unified tree view without launching separate tools. This integrated access to DBA functionality simplifies switching between DBA tasks and provides an accurate view of database configuration status. DBA Studio can be launched from the operating system, from the Enterprise Manager Console, or from a browser. 6-2 Oracle Enterprise Manager Administrator’s Guide 6-3 DBA Management Pack Functionality and Wizards 6-5
  • 173. Common Features of DBA Management Pack Functionality Common Features of DBA Management Pack Functionality This section discusses the common features shared by the different tools in DBA Management Pack. DBA Management Pack 6-3 Tree Views and Property Sheets Most DBA tools display a tree view of connected databases, which can be expanded to show subordinate objects. When you select a database or object in the tree, a property sheet appears on the right where you can view or edit database properties. Wizards also display tree views and property sheets as necessary. Multi-Column Lists When you select a folder in a tree list, a multi-column list of all the folder’s objects appears on the right side of the window, providing a quick summary of information about each object in the selected folder. Database Version Awareness All DBA Management Pack tools and wizards are aware of the features that are available in each database version. When you select a database in a tree view, the tool only displays objects and properties that are enabled in that database version. Database Reports You can extract information from the database such as object definitions, object dependencies, database configuration, or reports, including custom SQL queries, and save it in a variety of formats (text, HTML, or comma-separated-values). Logging of Database Changes You can now log all Data Definition Language (DDL) and Data Manipulation Language (DML) changes made by an application when connected to a database. Showing Object DDL Data Definition Language (DDL) commands set up the data such as creating and altering databases and tables. In DBA Studio, you can display the Data Definition DDL for objects.
  • 174. Common Features of DBA Management Pack Functionality Show SQL Though one of the benefits of DBA Management Pack is that DBA tasks can be performed without manually entering SQL, you do have the option of viewing the SQL code generated for you. By selecting Show SQL, you can review this code before implementing any changes, as well as copy and paste it into your own SQL scripts if you wish. Show Dependencies Database object dependencies and dependents can be viewed by right-mouse clicking an object in the tree view and choosing Show Dependencies. Dependencies show what the selected object depends on, such as the tablespace location and the owner of the selected object. Dependents rely on the selected object, such as which indexes will be dropped and which synonyms will be affected if you drop the selected object. Right-Mouse Commands With DBA Management Pack, you can right-mouse click any folder or object in a tree list to perform administrative tasks. Right-mouse clicking an object shows all the tasks that can be performed on the object, such as connecting to or disconnecting from the database, creating users, adding or removing profiles, assigning privileges, showing dependencies, and bringing up wizards. Font Settings DBA Studio provides you the option of changing the font settings for its graphical interface. You can apply a different font or different font size, apply or remove the bold style, apply or remove italics style, or restore the application’s default font. Advanced Mode DBA Management Pack features can be run in Advanced Mode, which displays additional tabbed pages in property sheets from which a tool’s advanced database administration features can be accessed. 6-4 Oracle Enterprise Manager Administrator’s Guide
  • 175. DBA Management Pack Functionality and Wizards DBA Management Pack 6-5 DBA Management Pack Functionality and Wizards This section describes DBA Management Pack’s features and wizards. DBA Studio Tool Task See Page Instance Management Manages instances and sessions 6-6 Schema Management Manages schema objects 6-10 Security Management Manages security parameters 6-13 Storage Management Manages database storage 6-16 Replication Management Enables an administrator to quickly set up, configure, and manage an Oracle replication environment 6-18 JServer Management Enables you to manage the namespace, browse CORBA and EJB components published in the namespace, change permissions on the published components, and execute the main() method in schema-resident Java classes and view the output. 6-19 Cache Management Enables you to set up, manage, and monitor caches created by Oracle8i Cache. 6-19 SQL*Plus Worksheet Executes SQL and PL/SQL commands 6-20 Wizards Assist with importing, exporting, loading, backing up, and recovering data, as well as analyzing and creating tables and views 6-20
  • 176. DBA Management Pack Functionality and Wizards Instance Management Instance Management functionality helps you manage database instances and sessions in your Oracle environment. With Instance Management features you can: n Start up and shut down a database n View and edit the values of initialization parameters n View current session SQL and the explain plan n Manage stored configurations (when connected to the Oracle Management Server) n Manage resource allocations (with Oracle8i) n Manage users’ sessions n Monitor long running operations (with Oracle8i) When you expand the Instance node under the database in the tree view, the following list of objects and folders appears: n Database n Stored Configurations (only when connected to Oracle Management Server) n Sessions n In-Doubt Transactions n Resource Consumer Groups (with Oracle8i) n Resource Plans (with Oracle8i) n Resource Plan Schedule (with Oracle8i Release 2) 6-6 Oracle Enterprise Manager Administrator’s Guide
  • 177. DBA Management Pack Functionality and Wizards DBA Management Pack 6-7 Figure 6–1 Instance Management Tree Database Operations When you select the Database node under Instance, a property sheet of tabbed pages appears on the right for viewing information about the database instance and editing database properties. In this property sheet, the following information can be viewed and/or edited: n Status of the database, including the database version and any installed options, and allows you to start up and shut down a database n Memory usage of the current database n Current state of redo log archival n Resource management (with Oracle8i)
  • 178. DBA Management Pack Functionality and Wizards Figure 6–2 Instance Management Window Stored Configurations When the database is connected to the Oracle Management Server, the Stored Configurations folder appears in the tree view with which you can create multiple database start-up configurations without the need to track initialization parameter files (INIT<SID>.ORA). Stored configurations exist in the Oracle Enterprise Manager repository (they are not external files) and can be created, edited, and deleted. You can also add and delete parameters and export a configuration to a file. Sessions The Sessions folder lists all users connected to the discovered database. When you select a user in the list, the Sessions property sheet appears with which you can edit user properties, view information about the status of each user, view current SQL or 6-8 Oracle Enterprise Manager Administrator’s Guide
  • 179. DBA Management Pack Functionality and Wizards the last run SQL for the database session, and view the database session explain plan. In-Doubt Transactions The In-Doubt Transactions folder contains information about distributed transactions that failed in the PREPARED state. You can sort the Transactions list on each of the columns by clicking on the column heading. The In-Doubt Transactions property sheet displays information about distributed transactions in which a commit was interrupted by a system, network, or any failure resulting from external factors. Resource Consumer Groups The Resource Consumer Groups folder lists sets of users who have similar resource usage requirements. When you select a resource consumer group object in the folder, a property sheet appears in which you can view or specify properties and assign or remove users from the resource consumer group. Resource Plans The Resource Plans folder lists objects that represent resource plans, which are ways of allocating resources among consumer groups. Resource plans contain directives that specify the resources to be given to each group and can be specified in hierarchical fashion using subplans. The Resource Plans property sheet, which appears when you select an object representing a Resource Plan, allows you to choose available groups/subplans to include in the resource plan, select the percentage of CPU resources allocated to a group, and then activate the plan. You can also view the degree of parallelism for each consumer group. Resource Plan Schedule The Resource Plan Schedule property sheet allows you to automate when to activate a resource plan. Note: The scheduling job is implemented using DBMS_JOB. DBA Management Pack 6-9
  • 180. DBA Management Pack Functionality and Wizards Schema Management With DBA Management Pack’s Schema Management functionality, you can create, alter, or drop database schema objects such as clusters, indexes, materialized views, tables, and views, as well as view dependencies of schema objects. Oracle Schema Management features also support Oracle8i objects, which include index organized tables, partitioned tables and indexes, advanced queues, and Java stored procedures. Figure 6–3 Schema Management Window 6-10 Oracle Enterprise Manager Administrator’s Guide
  • 181. DBA Management Pack Functionality and Wizards When you expand the Schema node under the database in the tree view, a list of schema objects appears. DBA Management Pack 6-11 Figure 6–4 Schema Objects Tree List by Schema Databases contain at least one named schema for each database user. Each schema object belongs to one of these named schemas, regardless of object type. Several objects belonging to the same schema can be edited by opening the View menu and selecting By Schema. The tree view then reorders all schema objects within a set of schema folders listed alphabetically by name.
  • 182. DBA Management Pack Functionality and Wizards Editing an Object To edit an object, you use the object’s property sheet, which appears when you select the object in the tree view. You can then modify the object’s parameters. Schema Management features also include the Table Data Editor content viewer, which allows you to view, update, and delete the contents of a table and display the contents of a view or synonym by selecting a right-mouse command on a table in the tree view. Creating Objects Schema Management allows you to create an object or a clone of an object by selecting Create or Create Like from the Object menu. When creating a clone of an object, all attributes are identical except for the name. Parameters for new objects and cloned objects are specified in property sheets which appear when you select Create or Create Like from the Object menu. 6-12 Oracle Enterprise Manager Administrator’s Guide
  • 183. DBA Management Pack Functionality and Wizards DBA Management Pack 6-13 Security Management In a large network environment, security parameters for objects, administrators, and users are in constant change. With DBA Management Pack’s Security Management features, an administrator can make these necessary changes quickly and efficiently. When you expand the Security node under the database in the tree view, folders for users, roles, and profiles appear. Figure 6–5 Managing Users, Roles, and Profiles
  • 184. DBA Management Pack Functionality and Wizards Figure 6–6 Security Management Window User Operations Security Management features help you manage the database users in your network by helping you create users and clones of users, add and remove user permissions and roles, and alter user properties, including account status and default profiles. Security Management capabilities also allow you to easily see users’ dependents and dependencies. 6-14 Oracle Enterprise Manager Administrator’s Guide
  • 185. DBA Management Pack Functionality and Wizards Role Operations With Security Management role operations features, you can modify role properties as easily as user properties. You can also create roles and clones of roles, add and remove permissions from roles, and see grantees of roles. Profile Operations A profile is a set of limits on a user’s database resources. As with users and roles, you can create a profile or a clone of a profile, alter a profile’s properties, and assign and remove profiles from users. You also have the ability to see profile dependents and dependencies, as well as grantees of profiles. Profiles, roles, and the users to which they are assigned can easily be seen in security lists provided by Security Management. Administrators can then use property sheets to determine security parameters, simplifying the process of making changes. Security Management features also support Oracle8 password management, which increases system security. Supported features include: account locking, password lifetime and expiration, password history, password complexity, verifications, and export/import of passwords. DBA Management Pack 6-15
  • 186. DBA Management Pack Functionality and Wizards Storage Management DBA Management Pack’s Storage Management features help you administer tablespaces, datafiles, redo logs, and rollback segments for optimum database storage. Figure 6–7 Storage Management Window 6-16 Oracle Enterprise Manager Administrator’s Guide
  • 187. DBA Management Pack Functionality and Wizards When you connect to a database, the Storage Management branch of the tree view lists an icon for the Controlfile and five folders which contain all the storage objects in the selected database. The five folders include: DBA Management Pack 6-17 n Tablespaces n Datafiles n Rollback Segments n Redo Log Groups n Archive Logs Figure 6–8 Managing Database Storage Parameters The following sections describe the Storage Management operations that can be performed with the objects in each of these folders: Controlfile Operations When you select the Controlfile icon, a property sheet appears where you can see the number of controlfiles created for the database and other statistics.
  • 188. DBA Management Pack Functionality and Wizards Tablespace Operations Using the contents of the Tablespaces folder, you can create, edit, or drop a tablespace, add a datafile or rollback segment, take a tablespace off- or on-line, make a tablespace read-only or writable, and set tablespace storage parameters. You can also click the tablespace to see the used and free space of the tablespace or datafile. Datafile Operations With the contents of the Datafiles folder, you can create a datafile or a clone of a datafile, edit a datafile, and take a datafile off- or on-line. You can also click the datafile to see the used and available space. Rollback Segment Operations Using the Rollback Segments folder, you can create, alter, drop, or shrink a rollback segment as well as take one off- or on-line. Redo Log Group Operations Using the Redo Log Groups folder, you can switch the current redo log group, trigger a checkpoint in a redo log group, create a new redo log group, and rename, remove, or add new redo log group members. Archive Log Operations The archive log folder allows you to view the current archive logs in the database. Replication Management The Replication Management tool is part of DBA Studio and enables an administrator to quickly set up, configure, and manage an Oracle replication environment. Specifically, the Replication Management tool provides a comprehensive wizard to prepare a database for supporting multimaster and/or snapshot replication. Once set up, additional wizards help you replicate schema objects using either multimaster or a combination of multimaster and snapshot replication. After you have configured your replication environment, you can use the Replication Management tool and the other tools in DBA Studio to monitor and manage your replication environment. 6-18 Oracle Enterprise Manager Administrator’s Guide
  • 189. DBA Management Pack Functionality and Wizards DBA Management Pack 6-19 JServer Management JServer is the name of the Java engine embedded in Oracle8i database. CORBA and EJB components implemented in Java can be stored and executed inside the database. Client applications access these components through a name service. Use DBA studio to: n Manage the namespace n Browse CORBA and EJB components published in the namespace n Change permissions on the published components n Execute the main() method in schema-resident Java classes and view the output Cache Management With Cache Manager, you can set up, manage, and monitor caches created by Oracle8i Cache. Oracle8i Cache increases the capacity of applications, such as Web applications, enterprise resource planning (ERP) applications, and vertical applications, by adding intelligent middle-tier caching. Use Oracle8i Cache to cache frequently used data on the middle-tier node, increasing the number of requests that your environment can process. Oracle8i Cache maintains a history of queries and, based on that history, intelligently routes queries either to the caches on the middle-tier nodes or to the origin database. The origin database is the original and primary storage for the data. For more information about Oracle8i Cache, see the Oracle8i Cache Concepts and Administration Guide. Cache Manager lets you: n Add tables to or remove tables from one or more caches. n Allocate disk space and memory to the caches. n Set the synchronization policy of each table. n Synchronize tables in one or more caches. n Start and stop caches and enable and disable caching. n Monitor the ratio of queries that are satisfied by the cache to the queries that are routed to the origin database. n Monitor the performance of the caches.
  • 190. DBA Management Pack Functionality and Wizards n Update the list of users in a cache. SQL*Plus Worksheet When you need to administer your database environment with SQL, PL/SQL, or SQL*Plus commands, use Oracle SQL*Plus Worksheet. With Oracle SQL*Plus Worksheet, you can enter SQL and PL/SQL code and DBA commands dynamically and run scripts which are stored as files. The SQL*Plus Worksheet window consists of an Input pane (top) where commands are entered, and an Output pane (bottom) where the results of your commands appear after you click the Execute button. SQL*Plus Worksheet maintains a history of the commands you have entered, allowing you to edit and re-execute an earlier command without having to retype it. The last 50 command executions can be displayed by clicking the Command History button. Selections from the Command History dialog box can then be copied and inserted into the Input pane. With SQL*Plus Worksheet, you can have multiple copies of the worksheet open at a time, each of which is separate from the others; so work can be committed or rolled back in each worksheet independently. SQL*Plus Worksheet can be accessed from the Enterprise Manager Console or the browser. Wizards Note: Additional information on all tools and wizards in DBA Management Pack can be found in the Oracle Enterprise Manager online Help. For help with database administration tasks, the DBA Management Pack offers a variety of wizards: n Analyze Wizard n Backup and Recovery Management Wizards n Create Table Wizard n Data Management Wizards (Import/Export/Load) n Dimension Creation Wizard 6-20 Oracle Enterprise Manager Administrator’s Guide
  • 191. DBA Management Pack Functionality and Wizards DBA Management Pack 6-21 n Resource Plan Wizard n Summary Advisor Wizard n View Wizard These wizards increase the ease-of-use of the DBA applications. For more information on wizards, see the DBA Management Pack Quick Tour or the Oracle Enterprise Manager online Help.
  • 192. DBA Management Pack Functionality and Wizards 6-22 Oracle Enterprise Manager Administrator’s Guide
  • 193. A Enterprise Manager Event Handler Important: The Event Handler is a pre-production feature in this release of Enterprise Manager and should not be used in a production environment. Applications accessing the Oracle Management Server event services may require trapping of specific event conditions and the ability to handle them appropriately. This can be achieved using the Event Handler, an application that listens for event notifications from the Oracle Management Server and allows these events to be further processed by event "adapters". An adapter is an additional piece of software that takes events from the Event Handler for further processing. Enterprise Manager 2.2 ships with 2 event adapters: n Event Logger - allows the Event Handler to log events to designated log files and n Command Executor - allows simple operating system commands to be executed Enterprise Manager Event Handler A-1 in response to an event occurrence. These adapters permit other types of applications to integrate with the Enterprise Manager event system and trigger other operations based on these trapped events. You can have either or both adapters working with the Event Handler. Prior to passing event notifications for further processing, the Event Handler also provides a simple filtering mechanism that allows system administrators to specify the conditions by which the events are passed to either or both event adapters.
  • 194. How the Event Handler Works Figure A–1 Event Handler Architecture How the Event Handler Works When the Event Handler starts, information from the filters are used to determine which events the Event Handler should select and pass on to the Event Logger and/or Command Executor adapters. Once the adapters receive the event, they further process the event based on the templates set up for the adapter. Templates provide a way to customize the behavior of the adapters. For the Event Logger, this means specifying which events should be logged. For the Command Executor, this means specifying the types of events it should respond to and the operating system command it should execute in response to that event. A-2 Oracle Enterprise Manager Administrator’s Guide
  • 195. How to Set Up the Event Handler Template Enterprise Manager Event Handler A-3 Figure A–2 Event Handler Process Event Type A Event Type A How to Set Up the Event Handler To set up and implement an Event Handler, you must perform the following steps: 1. Define the filters. Filters determine which events are passed on to the Event Logger and Command Executor adapters. 2. Define the templates. Templates tell the Event Logger and Command Executor adapters how to process the event. For the Event Logger, a template specifies which events should be logged and how the information should be formatted. For the Command Executor, a template specifies the events the adapter should respond to and the operating system command it should execute in response to that event. 3. Start up the Event Handler. For Enterprise Manager 2.2, the Event Handler starts up as one of the services of the Management Server. Event Type A Event Type B Event Type A Event Type B Event Type A Event Filter Event Type A Event Logger Command Executor Template Logfile Event A Event A Event A > df -k .
  • 196. Defining Event Filters Each of these steps are discussed in detail later in this appendix. Defining Event Filters When the Event Handler starts, it uses "filters" to determine which events are passed on to the Event Logger and/or Command Executor adapters. The system administrator can designate what events, if any, are sent to the Event Logger and Command Executor adapters. This is called "filtering." Events may be filtered on a global basis (applied to both adapters) or on a per adapter basis. Filters apply to either the Event Logger or the Command Executor. Filters are set up by means of entries in the omsconfig.properties file located in the $ORACLE_ HOME/sysman/config directory. Each entry specifies the conditions by which the events are passed to the adapters. The conditions are based on ’eventname’ and/or ’node’ on which the event occurred. An event passes through the filter if it meets the conditions specified by the filter. Each filter is distinguished by having a common name associated with it and the entries for that filter are grouped under this common name. Filter Syntax Actual filter entries are defined in the omsconfig.properties file. The syntax for filters are as follows: Syntax for global filters: /com/oracle/sysman/em/eventHandler/global_filters/<filter-name>/<’eventname’ or ’node’> = <value> Syntax for filters for the Event Logger only: /com/oracle/sysman/em/eventHandler/eventlogger_ filters/<filter-name>/<’eventname’ or ’node’> = <value> Syntax for filters for the Command Executor only: /com/oracle/sysman/em/eventHandler/commandexecutor_ filters/<filter-name>/<’eventname’ or ’node’> = <value> The character "*" can be used as a wildcard character to specify all possible values. The sense of the condition can be negated by prefixing a "!" in front of the value. The following rules apply to all event filters: A-4 Oracle Enterprise Manager Administrator’s Guide
  • 197. Defining Event Filters 1. All conditions specified by a given filter must hold true for the event. Example: For the global_filter MyFilter: /com/oracle/sysman/em/eventHandler/global_filters/MyFilter/eventname = cputest /com/oracle/sysman/em/eventHandler/global_filters/MyFilter/node = prodserver.us.oracle.com If the name of the event is ’cputest’ and if it occurred on node ’prodserver.us.oracle.com’, then the event will be passed to all event adapters. 2. The event must pass at least one filter 3. An event is forwarded to an adapter (Event Logger or Command Executor) if it passes through either a global filter or a filter for that particular adapter. By default, all events are suppressed, and at least one filter (global or adapter) must be present in order for events to be forwarded to any of the adapters. See Sample Filters and Templates: on page A-15 for examples of filters. Assuming the event has passed through the filters, they are forwarded on to the event adapters, Event Logger or Command Executor. We will describe what happens to them next. Important: Another level of filtering occurs when you start the Event Handler itself. In order to start the Event Handler, you need to provide a valid Management Server administrator and password. This Management Server administrator will have associated events that it will be able to receive. If you start the Event Handler using a particular Management Server administrator, then the Event Handler will only be able to receive event notifications to which that Management Server administrator has been given at least VIEW permissions. If you start the Event Handler using the sysman or superuser account, it will receive ALL events. Hence all events that the Management Server administrator is not entitled to receive will *not* be received by the Event Handler. Enterprise Manager Event Handler A-5 The Event Logger Templates The Event Logger logs events received from the Management Server to a file.
  • 198. Defining Event Filters The default log file is $ORACLE_HOME/sysman/log/event.log. By default, the format of an Event Logger message is: <name>;<occurrence number>;<timestamp>;<assignee, if any>;<severity> and is overwritten each time the Event Handler starts. The format and behavior of the default log message can be modified slightly by using the following properties, read as entries in the omsconfig.properties file. /com/oracle/sysman/em/eventlogger/logfile=<full logfile path> /com/oracle/sysman/em/eventlogger/separatorstring=<separator string for logfile entries> /com/oracle/sysman/em/eventlogger/appendonstart=<true/false> The appendonstart property determines whether or not the log file will be overwritten each time the Event Handler starts. The default is false, which means overwrite. Set this to true if new log entries should be appended to an existing log file. You can further customize Event Logger operation by using templates. Templates are strings that generically represent the format of a message as a way to customize the format of event notifications written to a log file. A template contains one or more place holders, which are symbolic representations for pertinent pieces of information about the event. Place holders are enclosed within "%" characters to distinguish them from ordinary words in the template string. Available place-holders are: Table 6–1 Event Handler Place Holders Place Holder Definition %eventname% The name of the event. %severity% The severity of the event as a string. (Alert, Clear, Warning, Node Down) %timestamp% The timestamp of the event occurrence. (MM-dd-yyyy hh:mm:ss Example: 05-22-00 05:22:00 AM %targetname% Name of the target. %targettype% Type of the target. (oracle_sysman_node, oracle_sysman_ database, oracle_sysman_listener) %occ_no% The occurrence number of the event. %assignee% The assignee for this event. A-6 Oracle Enterprise Manager Administrator’s Guide
  • 199. Defining Event Filters %node% The node on which the event occurred, not to be confused with target. %output% The output associated with the event occurrence. Templates are declared by making entries in the omsconfig.properties file. Events can be assigned to templates based on event names or originating node (the same criteria used by the Event Handler filtering system). Templates use this format to specify which events the template should apply: /com/oracle/sysman/em/eventlogger/templates/<template-name>/<’event_name’ or ’node’>=<value> To specify the message format that the template should use, the following format must be used: /com/oracle/sysman/em/eventlogger/templates/<template-name>/message=<message format> An example of a template entry in the omsconfig.properties file would be: /com/oracle/sysman/em/eventlogger/templates/foo/eventname=cputest /com/oracle/sysman/em/eventlogger/templates/foo/message=%eventname% fired on %node%: Cpu usage on %targetname% is high! occ_no: %occ_no% Severity: %severity% Time: %timestamp% The template definition above assigns all events named cputest to the template named foo. Whenever a cputest event fires, the logged output will appear as follows: cputest fired on smptest16: Cpu usage on smptest16 is high! occ_no: 21 Severity: Alert Time: 10-21-1999 02:39:29 PM Note: Templates override the default message format. As with Event Handler filters, the wildcard character "*" can be used for event names and node names. If more than one template criterion matches an event occurrence, only one of them is randomly chosen. For this reason, care should be used when assigning events to templates. Enterprise Manager Event Handler A-7 Table 6–1 Event Handler Place Holders Place Holder Definition
  • 200. Defining Event Filters The Command Executor Templates The Command Executor adapter executes simple commands in response to event occurrences. The command executor looks at a set of user-defined templates to decide what command to execute in response to an event occurrence. A template can contain several place-holders, which are symbolic representations for interesting pieces of information about the event. Place-holders are enclosed within ’%’ characters to distinguish them from ordinary words in the template string. For a list of currently used place-holders, see Table 6–1, "Event Handler Place Holders" on page A-6 As with the Event Logger, templates are declared by making entries in the omsconfig.properties file. Events can be assigned to templates based on event names or originating node (the same criteria offered by the event-handler filtering system). Templates use this format to specify the events to which the template should apply. /com/oracle/sysman/em/eventlogger/templates/<template-name>/<’event_name’ or ’node’>=<value> Note: As with event-handler filters, the wildcard character ’*’ can be used within event names and node names. If more than one template criterion matches an event occurrence, only one criteria is randomly chosen. It is important, to be careful when assigning events to templates. Templates use the following format to specify the command to which the template should apply: /com/oracle/sysman/em/commandexecutor/templates/<template-name>/command=<value> A typical entry for a template would be: /com/oracle/sysman/em/commandexecutor/templates/foo/eventname=cputest /com/oracle/sysman/em/commandexecutor/templates/foo/command=net send my-machine-name %eventname% fired on %node%: CPU usage on %targetname% is high! occ_no %occ_no% Severity: %severity% Time: %timestamp% where "my-machine-name" is the name of the machine to which you want to send a message. A-8 Oracle Enterprise Manager Administrator’s Guide
  • 201. Defining Event Filters The template definition above assigns all events named cputest to the template named foo. Whenever a cputest event fires, the following message will be sent to machine "my-machine-name": cputest fired on smptest16: Cpu usage on smptest16 is high! occ_no: 21 Severity: Alert Time: 10-21-1999 02:39:29 PM There may be situations where the command you want to execute has an argument consisting of several items, for example: foo a b c "this is a test" "d=e" Enterprise Manager Event Handler A-9 where: foo is the executable command, and n a is its first argument n b is its second argument n c is its third argument this is a test is its fourth argument d=e is its fifth argument. In this case, you can use quotes ("") to group items within a single argument together as indicated in the example above, e.g. "this is a test". To include literal quotes as part of the argument, you need to prefix these quotes with backslashes (). For example: foo a b c "d="e"" "this is "quoted" " will be pass the following arguments to foo: a is the 1st argument b is the 2nd argument c is the 3rd argument d="e" is the 4th argument this is "quoted" is the 5th argument
  • 202. Defining Event Filters Starting up and Running the Event Handler The Event Handler is one of the Management Server services. Hence, it is started or shut down when the Management Server is started or shut down. 1. Add the following entries to the omsconfig.properties file. To start the Event Handler, make sure you have the following entries in the omsconfig.properties file. This is located in the %ORACLE_ HOME%sysmanconfig directory. %ORACLE_HOME% refers to the Oracle Home directory where Enterprise Manager was installed. Note: For convenience, these entries are in the %ORACLE_ HOME%/sysman/admin/omsconfig.properties.EventHandl er file. Simply copy the entries from this file into the omsconfig.properties file. The following configuration file entries relate to the Event Logger: /com/oracle/sysman/em/eventHandler/handlers/eventlogger/entrypoint=oracle.sy sman.vda.vdae.VdaeEventLogger /com/oracle/sysman/em/eventHandler/handlers/eventlogger/processOnStartup=tru e The following configuration file entries relate to the Command Executor: /com/oracle/sysman/em/eventHandler/handlers/commandexecutor/entrypoint=oracl e.sysman.vda.vdae.VdaeCommandExecutor /com/oracle/sysman/em/eventHandler/handlers/commandexecutor/processOnStartup =true Important: There should be NO carriage returns or linefeed characters within each entry. This is true for all entries in any of the Enterprise Manager configuration files. 2. Add the Enterprise Manager Administrator to the omsconfig.properties file. You need to start up the Event Handler using a valid set of Enterprise Manager credentials. A-10 Oracle Enterprise Manager Administrator’s Guide
  • 203. Defining Event Filters Specify the Enterprise Manager Administrator by adding the following entries to the omsconfig.properties file. eventhandler.user=<EM administrator> eventhandler.passwd=<corresponding password> When the Event Handler is started for the first time, it reads the eventhandler.passwd entry, encrypts it, and writes it back in encrypted form as another entry, eventhandler.passwd.encr. The original non-encrypted password will be removed. Thereafter, it will use the encrypted password only. If you need to change the password, remove the eventhandler.passwd.encr entry, and add the eventhandler.passwd again. 3. Add the appropriate entries to the OMSExternalRegistry.registry file. Add the following entries to the OMSExternalRegistry.registry file (located in %ORACLE_HOME%/sysman/config), substituting the appropriate values for <oracle-home>: /com/oracle/sysman/em/oms/services/external/EventHandlerSession/external_ service_name = EventHandlerSession /com/oracle/sysman/em/oms/services/external/EventHandlerSession/name = EventHandlerSession /com/oracle/sysman/em/oms/services/external/EventHandlerSession/oms_service_ interface = oracle.sysman.vda.vdae.VdaeEventHandlerSession /com/oracle/sysman/em/oms/services/external/EventHandlerSession/startup_ mode=1 /com/oracle/sysman/em/oms/services/external/EventHandlerSession/name_value_ pair=ORACLE_HOME=<oracle-home> /com/oracle/sysman/em/oms/services/external/EventHandlerSession/args=-s /com/oracle/sysman/em/oms/services/external/EventHandlerSession/service_ classpath= /com/oracle/sysman/em/oms/services/external/EventHandlerSession/outfile_ destination=<oracle-home>/sysman/log /com/oracle/sysman/em/oms/services/external/EventHandlerSession/errfile_ destination=<oracle-home>/sysman/log /com/oracle/sysman/em/oms/services/external/EventHandlerSession/logfile_ name=eventHandler Enterprise Manager Event Handler A-11
  • 204. Defining Event Filters Note: For convenience, these entries can be found in the %ORACLE_ HOME%/sysman/admin/OMSExternalRegistry.registry.Ev entHandler file. Simply copy the entries from this file and paste them into the OMSExternalRegistry.registry file located in your %ORACLE_HOME%/sysman/config directory. 4. In the omsconfig.properties file, specify your filters and templates for the Event Logger and Command Executor as discussed in the previous sections. 5. Start the Management Server. For UNIX and Windows NT, enter the following at the command line: oemctrl start oms For Windows NT, you can start and stop the Management Server as a Service in the Control Panel (OracleORANTManagementServer). Stopping the Event Handler The Event Handler stops when the Management Server is stopped. Use the OEMCTRL utility to stop the Management Server. oemctrl stop oms <oms-user>/<oms-password> Or, on machines running Windows NT, you can stop the Management Server by stopping the corresponding service (from Control Panel Services). Troubleshooting Tips n If the logger/executor doesn’t seem to respond to events, check the following: 1. Make sure you have the appropriate entries to start the logger and executor in the omsconfig.properties file. These are: /com/oracle/sysman/em/eventHandler/handlers/eventlogger/entrypoint=oracl e.sysman.vda.vdae.VdaeEventLogger /com/oracle/sysman/em/eventHandler/handlers/eventlogger/processOnStartup =true /com/oracle/sysman/em/eventHandler/handlers/commandexecutor/entrypoint=o A-12 Oracle Enterprise Manager Administrator’s Guide
  • 205. Defining Event Filters racle.sysman.vda.vdae.VdaeCommandExecutor /com/oracle/sysman/em/eventHandler/handlers/commandexecutor/processOnSta rtup=true 2. Make sure the Management Server administrator used to start the Event Handler receives the event notification via the EM console. The Management Server administrator needs to have at least VIEW permissions on the event. 3. Make sure you have set a filter that allows events to pass through to them. Try initially setting a filter that allows *all* events to pass through. Example: /com/oracle/sysman/em/eventHandler/global_filters/allEvents/eventname=* 4. Check the syntax of any templates associated with the logger/executor. Try using a simple template or any of the samples given below. 5. When using the logger on unix, make sure you have the appropriate permissions to create the log file. It will use the permissions of the operating system user who started the Event Handler. Try creating a file in the directory where the logger’s log file should have been created. 6. When using the command executor on unix, make sure you have the appropriate permissions to execute the command. It will use the permissions of the operating system user who started the Event Handler. Try running the command directly on the operating system to make sure it works. 7. Make sure the Event Handler service is still up. Check the screen where you started the Management Server and watch for messages that indicate the Event Handler is no longer running. If on a UNIX system, check to see if the service is running. 8. Make sure there are no linefeed characters within any single entry in the omsconfig.properties and OMSExternalRegistry.registry file. 9. When using templates, make sure you specify both the event condition on which the template applies as well as the message format (for the Event Logger) or the command to be executed (for the Command Executor) n The Event Handler is an English-only release. Enterprise Manager Event Handler A-13
  • 206. Defining Event Filters Tracing Should come as a last resort to find out errors that have occurred with the Event Handler. Trace information can be directed either to the screen or to a log file in the %ORACLE_HOME%sysmanlog directory. To enable logging or tracing, turn on the options specified in the omsconfig.properties file and restart the Event Handler. /com/oracle/sysman/em/eventHandler/tracing_enabled = true or false /com/oracle/sysman/em/eventHandler/logging_enabled = true or false The trace information generated can either be generated to a file or to the screen. If tracing_enabled is set to true, then any trace information will be sent to the screen. If logging_enabled is set to true, then trace information will be generated in the log file. However, logging takes precedence, i.e. if logging_enabled is true, then trace information will always be sent to the log file. These are the various combinations and their output: tracing_enabled = false logging_enabled = false No trace on screen or in the log file. tracing_enabled = false logging_enabled = true Trace information will be generated to the log file. tracing_enabled = true logging_enabled = false Trace information will be generated to the screen. If the Event Handler was started as an external service, then the trace will be written to the file specified by the logfile_name entry and in the directory specified by outfile_destination entry in the OMSExternalRegistry.registry file tracing_enabled = true logging_enabled = true Trace information will be generated to the log file. A-14 Oracle Enterprise Manager Administrator’s Guide
  • 207. Defining Event Filters Enterprise Manager Event Handler A-15 Sample Filters and Templates: The following are useful filters and templates. Some of these entries can be found in the %ORACLE_HOME%/sysman/admin/omsconfig.properties.EventHandler file. Filters: Pass all events to both event logger and command executor /com/oracle/sysman/em/eventHandler/global_filters/allNodes/node = * Pass all events to the event logger /com/oracle/sysman/em/eventHandler/eventlogger_filters/allEvents/eventname=* Pass all events to the command executor /com/oracle/sysman/em/eventHandler/commandexecutor_filters/allEvents/node=* Pass on all events except “cputest” to both event logger and command executor /com/oracle/sysman/em/eventHandler/global_filters/not-cputest/eventname = !cputest Pass on all events named cputest that did not originate on the node smptest16 to the Event Logger: /com/oracle/sysman/em/eventHandler/eventlogger_ filters/pass-some-cputest/eventname=cputest /com/oracle/sysman/em/eventHandler/eventlogger_ filters/pass-some-cputest/node=!smptest16 Pass all events except cputest to the Command Executor adapter: /com/oracle/sysman/em/eventHandler/commandexecutor_ filters/pass-no-cputest/eventname=!cputest Templates Sample template for the event logger: /com/oracle/sysman/em/eventlogger/templates/allEvents/eventname=* /com/oracle/sysman/em/eventlogger/templates/allEvents/message=%eventname% fired on %node%: Target %targetname%: Output %output% Severity: %severity% Time: %timestamp%
  • 208. Known Issues A sample log entry using this template would look like: cputest fired on smptest16: Target smptest16: Output Cpu usage is high. Severity: Alert Time: 10-21-1999 02:39:29 PM Sample templates for the command executor: For Windows NT: /com/oracle/sysman/em/commandexecutor/templates/allEvents2/eventname=* /com/oracle/sysman/em/commandexecutor/templates/allEvents2/command=net send my-machine %eventname% fired on %node%: Target %targetname%: Output %output% Severity: %severity% Time: %timestamp% where my-machine is the name of the PC to which the message will be sent. Whenever any event fires, a message using the above format is sent to machine my-machine. For Solaris: /com/oracle/sysman/em/commandexecutor/templates/allEvents/command=xterm -display hqsun1:0 -e telnet Here, whenever any event fires, a telnet session is opened. Known Issues n The Event Handler may not start if there are any carriage return characters within any of the required entries. n If you specify incomplete template entries, for example: /com/oracle/sysman/em/eventlogger/templates/allEvents/eventname=* but do not specify the message format to use, for example: /com/oracle/sysman/em/eventlogger/templates/allEvents/message= ... You may see a NullPointerException. n If there is a problem starting the Event Logger, as indicated previously, this problem may affect the Command Executor also. The reverse is also true: if there is a problem starting the Command Executor due to incorrect A-16 Oracle Enterprise Manager Administrator’s Guide
  • 209. Differences between Solaris and Windows NT configuration entries, then it may affect the operation of the Logger. Set up Event Handler tracing to determine the root problem. Differences between Solaris and Windows NT For Event Handler entries that require a directory path, use the syntax that is appropriate to the operating system. For example Solaris: /com/oracle/sysman/em/eventlogger/logfile=/app/oracle/8.1.6/sysman/log/MyEvents. log Windows NT: /com/oracle/sysman/em/eventlogger/logfile=c:orantsysmanlogMyEvents.log Enterprise Manager Event Handler A-17
  • 210. Differences between Solaris and Windows NT A-18 Oracle Enterprise Manager Administrator’s Guide
  • 211. B Keyboard Shortcuts This appendix provides a list of general Windows keyboard shortcuts. For a complete list of Windows keyboard shortcuts and navigation, refer to your operating system documentation. Keyboard Shortcuts B-1
  • 212. Figure B–1 General Windows Keyboard Shortcuts Key Action F1 Displays Help information for the active object or the window as a whole. WINDOWS LOGO KEY OR CTRL+ESC Opens the Start menu located on the taskbar. CTRL+ALT+DELETE In Microsoft Windows, opens the Close Program dialog box, which contains a list box of applications to be closed and the command buttons End Task, Shut Down, and Cancel. In Microsoft Windows NT, opens the Windows NT Security dialog box, with the following options: Lock Workstation, Logoff, Shut Down, Change Password, Task Manager, and Cancel. If you are not logged on, opens the logon dialog box. DELETE Deletes the selected item(s). If the items are files, moves them to the Recycle Bin. SHIFT+DELETE Delete the selected item(s). If the items are files, destroys them immediately without moving them to the Recycle Bin. CTRL+N Opens the New dialog box. (You also can choose the New command from the File menu.) CTRL+O Opens the Open dialog box. (You also can choose the Open command from the File menu.) CTRL+P Opens the Print dialog box. (You also can choose the Print command from the File menu.) CTRL+S Opens the Save dialog box. (You also can choose the Save command from the File menu.) CTRL+X Cuts the selected item(s) to the Clipboard. (You also can choose the Cut command from the Edit menu.) CTRL+INSERT OR CTRL+C Copies the selected item(s) to the Clipboard. (You also can choose the Copy command from the Edit menu.) SHIFT+INSERT OR CTRL+V Pastes the copied items(s) from the Clipboard. (You also can choose the Paste command from the Edit menu.) ALT+BACKSPACE OR CTRL+Z Undoes the last action. Note that not all actions, such as shutting down, can be undone. (You also can choose the Undo command from the Edit menu.) ALT+SHIFT+BACKSPACE Redoes the previously undone action. (You also can choose the Redo command from the Edit menu.) B-2 Oracle Enterprise Manager Administrator’s Guide
  • 213. WINDOWS LOGO KEY+M Minimizes all open windows. The keyboard focus goes to the least recently selected icon on the desktop. Add SHIFT to expand previously opened windows and return focus to the most recently used application. Keyboard Shortcuts B-3 Key Action
  • 214. B-4 Oracle Enterprise Manager Administrator’s Guide
  • 215. Index Index-1 Symbols , 1-26 A acknowledging events Event menu, 5-24 Event window, 5-23 Active Jobs page, 4-7 add a group to a map Map menu, 3-3 additional services folders Navigator tree, 2-3 administration task Navigator objects, 2-10 administrator adding, editing, and deleting, 1-9 managing, 1-8 preferences, 1-11 reassigning objects when deleting, 1-11 super, 1-8 Administrator Notification email and paging, 5-40 Advanced Mode View menu, 1-5 agent down, 5-41 UpDown Node event, 5-41 Apache Web Server, 2-11 Apache Web Server, discovering, 2-11 apply (register) an event set, 5-38 Archive Log Operations in Storage Management features, 7-18 audience for this guide, xv Available Destinations list Job system, 4-15 B Background images adding to groups, 3-5 blackouts, paging/email, 2-12 Broadcast Message task, 4-27 C checking status paging service, 1-34 clone (of a database object), 7-12 Command Executor Templates, A-8 communication daemon populating Navigator, 2-2 Components, 1-2 Event, 1-3 Group, 1-2 Job, 1-3 Navigator, 1-2 composite job, 4-3 configuring paging service, 1-28 Console customize layout, 1-5 File menu, 1-5 Help menu, 1-7 menus, 1-4 user preferences, 1-25 using menus, 1-4
  • 216. console list of tasks that can be performed from, xiv Console panes Groups, 3-1 Navigator, 2-1 context menu, 2-5 context-sensitive menus Navigator, 1-4 using in the Navigator, 1-4 Controlfile Operations of Storage Management features, 7-17 copying tree objects Navigator, 2-10 create event set, 5-24 job, 4-10 or modify a job, 4-12 or modify an event set, 5-29 specified object type in the Navigator, 2-5 customize and manage network views Map system, 3-3 D Data Gatherer events, 5-42 database connection made in tree, 2-3 Database Fault Management Events, 5-41 Database Operations, 7-7 Databases folder Navigator tree, 2-3 datafile operations of Storage Management features, 7-18 DBA Management Pack, 7-1 DBA Studio, 7-2 delete group, 3-3 discovering services Navigator, 2-7 SQL*Net network, 2-2 discovery problems, 2-9 discovery status, 2-9 drag and drop Navigator, 2-10 Index-2 Navigator objects, 2-2 E edit group, 3-3 EMS Event Management system, 5-1 event set, 5-4 unsolicited, 5-12, 5-33 Event Filters, A-4 Event Handler, A-1 Event History page Event window, 5-23 Event Logger Templates, A-5 Event Management, 5-1 categories of events, 5-10 creating an event set, 5-29 Enterprise Manager, 1-3 fault management, 5-11 introduction, 5-1 menu, 5-24 modifying a registered event set, 5-38 modifying an event set, 5-29 Oracle events, 5-40 parameter settings, 5-35 performance management, 5-12 process, 5-4 registering an event set, 5-38 resource management, 5-12 space management, 5-11 types of events, 5-10 viewing a registered event set, 5-38 viewing an event set, 5-26 window, 5-21 Event Set Library page Event window, 5-26 predefined event sets, 5-26 Event Set Management property sheet creating an event, 5-24 modifying a new event, 5-24 example creating an event set, 5-37 group, 3-11
  • 217. Index-3 Job Scheduling, 4-21 registering an event, 5-37 expanding map objects, 3-8 F Fault Management events, 5-10 fixit job, 4-3, 5-1 creating, 4-14 events, 5-32 removing, 5-32 submitting, 5-32 with events, 5-1 G General page job, 4-14 Group pane, 3-2 group, 3-4 add or delete, 3-9 adding background images, 3-5 create, 3-4 edit, 3-3 example, 3-11 job destination, 4-15 modify, 3-10 modifying properties, 3-10 Group system, 1-2 Groups folder Navigator tree, 2-3 H history Command History Button, SQL*Plus Worksheet, 7-20 I Input pane, SQL*Plus Worksheet, 7-20 J job alter, 4-10 composite, 4-3 create, 4-10 manage, 4-10 modify, 4-10 view, 4-11 Job History page, 4-9 Job Library, 4-12 job output Progress Page, 4-20 Job Scheduling, 4-1 credential preference, 4-4, 4-17 destination requirements, 4-15 Enterprise Manager, 1-3 example, 4-21 General page, 4-14 job destination, 4-14 job destinations, 4-15 job name, 4-14 job tasks, 4-15 job type, 4-14 managing jobs, 4-5 menu, 4-10 scheduling jobs, 4-5 scheduling process, 4-2 task parameters, 4-17 window, 4-6 Job Tasks wizards, 4-24 jobs, cancelling, 4-5 K keyboard shortcuts, general Windows platform, B- 1 L launching a database tool from a map, 3-8 from the Console, 2-5 from the Navigator, 1-2 Navigator, 2-4
  • 218. with the right-mouse button, 2-4 levels of permission, 1-24 Listener Fault Management Events, 5-42 Listeners folder Navigator tree, 2-3 Lists, Saving, 1-27 LRS See Log roll-forward server (LRS), A-1 M manipulation of the objects in the Navigator, 2-10 Map, 3-1 bitmap background, 3-6 create, 3-7 creating with dragging and dropping, 3-7 customized views, 3-1 expanding objects, 3-8 status of objects, 3-7 user-defined views, 3-4 menus Console, 1-4 File menu, 1-5 Help menu, 1-7 Job, 4-10 View, 1-5 modify event set, 5-24 group, 3-3 multiple tasks submitting a job, 4-12 N Navigator, 2-1 Enterprise Manager, 1-2 manipulating objects, 2-10 menu, 2-5 new view, 2-6 objects, 1-2 splitting the tree, 2-4, 2-6 window, 2-2 network container, 2-3 Index-4 new view Navigator tree, 2-6 Node Fault Management Events, 5-41 Node Properties, 2-10 Nodes folder Navigator tree, 2-3 O object creating, 7-12 editing, 7-12 Oracle DB UpDown event profile, 5-26 Oracle events, 5-40 Oracle Host UpDown event profile, 5-26 Oracle Listener UpDown event profile, 5-26 Oracle Security Management, 7-13 Oracle SQL*Plus Worksheet, 7-20 Oracle8i objects, 7-10 OraTcl job scripts, 4-2 Output Dialog box Job Scheduling, 4-20 Output pane, SQL*Plus Worksheet, 7-20 Outstanding Events page Event system, 5-22 P paging service querying status, 1-34 setting up, 1-28 stopping, 1-34 paging status codes for numeric pages, 1-18 Paging/Email Blackout, 2-12 Total, 2-12 parameters events, 5-34 jobs, 4-17 Parameters Page job, 4-17 password management, 7-15
  • 219. Index-5 Performance Management events, 5-10 Ping Agent, 2-6 ping agent menu item, 2-9 PL/SQL using with Oracle SQL*Plus Worksheet, 7-20 Pre-defined Profiles Event system, 5-26 Preferred credentials , 1-26 preferred credentials connecting in a map, 3-8 Console, 1-25 problems Navigator discovery, 2-9 profile operations, Security Management, 7-15 Progress page job, 4-20 purpose of this guide, xiv R redo log group operations of Storage Management features, 7-18 Refreshing Discovery Refresh Topology Menu Choice, 2-9 registered destination map objects, 3-7 registering events, 5-29 Registrations page Event window, 5-23 related publications, xx removing a split page in the Navigator, 2-6 job with Remove menu item, 4-11 problems with a job, 4-11 problems with an event, 5-25 registered events, 5-25 Report, 1-35 creating, 1-35 database configuration, 1-36 enterprise, 1-36 system requirements, 1-37 Report Wizard, 1-35 launching, 1-37 Resource Management events, 5-10 right mouse button used in the Navigator, 1-4 right-mouse button Related Tools menu, 2-4 role operations, Security Management, 7-15 rollback segment operations of Storage Management features, 7-18 rollback segments, 7-16 Run DBA Script task, 4-25 Run OS Command task, 4-28 Run SQL*Plus task, 4-24 Run Tcl Script task, 4-28 S sample images, 3-6 saving job history, 4-10 schedule and manage jobs, 4-5 execution of a job, 4-17 job, 4-5 Schema Management, 7-10 Security Management, 7-13 Service Discovery Navigator menu option, 2-5 Service Name, 1-25 Service Type, 1-25 setting a bitmap background Map menu, 3-6 setting up paging service, 1-28 short-cut menu, 1-4 Shutdown Database task, 4-25 Shutdown Listener task, 4-30 signal flag on map objects, 3-7 SMTP mail setup, 1-6 Space Management event, 5-10 specifying service names, 1-26 split (new) view Navigator, 2-6 splitting the Navigator tree, 2-4, 2-6 new view, 2-6
  • 220. SQL Oracle SQL*Plus Worksheet, 7-20 SQL error job task, 4-25 SQL*Net network services, 2-2 SQL*Plus Worksheet, 7-20 starting paging service, 1-32 Startup Database task, 4-26 Startup Listener task, 4-30 status of a map object, 3-7 of a registered event set, 5-6 stopping paging service, 1-34 Storage Management, 7-16 summary of the pending jobs Active Jobs page, 4-7 Super Administrator, 1-8 T tablespace operations of Storage Management features, 7-18 tablespaces, 7-16 task parameters Job system, 4-17 Tcl job scripts, 4-2 script examples, 4-29 third-party events creating, 5-12 with job task, 4-29 tnsnames.ora, 2-9 tools DBA Studio, 7-2 Tools menu, 1-6 U unsolicited event, 5-12, 5-33 unsolicited events, 5-10 UpDown (Database) event, 5-41 UpDown (Listener) event, 5-42 Index-6 UpDown (Node) event, 5-41 user operations, Security Management, 7-14 user preferences jobs, 4-4, 4-17 when running jobs, 4-4, 4-17 user-defined groups job destinations, 4-15 user-defined map views creating, 3-4 W web server discovering, 2-11 Wizard Job Tasks, 4-24 worksheet, Oracle SQL*Plus Worksheet, 7-20